Preamble | Pre.1-Pre.5 |
INTERNATIONAL CODE OF BOTANICAL NOMENCLATURE
PREAMBLE
1.
Botany requires a precise
and simple system of nomenclature
used by
botanists in all countries,
dealing on the one hand with the terms
that denote
the ranks of taxonomic groups or units,
and on the other hand with the
scientific names
that are applied
to the individual taxonomic groups of
plants¹.
The purpose of giving a name to a taxonomic group is not
to indi-
cate its characters or history,
but to supply a means of referring to it and to
indicate its taxonomic rank. This
Code aims at the provision of a stable
method of naming taxonomic groups,
avoiding and rejecting the use of
names
that
may cause error or ambiguity
or throw science into confusion.
Next in importance is the avoidance
of the useless creation of names.
Other
considerations,
such as absolute grammatical correctness,
regularity or eu-
phony of names,
more or less prevailing custom,
regard for persons, etc.,
notwithstanding their undeniable importance,
are relatively accessory.
2. The Principles form the basis of the system of botanical nomenclature.
3.
The detailed Provisions are divided into Rules,
set out in the Articles,
and Recommendations.
Examples (Ex.) are added to the rules
and recom-
mendations to illustrate them.
4.
The object of the Rules is
to put the nomenclature of the past into order
and to provide for that of the future;
names contrary to a rule cannot be
maintained.
5.
The Recommendations deal with subsidiary points,
their object being to
bring about greater uniformity
and clarity, especially in future nomencla-
———————————————————————
¹
In this
Code, unless otherwise indicated,
the word “plant” means any organism tradition-
ally studied by botanists (see
Pre. 7).
1 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 01 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Pre.5-Pre.11 | Preamble |
ture;
names contrary to a recommendation cannot,
on that account, be
rejected,
but they are not examples to be followed.
6.
The provisions regulating the governance of this
Code form its
last di-
vision.
7.
The rules and recommendations
apply to all organisms traditionally
treated as plants, whether fossil or non-fossil¹,
e.g. blue-green algae
(Cyano-
bacteria)²;
fungi, including chytrids, oomycetes, and slime moulds;
pho-
tosynthetic protists and
taxonomically related non-photosynthetic groups.
Provisions for the names of hybrids appear in
App. I.
8.
The
International code of nomenclature
for cultivated plants
is prepared
under the authority of the
International Commission for the Nomenclature
of Cultivated Plants
and deals with the use and formation of names for
special plant categories in agricultural, forestry,
and horticultural nomen-
clature.
9.
The only proper reasons for changing a name
are either a more profound
knowledge of the facts
resulting from adequate taxonomic study or the
necessity of giving up a nomenclature
that is contrary to the rules.
10.
In the absence of a relevant rule or where
the consequences of rules are
doubtful,
established custom is followed.
11. This edition of the Code supersedes all previous editions.
———————————————————————
¹
In this
Code, the term “fossil” is applied to a taxon
when its name is based on a fossil type
and the term “non-fossil” is applied to a taxon
when its name is based on a non-fossil type
(see Art.
13.3).
²
For the nomenclature of other prokaryote groups,
see the
International code of nomen-
clature of bacteria
(Bacteriological Code).
2 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 02 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Principles | I-VI |
Botanical nomenclature is independent of zoological
and bacteriological
nomenclature.
The
Code applies equally to names of taxonomic groups
treated as plants whether or not these groups
were originally so treated (see
Pre. 7).
The application of names of taxonomic groups
is determined by means of
nomenclatural types.
The nomenclature of a taxonomic group is based upon
priority of pub-
lication.
Each taxonomic group with a particular circumscription,
position, and rank
can bear only one correct name,
the earliest that is in accordance with the
Rules,
except in specified cases.
Scientific names of taxonomic groups
are treated as Latin regardless of
their derivation.
The Rules of nomenclature
are retroactive unless expressly limited.
3 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 03 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
1-2 | Taxa & Ranks |
DIVISION II. RULES AND RECOMMENDATIONS
CHAPTER
I.
TAXA AND THEIR RANKS
1.1.
Taxonomic groups of any rank will, in this
Code,
be referred to as taxa
(singular: taxon).
1.2.
Fossil taxa
(diatoms excepted)
may be treated as morphotaxa.
A mor-
photaxon is defined
as a fossil taxon which,
for nomenclatural purposes,
comprises only the
one
part,
life-history stage,
or preservational state rep-
resented by the corresponding nomenclatural type.
Note 1.
Any fossil taxon that is described as including
more than one part, life-
history stage, or preservational state
is not a morphotaxon.
Ex. 1.
Alcicornopteris hallei J. Walton (in Ann. Bot, n.s., 13: 450. 1949)
was described from
fossil material
that included a compression on the surface
of a petrified nodule with anatomy
permitting description of the rachides,
sporangia, and spores of a pteridosperm.
This species
comprises two preservational stages,
two life-history stages, and three parts of the plant
and
is therefore not a morphotaxon.
Ex. 2.
Protofagacea allonensis Herend. & al.
(in Int. J. Pl. Sci. 56: 94. 1995) was described
on the basis of dichasia of staminate flowers,
with anthers containing pollen grains, fruits,
and cupules.
This species comprises more than one part
and more than one life-history stage
and is therefore not a morphotaxon.
1.3.
As in the case of form-taxa for asexual forms
(anamorphs) of certain
pleomorphic fungi (Art.
59),
the provisions of this
Code authorize the
publication
and use of names of morphotaxa (Art.
11.7).
2.1.
Every individual plant is treated
as belonging to an indefinite number
of taxa of consecutively subordinate rank,
among which the rank of species
(species) is basic.
4 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 04 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Taxa & Ranks | 3-4 |
3.1.
The principal ranks of taxa
in descending sequence are:
kingdom
(regnum),
division or phylum (divisio, phylum),
class (classis),
order (ordo),
family (familia),
genus (genus), and
species (species).
Thus, each species is
assignable to a genus,
each genus to a family, etc.
Note 1.
Species and subdivisions of genera
must be assigned to genera, and
infraspecific taxa must be assigned to species,
because their names are com-
binations (Art.
21.1,
23.1, and
24.1),
but this provision does not preclude the
placement of taxa as incertae sedis
with regard to ranks higher than genus.
Ex. 1.
The genus
Haptanthus Goldberg & C. Nelson
(in Syst. Bot. 14: 16. 1989) was orig-
inally described without being assigned to a family.
Ex. 2.
The family assignment of the fossil genus
Paradinandra Schönenberger & E. M.
Friis
(in Amer. J. Bot. 88: 467. 2001)
was given as “incertae sedis”.
3.2.
The principal ranks of nothotaxa (hybrid taxa)
are nothogenus and
nothospecies.
These ranks are the same as genus and species.
The
prefix
“notho” indicates the hybrid character
(see App. I).
4.1.
The secondary ranks of taxa in descending sequence
are tribe (tribus)
between family and genus,
section (sectio) and series (series) between
genus
and species, and variety (varietas) and form (forma)
below species.
4.2.
If a greater number of ranks of taxa is desired,
the terms for these are
made by adding the prefix
“sub-” to the terms denoting the principal or
secondary ranks.
A plant may thus be assigned to taxa
of the following
ranks (in descending sequence):
regnum,
subregnum,
divisio or phylum,
subdivisio or subphylum,
classis,
subclassis,
ordo,
subordo,
familia,
sub-
familia,
tribus,
subtribus,
genus,
subgenus,
sectio,
subsectio,
series,
sub-
series,
species,
subspecies,
varietas,
subvarietas,
forma,
subforma.
Note 1.
Ranks formed by adding “sub-”
to the principal ranks (Art.
3.1)
may be
formed and used whether or not
any secondary ranks (Art.
4.1)
are adopted.
4.3.
Further ranks may also be intercalated or added,
provided that con-
fusion or error
is not thereby introduced.
4.4.
The subordinate ranks of nothotaxa are the same
as the subordinate
ranks of non-hybrid taxa,
except that nothogenus is the highest rank per-
mitted (see
App. I).
Note
2.
Throughout this
Code the phrase “subdivision of a family”
refers only to
taxa of a rank between family
and genus and “subdivision of a genus”
refers only to
taxa of a rank
between genus and species.
5 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 05 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
4-5A | Taxa & Ranks |
Note
3.
For the designation of certain categories of plants
used in agriculture,
forestry, and horticulture,
see Art. 28
Notes 2-5.
Note
4.
In classifying parasites, especially fungi,
authors who do not give specific,
subspecific, or varietal value to taxa characterized
from a physiological standpoint
but scarcely or not at all
from a morphological standpoint
may distinguish within
the species special forms (formae speciales)
characterized by their adaptation to
different hosts,
but the nomenclature of special forms
is not governed by the pro-
visions of this
Code.
5.1.
The relative order of the ranks specified in Art.
3 and
4
must not be
altered (see Art.
33.9 and
33.12).
5A.1.
For purposes of standardization,
the following abbreviations are recom-
mended:
cl. (class),
ord. (order),
fam. (family),
tr. (tribe),
gen. (genus),
sect. (sec-
tion),
ser. (series),
sp. (species),
var. (variety),
f. (forma).
The abbreviations for
additional ranks created by
the addition of the prefix sub-,
or for nothotaxa with the
prefix notho-,
should be formed by adding the prefixes, e.g.
subsp. (subspecies),
nothosp. (nothospecies),
but subg. (subgenus).
6 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 06 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Status definitions | 6 |
CHAPTER II. STATUS, TYPIFICATION, AND PRIORITY OF
NAMES
6.1. Effective publication is publication in accordance with Art. 29-31.
6.2.
Valid publication of names
is publication in accordance with Art.
32-45 or
H.9
(see also Art.
61).
Note 1.
For nomenclatural purposes,
valid publication creates a name, and
sometimes also an autonym (Art.
22.1 and
26.1),
but does not itself imply any
taxonomic circumscription
beyond inclusion of the type of the name (Art.
7.1).
6.3.
In this
Code, unless otherwise indicated,
the word “name” means a
name
that has been validly published,
whether it is legitimate or illegitimate
(see Art.
12).
Note 2.
When the same name, based on the same type,
has been published inde-
pendently
at different times by different authors,
then only the earliest of these
“isonyms” has nomenclatural status.
The name is always to be cited from its orig-
inal place of valid publication,
and later “isonyms” may be disregarded.
Ex. 1.
Baker (Summary New Ferns: 9. 1892) and
Christensen (Index Filic: 44. 1905)
independently published the name
Alsophila kalbreyeri as a substitute for
A. podophylla
Baker (1891) non Hook. (1857).
As published by Christensen,
Alsophila kalbreyeri is a later
“isonym” of
A. kalbreyeri Baker,
without nomenclatural status
(see also Art. 33
Ex.
19).
Ex. 2.
In publishing
“Canarium pimela Leenh. nom. nov.”, Leenhouts
(in Blumea 9: 406.
1959) reused the illegitimate
C. pimela K. D. Koenig (1805),
attributing it to himself and
basing it on the same type.
He thereby created a later “isonym”
without nomenclatural status.
6.4.
An illegitimate name is one
that is designated as such in Art.
18.3,
19.5, or
52-54
(see also Art. 21
Note 1 and Art. 24
Note 2).
A name which
according to this
Code was illegitimate when published cannot become
legitimate later unless it is conserved or sanctioned.
7 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 07 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
6-7 | Status definitions – Typification |
Ex. 3.
Anisothecium Mitt. (1869)
when published included the previously designated type
of
Dicranella (Müll. Hal.) Schimp. (1856). When
Dicranella was conserved with a different
type,
Anisothecium did not thereby become legitimate.
Ex. 4.
Skeletonemopsis P. A. Sims (1995)
was illegitimate when published
because it
included the original type of
Skeletonema Grev. (1865). When
Skeletonema was conserved
with a different type,
Skeletonemopsis nevertheless remained illegitimate
and had to be
conserved in order to be available for use.
6.5.
A legitimate name is one
that is in accordance with the rules, i.e. one
that is not illegitimate as defined in Art. 6.4.
6.6.
At the rank of family or below,
the correct name of a taxon with a
particular circumscription, position, and rank
is the legitimate name which
must be adopted for it under the rules (see Art.
11).
Ex. 5.
The generic name
Vexillifera Ducke (1922),
based on the single species
V. micran-
thera, is legitimate.
The same is true of the generic name
Dussia Krug & Urb. ex Taub.
(1892),
based on the single species
D. martinicensis.
Both generic names are correct when
the genera are thought to be separate.
Harms (in Repert. Spec. Nov. Regni Veg. 19: 291.
1924), however, united
Vexillifera and
Dussia in a single genus;
the latter name is the
correct one for the genus
with this particular circumscription.
The legitimate name
Vexil-
lifera may therefore be correct
or incorrect according to different taxonomic concepts.
6.7.
The name of a taxon below the rank of genus,
consisting of the name
of a genus combined
with one or two epithets, is termed a combination
(see
Art.
21,
23, and
24).
Ex. 6.
Combinations:
Mouriri subg.
Pericrene,
Arytera sect.
Mischarytera,
Gentiana lutea,
Gentiana tenella var.
occidentalis,
Equisetum palustre var.
americanum,
Equisetum palus-
tre f.
fluitans.
6.8.
Autonyms are such names
as can be established automatically under
Art.
22.3 and
26.3,
whether or not they appear in print in the publication
in
which they are created (see Art.
32.8, Rec.
22B.1 and
26B.1).
7.1.
The application of names of taxa of the rank of family
or below is
determined by means of nomenclatural types
(types of names of taxa). The
application of names of taxa
in the higher ranks is also determined by
means of types
when the names are ultimately based on generic names
(see
Art.
10.7).
8 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 08 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Typification | 7 |
7.2.
A nomenclatural type (typus)
is that element to which the name of a
taxon is permanently attached, whether as
the correct name
or as a syn-
onym.
The nomenclatural type is not necessarily
the most typical or rep-
resentative element of a taxon.
7.3.
A new name published as an avowed substitute
(replacement name,
nomen novum) for an older name
is typified by the type of the older name
(see Art.
33.4; but see Art. 33
Note 2).
Ex. 1.
Myrcia lucida McVaugh (1969)
was published as a nomen novum for
M. laevis
O. Berg (1862),
an illegitimate homonym of
M. laevis G. Don (1832). The type of
M. lucida
is therefore the type of
M. laevis O. Berg (non G. Don), namely,
Spruce 3502
(BR).
7.4.
A new name formed
from a previously published legitimate name
(stat. nov., comb. nov.) is, in all circumstances,
typified by the type of the
basionym,
even though it may have been applied erroneously to a taxon
now considered not to include that type (but see Art.
48.1 and
59.6).
Ex. 2.
Pinus mertensiana Bong. was transferred to the genus
Tsuga by Carrière, who,
however, as is evident from his description,
erroneously applied the new combination
T.
mertensiana to another species of
Tsuga, namely
T. heterophylla (Raf.) Sarg. The com-
bination
Tsuga mertensiana (Bong.) Carrière must not be applied to
T. heterophylla but
must be retained for
P. mertensiana when that species is placed in
Tsuga; the citation in
parentheses (under Art.
49)
of the name of the original author, Bongard, indicates
the
basionym,
and hence
the type of the name.
Ex. 3.
Delesseria gmelinii J. V. Lamour. (1813),
is a legitimate replacement name for
Fucus
palmetta S. G. Gmel. (1768),
the change of epithet
being necessitated by
the simultaneous
publication of
D. palmetta (Stackh.)
J. V. Lamour.
(see Art. 11
Note 1).
All
intended com-
binations based on
D. gmelinii (and not excluding the type of
F. palmetta; see Art.
48.1)
have the same type as
F. palmetta, even though the material
possessed by
Lamouroux is now
assigned to a different species,
D. bonnemaisonii C. Agardh (1822).
7.5.
A name
that is
illegitimate under
Art.
52
is typified
either
by the type
of the name
that
ought to have been adopted
under the rules
(automatic
typification),
or by a different type designated
or definitely indicated by the
author of the illegitimate name.
However,
if no type
was designated
or
definitely indicated
and the type
of the earlier name
was included
(see Art.
52.2) in a subordinate taxon
that did not include
the evidently intended type
of the illegitimate name,
typification
is not automatic.
Automatic typifica-
tion
does not apply to names sanctioned under Art.
15.
Ex. 4.
Bauhinia semla Wunderlin (1976)
is illegitimate under Art.
52 (see Art. 52
Ex. 10),
but its publication as a replacement name for
B. retusa Roxb. (1832) non Poir. (1811)
is
definite indication of a different type (that of
B. retusa) from that of the name
(B. roxburghi-
ana Voigt, 1845),
which ought to have been adopted.
Ex. 5.
Hewittia bicolor Wight & Arn. (1837), the type of
Hewittia Wight & Arn.,
is illegit-
imate under Art.
52
because,
in addition to the illegitimate intended basionym
Convolvulus
9 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 09 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
7 | Typification |
bicolor Vahl (1794) non Desr. (1792),
the legitimate
C. bracteatus Vahl (1794) was cited as
a synonym.
Wight & Arnott’s adoption of the epithet
“bicolor” is definite indication that the
type of
H. bicolor, and therefore the type of
Hewittia, is the type of
C. bicolor, and not that
of
C. bracteatus
whose epithet ought to have been adopted.
Ex. 6.
Gilia splendens,
when validly published by Mason & Grant
(in Madroño 9: 212.
1948),
included, as “a long-tubed form of the species”,
G. splendens subsp.
grinnellii based
on
G. grinnellii Brand (1907)
and is thus superfluous and illegitimate.
Although Mason &
Grant, believing that
G. splendens was already validly published,
did not indicate its type,
it
is not automatically that of
G. grinnellii; the specimen
that has since been adopted as the
conserved type could have been selected
as lectotype.
7.6.
The type of an autonym is the same as that of the name
from which it is
derived.
7.7.
A name validly published by reference to
a previously and effectively
published description or diagnosis (Art.
32.1(d))
is to be typified by an
element
selected from the context
of the validating description or diagnosis,
unless the validating author
has definitely designated a different type (but
see Art.
10.2).
However, the type of
a name of a taxon assigned to a group
with a nomenclatural starting-point later than
1 May 1753 (see Art
13.1)
is
to be determined in accordance
with the indication or descriptive and other
matter accompanying
its valid publication (see Art.
32-45).
Ex.
7.
Since the name
Adenanthera bicolor Moon (1824)
is validated solely by reference to
Rumphius (Herb. Amboin. 3: t. 112. 1743),
the type of the name, in the absence of the
specimen from which it was figured,
is the illustration referred to.
It is not the specimen, at
Kew,
collected by Moon and labelled
“Adenanthera bicolor”,
since Moon did not definitely
designate the latter as the type.
Ex.
8.
Echium lycopsis L. (Fl. Angl.: 12. 1754)
was published without a description or
diagnosis but with reference to
Ray (Syn. Meth. Stirp. Brit., ed. 3: 227. 1724),
in which a
“Lycopsis” species was discussed with no description
or diagnosis but with citation of
earlier references, including Bauhin (Pinax: 255. 1623).
The accepted validating description
of
E. lycopsis is that of Bauhin,
and the type must be chosen from the context of his work.
Consequently the Sherard specimen
in the Morison herbarium (OXF),
selected by Klotz (in
Wiss. Z. Martin-Luther-Univ.
Halle-Wittenberg Math.-Naturwiss. Reihe 9: 375-376. 1960),
although probably consulted by Ray,
is not eligible as type.
The first acceptable choice is
that of the illustration, cited by both Ray and Bauhin, of
“Echii altera species” in
Dodonaeus
(Stirp. Hist. Pempt.: 620. 1583), suggested by Gibbs
(in Lagascalia 1: 60-61.
1971) and formally made by Stearn
(in Ray Soc. Publ. 148, Introd.: 65. 1973).
7.8.
Typification of names adopted
in one of the works specified in Art.
13.1(d),
and thereby sanctioned (Art.
15),
may be effected in the light of
anything associated with the name in that work.
7.9.
The typification of names of morphotaxa of plant fossils (Art.
1.2),
of
fungal anamorphs (Art.
59),
and of any other analogous
taxa
at
or
below
the
rank of
genus
does not differ from that indicated above.
10 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 10 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Typification | 7-8 |
Note 1.
See also Art.
59
for details regarding typification of names
in certain pleo-
morphic fungi.
7.10.
For purposes of priority (Art.
9.17,
9.18, and
10.5),
designation of a
type is achieved only
by effective publication (Art.
29-31).
7.11.
For purposes of priority (Art.
9.17,
9.18, and
10.5),
designation of a
type is achieved only
if the type is definitely accepted as such
by the typi-
fying author,
if the type element is clearly indicated
by direct citation inclu-
ding the term “type” (typus) or an equivalent,
and, on or after 1 January
2001,
if the typification statement includes the phrase
“designated here”
(hic designatus) or an equivalent.
Note 2.
Art. 7.10 and 7.11 apply only to the designation
of lectotypes (and their
equivalents under Art.
10),
neotypes, and epitypes;
for the indication of a holotype
see Art.
37.
Ex.
9.
Chlorosarcina Gerneck (1907)
originally comprised two species,
C. minor and
C.
elegans. Vischer (1933) transferred the former to
Chlorosphaera G. A. Klebs and retained
the latter in
Chlorosarcina.
He did not, however,
use the term “type” or an equivalent,
so
that his action
does not constitute typification of
Chlorosarcina.
The first to designate a
type, as “LT.”,
was Starr (in ING Card No. 16528, Nov 1962),
who selected
Chlorosarcina
elegans.
*Ex.
10.
The phrase “standard species”
as used by Hitchcock & Green (in Anonymous,
Nomencl. Prop. Brit. Botanists: 110-199. 1929)
is now treated as equivalent to “type”,
and
hence type designations in this work
are acceptable.
7A.1.
It is strongly recommended that the material
on which the name of a taxon is
based,
especially the holotype,
be deposited in a public herbarium
or other public
collection
with a policy of giving bona fide botanists open access
to deposited mater-
ial,
and that it be scrupulously conserved.
8.1.
The type (holotype, lectotype, or neotype)
of a name of a species or
infraspecific taxon
is either a single specimen conserved in one herbarium
or other collection or institution,
or an illustration
(but see also Art.
37.4
and
37.6
for names published
on or after
January 1958).
8.2.
For the purpose of typification a specimen
is a gathering, or part of a
gathering,
of a single species or infraspecific taxon
made at one time, dis-
regarding admixtures (see Art.
9.12).
It may consist of a single plant, parts
———————————————————————
*
Here and elsewhere in the
Code,
a prefixed asterisk denotes a “voted Example”,
accepted
by a Congress in order
to legislate nomenclatural practice
when the corresponding Article of
the
Code is open to divergent interpretration or
does not adequately cover the matter.
11 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 11 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
8 | Typification |
of one or several plants, or of multiple small plants.
A specimen is usually
mounted on a single herbarium sheet
or in an equivalent preparation, such
as a box, packet,
jar or microscope slide.
Ex. 1.
“Echinocereus sanpedroensis” (Raudonat & Rischer
in Echinocereenfreund 8(4):
91-92. 1995)
was based on a “holotype” consisting of a complete plant with roots,
a de-
tached branch,
an entire flower,
a flower cut in halves,
and two fruits,
which according to the
label were taken from
the same cultivated individual at different times
and preserved, in
alcohol, in a single jar.
This material belongs to more than one gathering
and cannot be
accepted as a type.
Raudonat & Rischer’s name is not validly published
under Art.
37.2.
8.3.
A specimen may be mounted as more than one preparation,
as long as
the parts are clearly labelled
as being part of that same specimen.
Multiple
preparations from a single gathering
that are not clearly labelled
as being
part of a single specimen are duplicates¹,
irrespective of whether the source
was one plant
or more than one (but see Art. 8.5).
Ex. 2.
The holotype specimen of
Delissea eleeleensis H. St. John,
Christensen 261 (BISH),
is mounted as two preparations,
a herbarium sheet (BISH No. 519675) bearing the
annotation “fl. bottled”
and an inflorescence preserved in alcohol in a jar labelled
“Cyanea,
Christensen 261”.
The annotation indicates that the inflorescence
is part of the holotype
specimen and not a duplicate,
nor is it part of the isotype specimen (BISH No. 519676),
which is not labelled as including additional
material preserved in a separate preparation.
Ex. 3.
The holotype specimen of
Johannesteijsmannia magnifica J. Dransf.,
Dransfield 862
(K), consists of a leaf
mounted on five herbarium sheets, an inflorescence
and infructes-
cence in a box,
and liquid-preserved material in a bottle.
Ex. 4.
The holotype of
Cephaëlis acanthacea Steyerm.,
Cuatrecasas 16752 (F), consists of
a single specimen mounted on two herbarium sheets,
labelled “sheet 1” and “sheet 2”.
Although the two sheets have separate
herbarium accession numbers,
F-1153741 and
F-1153742, respectively,
the cross-labelling indicates
that they constitute a single specimen.
A third sheet of
Cuatrecasas 16572, F-1153740,
is not cross-labelled
and is therefore a
duplicate.
Ex. 5.
The holotype specimen of
Eugenia ceibensis Standl.,
Yuncker & al. 8309,
is mounted
on a single herbarium sheet at F.
A fragment was removed from the specimen
subsequent to
its designation as holotype
and is now conserved in LL.
The fragment is mounted on a
herbarium sheet
along with a photograph of the holotype and is labelled
“fragment of type!”.
The fragment is no longer part of the holotype specimen
because it is not permanently
conserved
in the same herbarium as the holotype.
Such fragments have the status of a
duplicate, i.e. an isotype.
8.4.
Type specimens of names of taxa
must be preserved permanently and
may not be living plants or cultures.
However, cultures of fungi and algae,
———————————————————————
¹
Here and elsewhere in this
Code, the word duplicate
is given its usual meaning in her-
barium curatorial practice.
It is part of a single gathering of a single species
or infraspecific
taxon made by the same collector(s) at one time.
The possibility of a mixed gathering must
always be considered by an author choosing a lectotype,
and corresponding caution used.
12 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 12 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Typification | 8-9 |
if preserved in a metabolically inactive state
(e.g. by lyophilization or deep-
freezing),
are acceptable as types.
Ex. 6.
The strain CBS 7351
is acceptable as the type of the name
Candida populi Hagler &
al.
(in Int. J. Syst. Bacteriol. 39: 98. 1989)
because it is permanently preserved in a meta-
bolically inactive state by lyophilization (see also Rec.
8B.2).
8.5.
The type, epitypes (Art.
9.7)
excepted, of the name of a taxon of fossil
plants of the rank of species or below
is always a specimen (see Art.
9.13).
One whole specimen is to be considered
as the nomenclatural type (see
Rec.
8A.3).
8A.1.
When a holotype, a lectotype, or a neotype
is an illustration, the specimen or
specimens
upon which that illustration is based should be used
to help determine
the application of the name
(see also Art.
9.13).
8A.2.
When an illustration is designated
as the type of a name under Art.
37.5,
the
collection data of the illustrated material
should be given (see also Rec.
32D.2).
8A.3.
If the type specimen of a name of a fossil plant
is cut into pieces (sections of
fossil wood,
pieces of coalball plants, etc.),
all parts originally used in establishing
the diagnosis
should
be clearly marked.
8A.4.
When a single specimen designated as type
is mounted as multiple pre-
parations,
this should be stated in the protologue¹,
and the preparations appropri-
ately labelled.
8B.1.
Whenever practicable a living culture
should be prepared from the holotype
material
of the name of a newly described taxon of fungi or algae
and deposited in
at least two institutional culture
or genetic resource collections.
(Such action does
not obviate the requirement
for a holotype specimen under Art.
8.4.)
8B.2.
In cases where the type of a name
is a culture permanently preserved in a
metabolically inactive state (see Art. 8
Ex. 6),
any living isolates obtained from that
should be referred to as “ex-type” (ex typo),
“ex-holotype” (ex holotypo),
“ex-
isotype” (ex isotypo), etc.,
in order to make it clear they are derived from the type
but are not themselves the nomenclatural type.
9.1.
A holotype of a name of a species
or infraspecific taxon is the one
specimen or illustration (but see Art.
37.4)
used by the author, or designated
———————————————————————
¹
Protologue (from the Greek
πρώτος,
protos, first;
λόγος,
logos, discourse): everything asso-
ciated with a name at its valid publication,
i.e. description or diagnosis, illustrations, refer-
ences, synonymy, geographical data, citation of specimens,
discussion, and comments.
13 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 13 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
9 | Typification |
by the author as the nomenclatural type.
As long as a holotype is extant, it
fixes the application of the name concerned (but see Art.
9.13; see also Art.
10).
Note 1.
Any designation made by the original author,
if definitely expressed at the
time of the original publication of the name
of the taxon, is final (but see Art.
9.9
and
9.13).
If the author used only one element,
that one must be accepted as the
holotype.
If a new name is based on a previously published description
or diagnosis
of the taxon,
the same considerations apply to material
included by the earlier
author (see Art.
7.7 and
7.8).
9.2.
A lectotype is a specimen or illustration designated
from the original
material as the nomenclatural type,
in conformity with Art.
9.9 and
9.10,
if
no holotype was indicated at the time of publication,
or if it is missing, or if
it is found to belong
to more than one taxon (see also Art.
9.12).
Note 2.
For the purposes of this
Code, the original material comprises:
(a) those
specimens and illustrations
(both unpublished and published either prior to
or
together with the protologue)
upon which it can be shown that the description or
diagnosis validating the name was based;
(b) the holotype and those specimens
which,
even if not seen by the author of the description
or diagnosis validating the
name,
were indicated as types (syntypes or paratypes)
of the name at its valid
publication; and
(c) the isotypes or isosyntypes of the name
irrespective of whether
such specimens
were seen by either the author of the validating
description or
diagnosis,
or the author of the name
(but see also Art.
7.7, second sentence,
and
7.8).
9.3. An isotype is any duplicate of the holotype; it is always a specimen.
9.4.
A syntype is any specimen
cited in the protologue when
there is
no
holotype,
or any one of two or more specimens
simultaneously designated
as types
(see also
Art. 37
Note 1).
Ex. 1.
In the protologue of
Laurentia frontidentata E. Wimm.
(see Art. 37
Ex. 2)
a single
gathering in two herbaria
was designated as the type.
There must exist, therefore, at least two
specimens and these are syntypes.
9.5.
A paratype is a specimen cited in the protologue
that is neither the
holotype nor an isotype,
nor one of the syntypes if two or more specimens
were simultaneously designated as types.
Ex.
2.
The holotype of the name
Rheedia kappleri Eyma
(1932),
which applies to a
polygamous species,
is a male specimen,
Kappler 593a (U).
The author designated a herma-
phroditic specimen,
Forestry Service of Surinam
B. W. 1618
(U), as a paratype.
Note 3.
In most cases in which no holotype was designated
there will also be no
paratypes, since all the cited
specimens will be syntypes. However, when an author
designated two or more specimens as types (Art.
9.4),
any remaining cited spe-
cimens
are paratypes and not syntypes.
14 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 14 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Typification | 9 |
Ex. 3.
In the protologue of
Eurya hebeclados Y. Ling (1951)
the author simultaneously
designated two specimens as types,
Y. Ling 5014 as “typus, ♂” and
Y. Y. Tung 315 as “typus,
♀”, which are therefore syntypes.
Ling also cited the specimen
Y. Ling 5366 but without
designating it as a type;
it is therefore a paratype.
9.6.
A neotype is a specimen or illustration
selected to serve as nomen-
clatural type
if no
original material
is extant,
or
as long as
it is missing (see
also Art.
9.14).
9.7.
An epitype is a specimen or illustration
selected to serve as an
interpretative type
when the holotype, lectotype, or previously designated
neotype, or all original material
associated with a validly published name,
is demonstrably ambiguous
and cannot be critically identified for purposes
of the precise application of the name of a taxon
(but see also Art.
59.7).
When an epitype is designated, the holotype,
lectotype, or neotype that the
epitype supports must be explicitly cited (see Art.
9.18).
Ex.
4.
The holotype of
Vitellaria paradoxa C. F. Gaertn. (1807)
is a seed of unknown
provenance (P),
clearly belonging to the species currently known as
Butyrospermum para-
doxum (C. F. Gaertn.) Hepper.
However,
the two subspecies recognized within that species
can only be distinguished by characters of foliage
or inflorescence.
Hall & Hindle
(in Taxon
44: 410. 1995)
designated an epitype with foliage,
Mungo Park (BM).
It belongs to the
western subspecies,
now to be known as
B. paradoxum subsp.
paradoxum.
Ex. 5.
Podlech (in Taxon 46: 465. 1997) designated
Herb. Linn. No. 926.43 (LINN) as
the lectotype of
Astragalus trimestris L. (1753).
He simultaneously designated an epitype
(Egypt. Düben oberhalb Rosetta am linken Nilufer
bei Schech Mantur, 9 May 1902,
Anon-
ymous (BM)),
because the lectotype lacked fruits,
“which show important diagnostic feat-
ures for this species.”
9.8.
The use of a term defined in the
Code (Art. 9.1-9.7) as denoting a type,
in a sense other than that in which it is so defined,
is treated as an error to be
corrected
(for example, the use of the term lectotype
to denote what is in
fact a neotype).
Note 4. Correction can be effected only if the requirements of Art. 7.11 are met.
Ex.
6.
Borssum Waalkes (in Blumea 14: 198. 1966)
cited Herb. Linnaeus No. 866.7 (LINN)
as the holotype of
Sida retusa L. (1763).
The term is incorrectly used because illustrations in
Plukenet (Phytographia: t. 9, f. 2. 1691)
and Rumphius (Herb. Amboin. 6: t. 19. 1750)
were
cited by Linnaeus in the protologue of
S. retusa.
Since all three elements are original
material (Art. 9
Note 2),
Borssum Waalkes’s use of holotype is
an error to be corrected to
lectotype.
9.9.
If no holotype was indicated by the author
of a name of a species or
infraspecific taxon,
or when the holotype has been lost or destroyed,
or
when the material designated as type is found
to belong to more than one
taxon,
a lectotype or, if permissible (Art. 9.6),
a neotype as a substitute for
it may be designated (Art.
7.10 and
7.11).
15 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 15 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
9 | Typification |
9.10.
In lectotype designation, an isotype
must be chosen if such exists, or
otherwise a syntype if such exists.
If no isotype, syntype or isosyntype
(duplicate of syntype) is extant,
the lectotype must be chosen from among
the paratypes if such exist.
If no cited specimens exist,
the lectotype must
be chosen
from among the uncited specimens
and cited and uncited illus-
trations
which comprise the remaining original material,
if such exist.
9.11.
If no original material is extant
or as long
as it is missing,
a neotype
may be selected.
A lectotype always takes precedence over a neotype,
ex-
cept as provided by Art.
9.14.
9.12.
When a type specimen
(herbarium sheet or equivalent preparation)
contains parts belonging to more than one taxon
(see Art. 9.9), the name
must remain attached to that part
which corresponds most nearly with the
original description or diagnosis.
Ex.
7.
The type of the name
Tillandsia bryoides Griseb. ex Baker (1878) is
Lorentz 128
(BM);
this specimen, however, proved to be mixed.
Smith (in Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts 70:
192. 1935)
acted in accordance with Art. 9.12 in designating
one part of Lorentz’s specimen
as the lectotype.
9.13.
The holotype (or lectotype) of
a name of a species or infraspecific
taxon of fossil plants (Art.
8.5)
is the specimen (or one of the specimens)
on which the validating illustrations (Art.
38)
are based. When, prior to 1
January 2001 (see Art.
38.2),
in the protologue of a name of a new taxon of
fossil plants of the rank of species or below,
a type specimen is indicated
(Art.
37.1)
but not identified among the validating illustrations,
a lectotype
must be designated
from among the specimens illustrated in the protologue.
This choice is superseded if it can be demonstrated
that the original type
specimen corresponds
to another validating illustration.
9.14.
When a holotype
or a previously designated lectotype
has been lost
or destroyed
and it can be shown that all the other original material
differs
taxonomically from the destroyed type,
a neotype may be selected to pre-
serve
the usage established by the previous typification
(see also Art.
9.16).
9.15.
A designation of a lectotype or neotype
that later is found to refer to a
single gathering but
to
more than one specimen must nevertheless be
accepted (subject to Art. 9.17),
but may be further narrowed to a single one
of these specimens by way of a subsequent lectotypification
or neotypi-
fication.
Ex.
8.
Erigeron plantagineus Greene (1898)
was described from material collected
by R.
M. Austin in California.
Cronquist (in Brittonia 6: 173. 1947) wrote “Type:
Austin s.n.,
Modoc County, California (ND)”,
thereby designating the Austin material in ND
as the
[first-step] lectotype.
Strother & Ferlatte (in Madroño 35: 85. 1988),
noting that there were
16 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 16 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Typification | 9-9A |
two specimens of this gathering at ND,
designated one of them
(ND-G No. 057228) as the
[second-step] lectotype.
In subsequent references,
both lectotypification steps
may be cited
in sequence.
9.16.
A neotype selected under Art.
9.14
may be superseded if it can be
shown
to differ taxonomically from the holotype
or lectotype that it re-
placed.
9.17.
The author who first designates a lectotype
or a neotype must be
followed,
but that choice is superseded if
(a) the holotype or,
in the case of
a neotype,
any of the original material is rediscovered;
the choice may also
be superseded
if one can show that
(b) it is in serious conflict
with the
protologue
and another element is available
that is not in conflict with the
protologue, or that
(c) it is contrary to Art.
9.12.
9.18.
The author who first designates an epitype
must be followed; a
different epitype
may be designated only if the original epitype is lost
or de-
stroyed.
A lectotype or neotype supported by an epitype
may be superseded
in accordance
with Art. 9.17 or, in the case of a neotype, Art. 9.16.
If it can
be shown that an epitype
and the type it supports differ taxonomically and
that neither Art. 9.16 nor 9.17 applies,
the name may be proposed for con-
servation
with a conserved type (Art.
14.9; see also Art.
57).
Note 5.
An epitype supports only the type
to which it is linked by the typifying
author.
If the supported type is superseded,
the epitype has no standing with respect
to the replacement type.
9.19.
Designation of an epitype is not effected
unless the herbarium or
institution
in which the epitype is conserved is specified or,
if the epitype is
a published illustration,
a full and direct bibliographic reference
to it is
provided.
9.20.
On or after 1 January 1990, lectotypification
or neotypification of a
name of a species
or infraspecific taxon by a specimen
or unpublished illus-
tration
is not effected unless the herbarium or institution
in which the type
is conserved is specified.
9.21.
On or after 1 January 2001,
lectotypification or neotypification of a
name of a species or infraspecific taxon
is not effected unless indicated by
use of the term “lectotypus” or “neotypus”,
its abbreviation, or its equiv-
alent in a modern language
(but see Art. 9.8).
9A.1.
Typification of names for which no holotype was designated
should only be
carried out with an understanding of
the author’s method of working; in particular
17 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 17 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
9A-10 | Typification |
it should be realized that some of the material
used by the author in describing the
taxon may not be in the author’s own herbarium
or may not even have survived,
and conversely, that not all the material
surviving in the author’s herbarium
was
necessarily used in describing the taxon.
9A.2.
Designation of a lectotype should be undertaken
only in the light of an
understanding
of the group concerned.
In choosing a lectotype,
all aspects of the
protologue
should be considered as a basic guide.
Mechanical methods, such as the
automatic selection of the first element
cited or of a specimen collected by the
person
after whom a species is named,
should be avoided as unscientific
and
productive of possible future confusion
and further changes.
9A.3.
In choosing a lectotype, any indication of intent
by the author of a name
should be given preference
unless such indication is contrary to the protologue.
Such indications are manuscript notes,
annotations on herbarium sheets,
recog-
nizable figures, and epithets such as
typicus, genuinus, etc.
9A.4.
When a single
gathering
is cited in the protologue,
but a particular institution
housing
it is not designated,
it should be assumed that the specimen housed in the
institution where the author is known to have worked
is the holotype, unless there
is evidence
that further material of the same
gathering was used.
9A.5.
When two or more heterogeneous elements
were included in or cited with
the original description or diagnosis,
the lectotype should be so selected as to
preserve current usage.
In particular,
if another author has already segregated one
or more elements as other taxa,
one of the
remaining elements
should be designated
as the lectotype provided
that this element is not in conflict
with the original
description or diagnosis
(see Art. 9.17).
9B.1.
In selecting a neotype,
particular care and critical knowledge should be
exercised because the reviewer usually has no guide
except personal judgement as
to what best fits the protologue;
if this selection proves to be faulty it will
inevita-
bly result in further change.
10.1.
The type of a name of a genus
or of any subdivision of a genus is the
type of a name of a species
(except as provided by Art. 10.4). For purposes
of designation or citation of a type,
the species name alone suffices, i.e., it is
considered as the full equivalent of its type.
Note 1.
Terms such as “holotype”, “syntype”,
and “lectotype”, as presently defined
in Art.
9,
although not applicable, strictly speaking,
to the types of names in ranks
higher than species, are so used by analogy.
18 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 18 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Typification | 10 |
10.2.
If in the protologue of the name of a genus
or of any subdivision of a
genus
the holotype or lectotype of one or more previously
or simulta-
neously published species name(s)
is definitely included (see Art. 10.3),
the
type must be chosen (Art.
7.10 and
7.11)
from among these types unless the
type was indicated (Art.
22.6,
22.7,
37.1 and
37.3)
or designated by the
author of the name.
If no type of a previously or simultaneously published
species name was definitely included,
a type must be otherwise chosen,
but
the choice is to be superseded
if it can be demonstrated that the selected
type is not conspecific with any of the material
associated with the proto-
logue.
Ex. 1.
The genus
Anacyclus,
as originally circumscribed by Linnaeus (1753),
comprised
three validly named species.
Cassini (in Cuvier, Dict. Sci. Nat. 34: 104. 1825)
designated
Anthemis valentina L. (1753) as type of
Anacyclus,
but this was not an original element of
the genus. Green (in Anonymous,
Nomencl. Prop. Brit. Botanists: 182. 1929) designated
Anacyclus valentinus L. (1753),
“the only one of the three original species
still retained in
the genus”,
as the “standard species” (see Art. 7
Ex.
10),
and her choice must be followed
(Art. 10.5).
Humphries (in Bull. Brit. Mus. (Nat. Hist.)
Bot. 7: 109. 1979) designated a
specimen
in the Clifford Herbarium (BM) as lectotype of
Anacyclus valentinus,
and that
specimen thereby became the ultimate type
of the generic name.
Ex. 2.
Castanella Spruce ex Benth. & Hook. f. (1862)
was described on the basis of a single
specimen
collected by Spruce and without mention of a species name.
Swart (in ING Card
No. 2143. 1957)
was the first to designate a type (as “T.”):
C. granatensis Triana & Planch.
(1862),
based on
Linden
1360.
As long as the Spruce specimen is considered
to be conspe-
cific with Linden’s
material, Swart’s
type designation cannot be superseded,
even though
the Spruce specimen
became the type of
Paullinia paullinioides Radlk. (1896),
because the
latter is not a
“previously or simultaneously published species name”.
10.3.
For the purposes of Art. 10.2,
definite inclusion of the type of a name
of a species is effected by citation of,
or reference (direct or indirect) to, a
validly published name,
whether accepted or synonymized by the author, or
by citation of the holotype or lectotype
of a previously or simultaneously
published name of a species.
Ex. 3.
The protologue of Elodes Adans. (1763)
included references to
“Elodes” of Clusius
(1601),
“Hypericum” of Tournefort (1700), and
Hypericum aegypticum L. (1753).
The last
is the only reference
to a validly published name of a species,
and neither of the other
elements is
the type of a name of a species.
The type of
H. aegypticum is therefore the type
of
Elodes, even though subsequent authors designated
H. elodes L. (1759) as the type (see
Robson
in Bull. Brit. Mus. (Nat. Hist.), Bot. 5: 305, 336. 1977).
10.4.
By and only by conservation (Art.
14.9),
the type of a name of a
genus
may be a specimen or illustration,
preferably used by the author in
the preparation of the protologue,
other than the type of a name of an in-
cluded species.
Ex. 4.
Physconia Poelt (1965)
was originally conserved with the specimen
“‘Lichen pul-
verulentus’,
Germania, Lipsia in
Tilia, 1767,
Schreber (M)” as the type.
That specimen is
19 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 19 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
10 | Typification |
the type of
P. pulverulacea Moberg (1979),
which name is now cited in the type entry in
App.
III.
Note 2.
If the element designated under Art. 10.4
is the type of a species name,
that
name may be cited
as the type of the generic name.
If the element is not the type of
a species name,
a parenthetical reference to the correct name
of the type element
may be added.
Ex. 5.
Pseudolarix Gordon (1858)
was conserved with a specimen from the Gordon
herbarium as its conserved type.
As this specimen is not the type of any species name,
its
accepted identity
“[= P. amabilis (J. Nelson) Rehder ... ]”
has been added to the correspon-
ding entry in
App.
III.
10.5.
The author who first designates a type
of a name of a genus or
subdivision of a genus
must be followed,
but the choice may be superseded
if
(a) it can be shown
that it is in serious conflict with the protologue
and
another element is available which is not
in conflict with the protologue, or
(b) that it was based
on a largely mechanical method of selection.
Ex. 6.
Fink (in Contr. U.S. Natl. Herb. 14(1): 2. 1910)
specified that he was “stating the
types of the genera according to the
‘first species’ rule”.
His type designations may therefore
be superseded
under
Art. 10.5(b).
For example, Fink had designated
Biatorina griffithii
(Ach.) A. Massal.
as the type of
Biatorina A. Massal.;
but his choice was superseded when
the next subsequent designation, by Santesson
(in Symb. Bot. Upsal. 12(1): 428. 1952),
stated a different type,
B. atropurpurea (Schaer.) A. Massal.
*Ex. 7.
Authors following the
American code of botanical nomenclature,
Canon 15 (in
Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 34: 172. 1907),
designated as the type
“the first binomial species in
order”
eligible under certain provisions.
This method of selection is to be considered as
largely mechanical. Thus the first type designation for
Delphinium L., by Britton
(in Britton
& Brown, Ill. Fl. N. U.S.,
ed. 2, 2: 93. 1913), who followed the
American code and chose
D.
consolida L.,
has been superseded under Art. 10.5(b)
by the designation of
D. peregrinum L.
by Green (in Anonymous,
Nomencl. Prop. Brit. Botanists: 162. 1929).
The unicarpellate
D.
consolida could not have been
superseded as type by the tricarpellate
D. peregrinum under
Art. 10.5(a),
however, because it is not in serious conflict
with the generic protologue, which
specifies “germina tria vel unum”,
the assignment of the genus to “Polyandria Trigynia”
by
Linnaeus notwithstanding.
10.6.
The type of a name of a family or of
any subdivision of a family is the
same as that of the generic name
on which it is based (see Art.
18.1).
For
purposes of designation or citation
of a type, the generic name alone suf-
fices.
The type of a name of a family or subfamily
not based on a generic
name is the same as that
of the corresponding alternative name (Art.
18.5
and
19.7).
10.7.
The principle of typification
does not apply to names of taxa
above
the rank of family,
except for names that are automatically typified by
being based on generic names (see Art.
16).
The type of such a name is the
same as that
of the generic name on which it is based.
20 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 20 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Typification – Priority | 10-11 |
Note 3.
For the typification
of some names of subdivisions of genera see Art.
22.6
and
22.7.
10A.1.
When a combination in a rank of subdivision
of a genus has been published
under a generic name
that has not yet been typified,
the type of the generic name
should be selected
from the subdivision of the genus that was designated
as nomen-
claturally typical,
if that is apparent.
11.1.
Each family or taxon of lower rank
with a particular circumscription,
position,
and rank can bear only one correct name,
special exceptions being
made for 9 families
and 1 subfamily for which alternative names
are per-
mitted (see Art.
18.5 and
19.7).
However, the use of separate names
for the
form-taxa of fungi and
for morphotaxa of fossil plants is allowed under Art.
1.3,
59.4
and
59.5.
11.2.
In no case does a name have priority
outside the rank in which it is
published
(but see Art.
53.4).
Ex. 1.
Campanula sect.
Campanopsis R. Br. (Prodr.: 561. 1810)
when treated as a genus is
called
Wahlenbergia Roth (1821),
a name conserved against the taxonomic
(heterotypic)
synonym
Cervicina Delile (1813), and not
Campanopsis (R. Br.) Kuntze (1891).
Ex. 2.
Magnolia virginiana var.
foetida L. (1753)
when raised to specific rank is called
M. grandiflora L. (1759), not
M. foetida (L.) Sarg. (1889).
Ex. 3.
Lythrum intermedium Ledeb. (1822)
when treated as a variety of
L. salicaria L.
(1753) is called
L. salicaria var.
glabrum Ledeb. (Fl. Ross. 2: 127. 1843), not
L. salicaria
var.
intermedium (Ledeb.) Koehne
(in Bot. Jahrb. Syst. 1: 327. 1881).
Ex. 4.
When the two varieties constituting
Hemerocallis lilioasphodelus L. (1753), var.
flava L. and var.
fulva L.,
are considered to be distinct species,
the one not including the
lectotype of the species name is called
H. fulva (L.) L. (1762),
but the other one bears the
name
H. lilioasphodelus L.,
which in the rank of species has priority over
H. flava (L.) L.
(1762).
11.3.
For any taxon from family to genus inclusive,
the correct name is the
earliest legitimate one
with the same rank, except in cases of limitation of
priority by conservation (see Art.
14) or where Art.
11.7,
15,
19.4,
56,
57, or
59 apply.
Ex. 5.
When
Aesculus L. (1753),
Pavia Mill. (1754),
Macrothyrsus Spach (1834) and
Calo-
thyrsus Spach (1834)
are referred to a single genus, its name is
Aesculus L.
21 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 21 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
11 | Priority |
11.4.
For any taxon below the rank of genus,
the correct name is the com-
bination of the final epithet¹ of the earliest
legitimate name of the taxon in
the same rank,
with the correct name of the genus or species
to which it is
assigned, except
(a) in cases of limitation of priority under Art.
14,
15,
56,
or
57, or
(b)
if the resulting combination
could not be validly published
under Art.
32.1(c)
or would be illegitimate under Art.
53, or
(c) if Art.
11.7,
22.1,
26.1, or
59
rules that a different combination is to be used.
Ex. 6.
Primula sect.
Dionysiopsis Pax
(in Jahresber. Schles. Ges. Vaterländ.
Kultur 87: 20.
1909)
when transferred to
Dionysia Fenzl becomes
D. sect.
Dionysiopsis (Pax) Melch. (in
Mitt. Thüring. Bot. Vereins 50: 164-168. 1943);
the substitute name
D. sect.
Ariadna Wen-
delbo
(in Bot. Not. 112: 496. 1959) is illegitimate
under Art.
52.1.
Ex. 7.
Antirrhinum spurium L. (1753)
when transferred to
Linaria Mill. is called
L. spuria
(L.) Mill. (1768).
Ex. 8.
When transferring
Serratula chamaepeuce L. (1753) to
Ptilostemon Cass.,
Cassini
illegitimately
(Art.
52.1) named the species
P. muticus Cass. (1826).
In that genus, the
correct name is
P. chamaepeuce (L.) Less. (1832).
Ex. 9.
The correct name for
Rubus aculeatiflorus var.
taitoensis (Hayata) T. S. Liu & T. Y.
Yang
(in Annual Taiwan Prov. Mus. 12: 12. 1969) is
R. taitoensis Hayata var.
taitoensis,
because
R. taitoensis Hayata (1911) has priority over
R. aculeatiflorus Hayata (1915).
Ex.
10.
When transferring
Spartium biflorum Desf. (1798) to
Cytisus Desf., Spach
correctly
proposed
the substitute name
C. fontanesii
Spach (1849)
because of the previously and
validly published
C. biflorus L’Hér. (1791); the combination
C. biflorus based on
S. biflor-
um would be
illegitimate
under Art.
53.1.
Ex.
11.
Spergula stricta Sw. (1799)
when transferred to
Arenaria L. is called
A. uliginosa
Schleich. ex Schltdl. (1808)
because of the existence of the name
A. stricta Michx. (1803),
based on a different type;
but on further transfer to the genus
Minuartia L. the epithet
stricta
is again available
and the species is called
M. stricta (Sw.) Hiern (1899).
Ex.
12.
Arum dracunculus L. (1753)
when transferred to
Dracunculus Mill. is named
D.
vulgaris Schott (1832),
as use of the Linnaean epithet
would result in a tautonym
(Art.
23.4).
Ex.
13.
Cucubalus behen L. (1753)
when transferred to
Behen Moench was legitimately
renamed
B. vulgaris Moench (1794) to avoid the tautonym
“B. behen”. In
Silene L., the
epithet
behen is unavailable because of the existence of
S. behen L. (1753).
Therefore, the
substitute name
S. cucubalus Wibel (1799) was proposed.
This, however, is illegitimate
(Art.
52.1)
since the specific epithet
vulgaris was available. In
Silene, the correct name of
the species is
S. vulgaris (Moench) Garcke (1869).
Ex.
14.
Helianthemum italicum var.
micranthum Gren. & Godr. (Fl. France 1: 171. 1847)
when transferred as a variety to
H. penicillatum Thibaud ex Dunal
retains its varietal epithet
and is named
H. penicillatum var.
micranthum (Gren. & Godr.) Grosser
(in Engler,
Pflanzenr. 14: 115. 1903).
———————————————————————
¹
Here and elsewhere in this
Code, the phrase “final epithet”
refers to the last epithet in
sequence in any particular combination,
whether in the rank of a subdivision of a genus, or
of a species, or of an infraspecific taxon.
22 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 22 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Priority | 11 |
Ex. 15.
The final epithet of the combination
Thymus praecox subsp.
arcticus (Durand) Jalas
(in Veröff. Geobot. Inst. ETH Stiftung Rübel Zürich
43: 190. 1970), based on
T. serpyllum
var.
arcticus Durand
(Pl. Kaneanae Groenl. 196. 1856),
was first used at the rank of
subspecies in the combination
T. serpyllum L. subsp.
arcticus (Durand) Hyl.
(in Uppsala
Univ. Arsskr. 1945(7): 276. 1945).
However, if
T. britannicus Ronniger (1924)
is included
in this taxon,
the correct name at subspecies rank is
T. praecox subsp.
britannicus (Ron-
niger) Holub
(in Preslia 45: 359. 1973),
for which the final epithet
was first used at this rank
in the combination
T. serpyllum subsp.
britannicus (Ronniger) P. Fourn.
(Quatre Fl. France:
841. 1938, “S.-E. [Sous-Espèce]
Th. Britannicus”).
Note 1.
The valid publication of a name at a rank
lower than genus precludes any
simultaneous homonymous combination (Art.
53),
irrespective of the priority of
other names
with the same final epithet that may require
transfer to the same genus
or species.
Ex.
16.
Tausch included two species in his new genus
Alkanna: A. tinctoria Tausch (1824),
a new species based on
“Anchusa tinctoria”
in the sense of Linnaeus (1762), and
A.
mathioli Tausch (1824),
a nomen novum based on
Lithospermum tinctorium L. (1753).
Both names are legitimate and take priority from
1824.
Ex.
17.
Raymond-Hamet transferred to the genus
Sedum both
Cotyledon sedoides DC.
(1808) and
Sempervivum sedoides Decne. (1844).
He combined the epithet of the later
name,
Sempervivum sedoides, under
Sedum as
S. sedoides (Decne.)
Raym.-Hamet (1929),
and published a new name,
S. candollei
Raym.-Hamet (1929),
for the earlier name. Both
names are legitimate.
11.5.
When, for any taxon of the rank of family or below,
a choice is pos-
sible between legitimate names
of equal priority in the corresponding rank,
or between available final epithets of names
of equal priority in the cor-
responding rank,
the first such choice to be effectively published (Art.
29-
31)
establishes the priority of the chosen name,
and of any legitimate com-
bination
with the same type and final epithet at that rank,
over the other
competing name(s)
(but see Art. 11.6).
Note 2.
A choice as provided for in Art. 11.5
is effected by adopting one of the
competing names,
or its final epithet in the required combination,
and simulta-
neously rejecting
or relegating to synonymy the other(s),
or nomenclatural (ho-
motypic) synonyms thereof.
Ex.
18.
When
Dentaria L. (1753) and
Cardamine L. (1753) are united,
the resulting genus
is called
Cardamine
because that name was chosen by Crantz
(Cl. Crucif. Emend.: 126.
1769),
who first united them.
Ex.
19.
When
Claudopus
Gillet (1876),
Eccilia (Fr. : Fr.) P. Kumm. (1871),
Entoloma (Fr.
ex Rabenh.) P. Kumm. (1871),
Leptonia (Fr. : Fr.) P. Kumm. (1871), and
Nolanea (Fr. : Fr.)
P. Kumm. (1871) are united,
one of the generic names simultaneously
published by Kum-
mer
must be used for the combined genus.
Donk, who did so (in Bull. Jard. Bot. Buitenzorg,
ser. 3, 18(1): 157. 1949), selected
Entoloma,
which is therefore treated as having priority
over the other names.
23 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 23 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Priority | 11 |
Ex.
20.
Brown
(in Tuckey, Narr. Exped. Zaire: 484. 1818)
was the first to unite
Waltheria
americana L. (1753) and
W. indica L. (1753).
He adopted the name
W. indica for the com-
bined species,
and this name is accordingly treated
as having priority over
W. americana.
Ex.
21.
Baillon (in Adansonia 3: 162. 1863),
when uniting for the first time
Sclerocroton
integerrimus Hochst. (1845) and
S. reticulatus Hochst. (1845), adopted the name
Stillingia
integerrima (Hochst.) Baill.
for the combined taxon. Consequently
Sclerocroton integer-
rimus
is treated as having priority over
S. reticulatus irrespective of the genus
(Sclerocroton,
Stillingia, Excoecaria or
Sapium)
to which the species is assigned.
Ex.
22.
Linnaeus (1753) simultaneously published the names
Verbesina alba and
V.
prostrata.
Later (1771), he published
Eclipta erecta, an illegitimate name because
V. alba
was cited in synonymy, and
E. prostrata, based on
V. prostrata.
The first author to unite
these taxa was
Roxburgh (Fl. Ind., ed. 1832, 3: 438. 1832),
who adopted the name
E. pros-
trata (L.) L.
Therefore
V. prostrata is treated as having priority over
V. alba.
Ex.
23.
Donia speciosa and
D. formosa,
which were simultaneously published by Don
1832),
were illegitimately renamed
Clianthus oxleyi and
C. dampieri, respectively,
by
Lindley (1835). Brown
(in Sturt, Narr.
Exped. C. Australia
2: 71. 1849)
united both in a
single species,
adopting the illegitimate name
C. dampieri and citing
D. speciosa and
C.
oxleyi as synonyms;
his choice is not of the kind
provided for by Art. 11.5.
Clianthus
speciosus (G. Don) Asch. & Graebn. (1909),
published with
D. speciosa and
C. dampieri
listed as synonyms,
is an illegitimate later homonym of
C. speciosus (Endl.) Steud. (1840);
again, conditions for a choice under Art. 11.5
were not satisfied.
Ford & Vickery (1950)
published the legitimate combination
C. formosus (G. Don) Ford & Vickery and cited
D.
formosa and
D. speciosa as synonyms,
but since the epithet of the latter was unavailable in
Clianthus a choice was not possible
and again Art. 11.5 does not apply.
Thompson (1990)
was the first to effect
an acceptable choice when publishing the combination
Swainsona
formosa (G. Don) Joy Thomps.
and indicating that
D. speciosa was a synonym of it.
11.6.
An autonym is treated as having priority
over the name or names of
the same date and rank that established it.
Note 3.
When the final epithet of an autonym
is used in a new combination under
the requirements of Art. 11.6,
the basionym of that combination is the name
from
which the autonym is derived,
or its basionym if it has one.
Ex. 24.
By describing
Synthyris subg.
Plagiocarpus, Pennell
(in Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci.
Philadelphia 85: 86. 1933)
established the name
Synthyris Benth. subg.
Synthyris
(although
using the designation
“Eusynthyris”),
and when this group is included in
Veronica,
V. subg.
Synthyris (Benth.) M. M. Mart. Ort. & al.
(in Taxon 53: 440. 2004)
has precedence over a
combination in
Veronica based on
S. subg.
Plagiocarpus Pennell.
Ex.
25.
Heracleum sibiricum L. (1753) includes
H. sibiricum subsp.
lecokii (Godr. &
Gren.) Nyman
(Consp. Fl. Eur.: 290. 1879) and
H. sibiricum subsp.
sibiricum automatically
established at the same time. When
H. sibiricum is included in
H. sphondylium L. (1753) as
a subspecies,
the correct name for the taxon is
H. sphondylium subsp.
sibiricum (L.) Simonk.
(Enum. Fl. Transsilv.: 266. 1887), not subsp.
lecokii, whether or not subsp.
lecokii is treated
as distinct.
Ex.
26.
The publication of
Salix tristis var.
microphylla Andersson (Salices Bor.-Amer.: 21.
1858) created the autonym
S. tristis Aiton (1789) var.
tristis, dating from 1858.
If
S. tristis,
including var.
microphylla, is recognized as a variety of
S. humilis Marshall (1785), the
24 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 24 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
11 | Priority |
correct name is
S. humilis var.
tristis (Aiton) Griggs
(in Proc. Ohio Acad. Sci. 4: 301. 1905).
However, if both varieties of
S. tristis are recognized as varieties of
S. humilis, then the
names
S. humilis var.
tristis and
S. humilis var.
microphylla (Andersson) Fernald
(in Rho-
dora 48: 46. 1946) are both used.
Ex.
27.
In the classification adopted by Rollins and Shaw,
Lesquerella lasiocarpa (Hook.
ex A. Gray) S. Watson (1888)
is composed of two subspecies, subsp.
lasiocarpa
(which
includes the type of the name
of the species and is cited without an author) and subsp.
berlandieri (A. Gray) Rollins & E. A. Shaw.
The latter subspecies is composed of two var-
ieties.
In that classification
the correct name of the variety
which includes the type of subsp.
berlandieri is
L. lasiocarpa var.
berlandieri (A. Gray) Payson (1922), not
L. lasiocarpa var.
berlandieri (cited without an author) or
L. lasiocarpa var.
hispida (S. Watson) Rollins & E.
A. Shaw (1972), based on
Synthlipsis berlandieri var.
hispida S. Watson (1882),
since
publication of the latter name
established the autonym
S. berlandieri A. Gray var.
berlan-
dieri
which, at varietal rank,
is treated as having priority over var.
hispida.
11.7.
For purposes of priority, names of fossil
morphotaxa
compete only
with names based on a fossil type
representing the same part,
life-history
stage,
or preservational state (see Art.
1.2).
Ex.
28.
The generic name
Sigillaria Brongn. (1822),
established for bark fragments,
may in
part represent the same biological taxon
as the “cone-genus”
Mazocarpon M. J. Benson
(1918),
which represents permineralizations, or
Sigillariostrobus (Schimp.) Geinitz (1873),
which represents compressions.
Certain species of all three genera,
Sigillaria, Mazocarpon,
and
Sigillariostrobus,
have been assigned to the family
Sigillariaceae.
All these generic
names can be used
concurrently in spite of the fact that they may,
at least in part, apply to the
same organism.
Ex.
29.
The morphogeneric name
Tuberculodinium D. Wall (1967)
may be retained for a
genus of fossil cysts
even though cysts of the same kind are known
to be part of the life cycle
of an extant genus
that bears an earlier name,
Pyrophacus F. Stein (1883).
Ex. 30.
A common Jurassic leaf-compression fossil
is referred to by different authors either
as
Ginkgo huttonii (Sternb.) Heer or
Ginkgoites huttonii (Sternb.) M. Black.
Both names are
in accordance with the
Code, and either name can correctly be used,
depending on whether
this Jurassic morphospecies
is regarded as rightly assigned
to the living (non-fossil) genus
Ginkgo L.
or whether it is more appropriate
to assign it to the morphogenus
Ginkgoites
Seward (type,
G. obovata (Nath.) Seward,
a Triassic leaf compression).
11.8.
Names of plants (diatoms excepted)
based on a non-fossil type are
treated
as having priority over names of the same rank
based on a fossil (or
subfossil) type.
Ex.
31.
If
Platycarya Siebold & Zucc. (1843),
a non-fossil genus, and
Petrophiloides
Bowerb. (1840),
a fossil genus, are united, the name
Platycarya is correct for the combined
genus,
although it is antedated by
Petrophiloides.
Ex.
32.
Boalch and Guy-Ohlson (in Taxon 41: 529-531. 1992)
united the two prasinophyte
genera
Pachysphaera Ostenf. (1899) and
Tasmanites E. J. Newton (1875).
Pachysphaera is
based on a non-fossil type and
Tasmanites on a fossil type.
Under the
Code in effect in 1992,
Tasmanites had priority and was therefore adopted.
Under the current
Code, in which the
25 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 25 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
11-12 | Priority |
exemption in Art. 11.8
applies only to diatoms
and not to algae in general,
Pachysphaera is
correct for the combined genus.
Ex.
33.
The generic name
Metasequoia Miki (1941)
was based on the fossil type of
M.
disticha (Heer) Miki.
After discovery of the non-fossil species
M. glyptostroboides Hu & W.
C. Cheng,
conservation of
Metasequoia Hu & W. C. Cheng (1948)
as based on the non-
fossil type was approved.
Otherwise, any new generic name based on
M. glyptostroboides
would have had to be treated as having priority over
Metasequoia Miki.
Note 4.
The provisions of Art. 11
determine priority between different names
applicable to the same taxon;
they do not concern homonymy.
In accordance
with
Art.
53,
later homonyms are illegitimate
whether the type is fossil or non-fossil.
Ex. 34.
Endolepis Torr. (1861),
based on a non-fossil type,
is an illegitimate later homonym
of,
and does not have priority over,
Endolepis Schleid. (1846),
based on a fossil type.
Ex. 35.
Cornus paucinervis Hance (1881),
based on a non-fossil type,
is an illegitimate later
homonym
and does not have priority over
C. paucinervis Heer (Fl. Tert. Helv. 3: 289. 1859),
based on a fossil type.
Ex. 36.
Ficus crassipes F. M. Bailey (1889),
F. tiliifolia Baker (1885), and
F. tremula Warb.
(1894),
each based on a non-fossil type,
were illegitimate later homonyms of, respectively,
F.
crassipes (Heer) Heer (1882),
F. tiliifolia (A. Braun) Heer (1856), and
F. tremula (Heer) Heer
(1874),
each based on a fossil type.
The three names with non-fossil types have been con-
served against their earlier homonyms
in order to maintain their use.
11.9.
For purposes of priority, names in Latin form
given to hybrids are
subject to the same rules
as are those of non-hybrid taxa of equivalent rank.
Ex.
37.
The name
×Solidaster H. R. Wehrh. (1932) antedates
×Asterago Everett (1937)
for
the hybrids between
Aster L. and
Solidago L.
Ex.
38.
Anemone
×hybrida Paxton (1848) antedates
A.
×elegans Decne. (1852), pro sp.,
as
the binomial for the hybrids derived from
A. hupehensis (Lemoine &
É. Lemoine) Lemoine
&
É. Lemoine ×
A. vitifolia Buch.-Ham. ex DC.
Ex.
39.
Camus (in Bull. Mus. Natl. Hist. Nat. 33: 538. 1927)
published the name
×Agro-
elymus A. Camus for a nothogenus,
without a Latin description or diagnosis,
mentioning
only the names
of the parents involved
(Agropyron Gaertn. and
Elymus L.).
Since this name
was not validly published under the
Code then in force, Rousseau
(in Mém. Jard. Bot.
Montréal 29: 10-11. 1952)
published a Latin diagnosis.
However, the date of valid pub-
lication of
×Agroelymus under this
Code (Art.
H.9)
is 1927, not 1952, so it antedates the
name
×Elymopyrum Cugnac
(in Bull. Soc. Hist. Nat. Ardennes 33: 14. 1938).
11.10.
The principle of priority
does not
apply
above the rank of family
(but see Rec.
16B).
12.1.
A name of a taxon has no status under this
Code unless it is validly
published (see Art.
32-45).
26 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 26 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Starting points | 13 |
SECTION 4. LIMITATION OF THE PRINCIPLE OF PRIORITY
13.1.
Valid publication of names for plants
of the different groups is
treated
as beginning at the following dates
(for each group a work is men-
tioned
which is treated as having been published
on the date given for that
group):
Non-fossil plants:
(a)
Spermatophyta and
Pteridophyta, 1 May 1753
(Linnaeus,
Species
plantarum, ed. 1), except
suprageneric names,
4 August 1789
(Jussieu,
Genera
plantarum).
(b)
Musci
(the
Sphagnaceae excepted), 1 January 1801
(Hedwig,
Species
muscorum).
(c)
Sphagnaceae and
Hepaticae, 1 May 1753
(Linnaeus,
Species plan-
tarum, ed. 1), except
suprageneric names,
4 August 1789
(Jussieu,
Gen-
era plantarum).
(d)
Fungi
(including slime moulds
and lichen-forming fungi), 1 May 1753
(Linnaeus,
Species plantarum, ed. 1).
Names in the
Uredinales, Ustil-
aginales, and
Gasteromycetes (s. l.) adopted by Persoon
(Synopsis
methodica fungorum, 31 December 1801)
and names of other fungi
(excluding slime moulds) adopted by Fries
(Systema mycologicum, vol.
1 (1 January 1821) to 3, with additional
Index (1832), and
Elenchus
fungorum, vol. 1-2),
are sanctioned (see Art.
15).
For nomenclatural
purposes names given to lichens apply
to their fungal component.
(e) Algae, 1 May 1753 (Linnaeus, Species plantarum, ed. 1). Exceptions:
Nostocaceae homocysteae,
1 January 1892 (Gomont, “Monogra-
phie des Oscillariées”,
in Ann. Sci. Nat., Bot., ser. 7, 15: 263-368; 16:
91-264).
The two parts of Gomont’s “Monographie”,
which appeared
in 1892 and 1893, respectively,
are treated as having been published
simultaneously on 1 January 1892.
Nostocaceae heterocysteae,
1 January 1886 (Bornet & Flahault,
“Révision des Nostocacées hétérocystées”,
in Ann. Sci. Nat., Bot., ser.
7, 3: 323-381; 4: 343-373; 5: 51-129; 7: 177-262).
The four parts of the
“Révision”,
which appeared in 1886, 1886, 1887, and 1888, respec-
tively, are treated as having been published
simultaneously on 1 Jan-
uary 1886.
27 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 27 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
13 | Starting points |
Desmidiaceae (s. l.), 1 January 1848 (Ralfs, British Desmidieae).
Oedogoniaceae,
1 January 1900
(Hirn, “Monographie und Icono-
graphie der Oedogoniaceen”,
in Acta Soc. Sci. Fenn. 27(1)).
Fossil plants:
(f)
All groups,
31 December 1820 (Sternberg,
Flora der Vorwelt, Ver-
such 1: 1-24, t. 1-13).
Schlotheim’s
Petrefactenkunde (1820) is regar-
ded as published before 31 December 1820.
13.2.
The group to which a name is assigned
for the purposes of this Arti-
cle is determined by the accepted taxonomic position
of the type of the
name.
Ex. 1.
The genus
Porella and its single species,
P. pinnata, were referred by Linnaeus
(1753) to the
Musci; since the type specimen of
P. pinnata is now accepted
as belonging to
the
Hepaticae,
the names were validly published in 1753.
Ex. 2.
The designated type of
Lycopodium L. (1753) is
L. clavatum L. (1753) and the type
specimen of this is currently accepted as a pteridophyte.
Accordingly,
although the genus is
listed by Linnaeus among the
Musci, the generic name and
the names of the pteridophyte
species included by Linnaeus
under it were validly published in 1753.
13.3.
For nomenclatural purposes,
a name is treated as pertaining to a
non-fossil taxon unless its type is fossil in origin.
Fossil material is distin-
guished
from non-fossil material by stratigraphic relations
at the site of
original occurrence.
In cases of doubtful stratigraphic relations,
provisions
for non-fossil taxa apply.
13.4.
Generic names which appear in Linnaeus’s
Species plantarum,
ed. 1
(1753) and
ed. 2 (1762-1763),
are associated with the first subsequent de-
scription given under those names in Linnaeus’s
Genera plantarum,
ed. 5
(1754) and
ed. 6 (1764).
The spelling of the generic names included in
Species plantarum, ed. 1,
is not to be altered because a different spelling
has been used in
Genera plantarum, ed. 5.
13.5.
The two volumes of Linnaeus’s
Species plantarum, ed. 1 (1753),
which appeared in May and August, 1753,
respectively, are treated as hav-
ing been published simultaneously on 1 May 1753.
Ex. 3.
The generic names
Thea L. (Sp. Pl.: 515. 24 Mai 1753), and
Camellia L.
(Sp. Pl.:
698. 16 Aug 1753;
Gen. Pl., ed. 5: 311. 1754),
are treated as having been published
simultaneously on 1 May 1753. Under Art.
11.5
the combined genus bears the name
Camel-
lia, since Sweet
(Hort. Suburb. Lond.: 157. 1818),
who was the first to unite the two genera,
chose that name, and cited
Thea as a synonym.
13.6.
Names of anamorphs of fungi
with a pleomorphic life cycle do not,
irrespective of priority,
affect the nomenclatural status of the names of the
correlated holomorphs (see Art.
59.4).
28 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 28 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Conservation | 14 |
14.1.
In order to avoid disadvantageous nomenclatural changes
entailed by
the strict application of the rules,
and especially of the principle of priority
in starting from the dates given in Art.
13, this
Code provides, in App.
II-IV,
lists of names of families, genera,
and species that are conserved
(nomina conservanda)
(see Rec.
50E).
Conserved names are legitimate
even though initially they may have been illegitimate.
14.2.
Conservation aims at retention of those names
which best serve
stability of nomenclature.
14.3.
The application of both conserved
and rejected names is determined
by nomenclatural types.
The type of the specific name cited as the type of a
conserved generic name may, if desirable,
be conserved and listed in App.
III.
14.4.
A conserved name of a family or genus
is conserved against all other
names in the same rank based on the same type
(nomenclatural, i.e. ho-
motypic, synonyms, which are to be rejected)
whether or not these are
cited in the corresponding list as rejected names,
and against those names
based on different types
(taxonomic, i.e. heterotypic, synonyms)
that are
listed as rejected¹.
A conserved name of a species is conserved
against all
names listed as rejected,
and against all combinations
based on the rejected
names.
Note 1.
The
Code does not provide
for conservation of a name against itself, i.e.
against
an “isonym” (Art. 6
Note 2),
the same name with the same type but with a
different place and date of valid publication
and perhaps
with a different
authorship
(but see Art.
14.9)
than is given in the relevant entry in
App. II,
III or
IV.
Note 2.
A species name listed as conserved or rejected in
App.
IV may have
been
published as the name of a new taxon,
or as a combination based on an earlier
name.
Rejection of a name based on an earlier name does not
in itself preclude the
use of the earlier name
since that name is not
“a combination based on a rejected
name”
(Art. 14.4).
Ex. 1.
Rejection of
Lycopersicon lycopersicum (L.) H. Karst.
in favour of
L. esculentum
Mill.
does not preclude the use of the homotypic
Solanum lycopersicum L.
14.5.
When a conserved name competes
with one or more names based on
different types and against which it is not
explicitly conserved, the earliest of
the competing names is adopted in accordance with Art.
11,
except for some
———————————————————————
¹
The
International code of zoological nomenclature and the
International code of nomen-
clature of bacteria use the terms
“objective synonym” and “subjective synonym” for
nomenclatural and taxonomic synonym, respectively.
29 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 29 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
14 | Conservation |
conserved family names
(App. IIB),
which are conserved against unlisted
names.
Ex. 2.
If
Weihea Spreng. (1825) is united with
Cassipourea Aubl. (1775),
the combined
genus will bear the prior name
Cassipourea, although
Weihea is conserved and
Cassipourea
is not.
Ex. 3.
If
Mahonia Nutt. (1818) is united with
Berberis L. (1753),
the combined genus will
bear the prior name
Berberis, although
Mahonia is conserved and
Berberis is not.
Ex. 4.
Nasturtium R. Br. (1812)
was conserved only against the homonym
Nasturtium Mill.
(1754)
and the nomenclatural (homotypic) synonym
Cardaminum Moench (1794);
conse-
quently if reunited with
Rorippa Scop. (1760) it must bear the name
Rorippa.
14.6.
When a name of a taxon has been conserved
against an earlier name
based on a different type,
the latter is to be restored, subject to Art.
11,
if it
is considered the name of a taxon
at the same rank distinct from that of the
nomen conservandum, except when the earlier
rejected name is a homonym
of the conserved name.
Ex. 5.
The generic name
Luzuriaga Ruiz & Pav. (1802)
is conserved against the earlier
names
Enargea Banks ex Gaertn. (1788) and
Callixene Comm. ex Juss. (1789).
If, however,
Enargea is considered to be a separate genus,
the name
Enargea is retained for it.
Ex. 6.
To preserve the name
Roystonea regia (Kunth) O. F. Cook (1900),
its basionym
Oreodoxa regia Kunth (1816) is conserved against
Palma elata W. Bartram (1791).
How-
ever,
the latter remains available as the basionym of
R. elata (W. Bartram) F. Harper (1946),
if this name is applied to a species distinct from
R. regia.
14.7.
A rejected name, or a combination based on a rejected name,
may not
be restored for a taxon
that includes the type
of the corresponding conserved
name.
Ex.
7.
Enallagma Baill. (1888) is conserved against
Dendrosicus Raf. (1838),
but not
against
Amphitecna Miers (1868); if
Enallagma and
Amphitecna are united,
the combined
genus must bear the name
Amphitecna,
although the latter is not explicitly conserved against
Dendrosicus.
14.8.
The listed type of a conserved name
may not be changed except by
the procedure outlined in Art. 14.12.
Ex.
8.
Bullock & Killick (in Taxon 6: 239. 1957)
published a proposal that the listed type of
Plectranthus L’Hér. be changed from
P. punctatus (L. f.) L’Hér. to
P. fruticosus L’Hér.
This
proposal was approved
by the appropriate Committees and
by an International Botanical
Congress.
14.9.
A name may be conserved with a different type
from that designated
by the author
or determined by application of the
Code (see also Art.
10.4).
Such a name may be conserved either from its place
of valid publication
(even though the type
may not then have been included in the named taxon)
or from a later publication by an author
who did include the type as con-
30 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 30 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Conservation | 14 |
served.
In the latter case the original name
and the name as conserved are
treated as if they were homonyms (Art.
53),
whether or not the name as con-
served was accompanied by a description or diagnosis
of the taxon named.
Ex.
9.
Bromus sterilis L. (1753) has been conserved
from its place of valid publication even
though its conserved type, a specimen
(Hubbard 9045, E)
collected in 1932, was not origi-
nally included
in Linnaeus’s species.
Ex.
10.
Protea L. (1753)
did not include the conserved type of the generic name,
P. cyna-
roides (L.) L. (1771),
which in 1753 was placed in the genus
Leucadendron.
Protea was
therefore conserved
from the 1771 publication, and
Protea L. (1771), although not designed
to be a new generic name and still including
the original type elements,
is treated as if it were
a validly published homonym of
Protea L. (1753).
14.10.
A conserved name, with any corresponding autonym,
is conserved
against all earlier homonyms.
An earlier homonym of a conserved name is
not made illegitimate by that conservation
but is unavailable for use;
if not
otherwise illegitimate,
it may serve as basionym of another name or com-
bination based on the same type (see also Art.
55.3).
Ex.
11.
The generic name
Smithia Aiton (1789), conserved against
Damapana Adans.
(1763),
is thereby conserved automatically against
the earlier homonym
Smithia Scop.
(1777).
14.11.
A name may be conserved in order to preserve
a particular spelling
or gender.
A name so conserved is to be attributed
without change of pri-
ority
to the author who validly published it,
not to an author who later intro-
duced the conserved spelling or gender.
Ex.
12.
The spelling
Rhodymenia, used by Montagne (1839),
has been conserved against
the original spelling
Rhodomenia, used by Greville (1830).
The name is to be cited as
Rho-
dymenia Grev. (1830).
Note 3.
The date of conservation
does not affect the priority (Art.
11)
of a con-
served name,
which is determined only on the basis
of the date of valid publication
(Art.
32-45; but see Art.
14.9).
14.12.
The lists of conserved names
will remain permanently open
for
additions and changes.
Any proposal of an additional name must be accom-
panied by a detailed statement of the cases
both for and against its conser-
vation.
Such proposals must be submitted
to the General Committee (see
Div. III),
which will refer them for examination to the committees
for the
various taxonomic groups.
14.13. Entries of conserved names may not be deleted.
14.14.
When a proposal for the conservation of a name,
or of its rejection
under Art.
56,
has been approved by the General Committee
after study by
the Committee
for the taxonomic group concerned,
retention (or rejection)
31 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 31 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
14-15 | Conservation – Sanctioning |
of that name is authorized subject to the decision
of a later International
Botanical Congress.
14A.1.
When a proposal for the conservation
of a name, or of its rejection under
Art.
56,
has been referred to
the appropriate Committee for study,
authors should
follow existing usage
of names as far
as possible pending the General Committee’s
recommendation on the proposal.
15.1.
Names sanctioned under Art.
13.1(d)
are treated as if conserved
against earlier homonyms and competing synonyms.
Such names, once
sanctioned, remain sanctioned
even if elsewhere in the sanctioning works
the sanctioning author does not recognize them.
Ex. 1.
Agaricus ericetorum Fr.
was accepted by Fries in
Systema mycologicum (1821), but
later (1828) regarded by him as a synonym of
A. umbelliferus L. and not included in his
Index (1832) as an accepted name.
Nevertheless
A. ericetorum is a sanctioned name.
15.2.
An earlier homonym of a sanctioned name
is not made illegitimate
by that sanctioning but is unavailable for use;
if not otherwise illegitimate,
it may serve as a basionym of another name
or combination based on the
same type
(see also Art.
55.3).
Ex. 2.
Patellaria Hoffm. (1789)
is an earlier homonym of the sanctioned generic name
Patellaria Fr. (1822) : Fr.
Hoffmann’s name is legitimate but unavailable for use.
Lecani-
dion Endl. (1830),
based on the same type as
Patellaria Fr. : Fr.,
is illegitimate under Art.
52.1.
Ex. 3.
Agaricus cervinus Schaeff. (1774)
is an earlier homonym of the sanctioned
A.
cervinus Hoffm. (1789) : Fr.;
Schaeffer’s name is unavailable for use,
but it is legitimate and
may serve
as basionym for combinations in other genera.
In
Pluteus Fr. the combination is
cited as
P. cervinus (Schaeff.) P. Kumm.
and has priority over the taxonomic (heterotypic)
synonym
P. atricapillus (Batsch) Fayod, based on
A. atricapillus Batsch (1786).
15.3.
When, for a taxon from family to
and including genus, two or more
sanctioned names compete, Art.
11.3
governs the choice of the correct name
(see also Art.
15.5).
15.4.
When, for a taxon below the rank of genus,
two or more sanctioned
names and/or two
or more names with the same final epithet
and type as a
sanctioned name compete, Art.
11.4
governs the choice of the correct name.
Note 1.
The date of sanctioning does not affect
the priority (Art.
11)
of a sanc-
tioned name,
which is determined only
on the basis of valid publication.
In partic-
ular,
when two or more homonyms are sanctioned
only the earliest of them may be
used, the later being illegitimate under Art.
53.2.
32 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 32 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Sanctioning | 15 |
Ex. 4.
Fries (Syst. Mycol. 1: 41. 1821) accepted
Agaricus flavovirens Pers. (1793), treating
A. equestris L. (1753) as a synonym.
Later (Elench. Fung. 1: 6. 1828) he stated
“Nomen
prius et aptius arte restituendum” and accepted
A. equestris. Both names are sanctioned,
but
when they are considered synonyms
A. equestris,
having priority, is to be used.
15.5.
A name which neither is sanctioned
nor has the same type and final
epithet
as a sanctioned name in the same rank
may not be applied to a taxon
which includes the type of
a sanctioned name in that rank the final epithet
of which is available for the required combination
(see Art.
11.4(b)).
15.6.
Conservation (Art.
14)
and explicit rejection (Art.
56.1)
override
sanctioning.
33 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 33 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
16 | Higher taxa |
CHAPTER III. NOMENCLATURE OF TAXA ACCORDING TO
THEIR RANK
SECTION 1. NAMES OF TAXA ABOVE THE RANK OF FAMILY
16.1.
The name of a taxon above the rank of family
is treated as a noun in
the plural
and is written with an initial capital letter.
Such names may be
either
(a) automatically typified names,
formed by replacing the termin-
ation
-aceae in a legitimate name
of an included family based on a generic
name by the termination denoting their rank
(preceded by the connecting
vowel
-o-
if the termination begins with a consonant),
as specified in Rec.
16A.1-3 and Art.
17.1; or
(b) descriptive names, not so formed, which may
be used unchanged at different ranks.
Ex. 1.
Automatically typified names above the rank of family:
Magnoliophyta, based on
Magnoliaceae; Gnetophytina, based on
Gnetaceae; Pinopsida, based on
Pinaceae; Marat-
tiidae, based on
Marattiaceae; Caryophyllidae and
Caryophyllales, based on
Caryophyl-
laceae; Fucales, based on
Fucaceae; Bromeliineae, based on
Bromeliaceae.
Ex. 2.
Descriptive names above the rank of family:
Anthophyta, Chlorophyta, Parietales;
Ascomycota, Ascomycotina, Ascomycetes;
Angiospermae, Centrospermae, Coniferae,
En-
antioblastae, Gymnospermae.
16.2.
For automatically typified names,
the name of the subdivision or
subphylum
that includes the type of the adopted name
of a division or
phylum,
the name of the subclass that includes
the type of the adopted name
of a class,
and the name of the suborder that includes
the type of the adopted
name of an order
are to be based on the same type as the corresponding
higher-ranked name.
Ex. 3.
Pteridophyta Bergen & B. M. Davis (1906) and
Pteridophytina B. Boivin (1956);
Gnetopsida Engl. (1898) and
Gnetidae Cronquist & al. (1966);
Liliales Perleb (1826) and
Liliineae Rchb. (1841).
16.3.
When an automatically typified name
above the rank of family has
been published
with an improper Latin termination,
not agreeing with those
provided for in Rec.
16A.1-3 and Art.
17.1,
the termination must be changed
34 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 34 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Higher taxa | 16-16A |
to conform with these standards,
without change of the author citation or
date of publication (see Art.
32.7).
However, if such names are published
with a non-Latin termination
they are not validly published.
Ex. 4.
“Cactarieae” (Dumortier, 1829, based on
Cactaceae) and
“Coriales” (Lindley,
1833, based on
Coriariaceae),
both published for taxa of the rank of order,
are to be
corrected to
Cactales Dumort. (1829) and
Coriariales Lindl. (1833), respectively.
Ex. 5.
However, Acoroidées
(Kirschleger, Fl. Alsace 2: 103. 1853 - Jul 1857),
published for
a taxon of the rank of order,
is not to be accepted as
“Acorales Kirschl.”,
as it has a French
rather than a Latin termination.
The name
Acorales was later validly published by Reveal
(in
Phytologia 79: 72. 1996).
Note 1.
The terms “divisio” and “phylum”,
and their equivalents in modern
languages,
are treated as referring to one and the same rank.
When “divisio” and
“phylum” are used
simultaneously to denote different ranks, this
is to be
treated as
informal
usage of
rank-denoting terms
(see Art.
33.11).
16.4.
Where one of the word elements
-clad-, -cocc-,
-cyst-,
-monad-,
-myces-,
-nemat-,
or
-phyton-,
being the genitive singular stem of the
second part of a name of an included genus,
has been omitted before the
termination
-phyceae,
-phycota (algae),
-mycetes,
-mycota (fungi),
-opsida,
or
-phyta
(other groups of plants),
the shortened class name
or division or
phylum name is regarded
as based on the generic name in question
if such
derivation is obvious or is indicated
at establishment of the group name.
These word elements
may also be omitted
before the termination
for sub-
division or subphylum
as appropriate
in each case.
Ex. 6.
The name
Raphidophyceae Chadef. ex P. C. Silva (1980)
was indicated by its author
to be based on
Raphidomonas F. Stein (1878).
The name
Saccharomycetes
G. Winter (1881)
is regarded as being
based on
Saccharomyces Meyen (1838).
The name
Trimerophytina H.
P. Banks (1975)
was indicated by its author
to be based on
Trimerophyton
Hopping (1956).
Note 2.
The principle of priority
does not
apply
above the rank of family (Art.
11.10; but see Rec.
16B).
16A.1.
A name of a division or phylum should end in
-phyta unless the taxon is a
division
or phylum of fungi, in which case its name should end in
-mycota.
16A.2.
A name of a subdivision or subphylum should end in
-phytina, unless it is a
subdivision or subphylum of fungi,
in which case it should end in
-mycotina.
16A.3. A name of a class or of a subclass should end as follows:
(a) In the algae: -phyceae (class) and -phycidae (subclass);
(b) In the fungi: -mycetes (class) and -mycetidae (subclass);
(c) In other groups of plants: -opsida (class) and -idae, but not -viridae (subclass).
35 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 35 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
16B-18 | Higher taxa – Families |
16B.1.
In choosing among typified names
for a taxon above the rank of family,
authors should generally follow
the principle of priority.
17.1.
Automatically typified names of orders
or suborders are to end
in
-ales (but not
-virales) and
-ineae, respectively.
17.2.
Names intended as names of orders,
but published with their rank
denoted by a term such as
“cohors”, “nixus”, “alliance”, or “Reihe”
instead
of “order”, are treated
as having been published as names of orders.
17A.1.
Authors should not publish new names for orders
that include a family
from the name of
which an existing ordinal name is derived.
SECTION 2. NAMES OF FAMILIES AND SUBFAMILIES, TRIBES AND
SUBTRIBES
18.1.
The name of a family
is a plural adjective used as a noun;
it is formed
from the genitive singular of
a name of an included genus
by replacing the
genitive singular inflection (Latin
-ae, -i, -us, -is; transliterated Greek
-ou,
-os, -es, -as, or
-ous,
and its
equivalent
-eos) with the termination
-aceae
(but see Art.
18.5).
For generic names of non-classical origin,
when ana-
logy with classical names
is insufficient to determine
the genitive sing-
ular,
-aceae is added to the full word.
Likewise,
when formation
from the
genitive singular
of a generic name
results in a homonym,
-aceae may be
added to the
nominative singular.
For generic names with alternative geni-
tives
the one implicitly used by the original author
must be maintained,
except that
the genitive of names
ending in
-opsis is,
in accordance
with
botanical tradition,
always
-opsidis.
Ex. 1.
Family names based on a generic name
of classical origin:
Rosaceae (from
Rosa,
Rosae),
Salicaceae (from
Salix, Salicis),
Plumbaginaceae (from
Plumbago, Plumbaginis),
Rhodophyllaceae (from
Rhodophyllus, Rhodophylli),
Rhodophyllidaceae (from
Rhodo-
phyllis, Rhodophyllidos),
Sclerodermataceae (from
Scleroderma, Sclerodermatos),
Aex-
toxicaceae (from
Aextoxicon, Aextoxicou),
Potamogetonaceae (from
Potamogeton, Potam-
ogetonos).
36 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 36 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Families | 18 |
Ex. 2.
Family names based on a generic name
of non-classical origin:
Nelumbonaceae
(from
Nelumbo, Nelumbonis, declined by analogy with
umbo, umbonis),
Ginkgoaceae (from
Ginkgo, indeclinable).
18.2.
Names intended as names of families,
but published with their rank
denoted
by one of the terms “order” (ordo)
or “natural order” (ordo natu-
ralis)
instead of “family”,
are treated as having been published
as names of
families (see also Art.
19.2), unless this treatment
would result
in a taxo-
nomic sequence
with a misplaced
rank-denoting term.
Ex. 3.
Cyperaceae Juss. (1789),
Lobeliaceae Juss. (1813), and
Xylomataceae Fr. (1820)
were published as “ordo
Cyperoideae”, “ordo naturalis
Lobeliaceae”, and “ordo
Xylo-
maceae”,
respectively.
Note 1.
If the term “family” is simultaneously used
to denote a rank different from
“order”
or “natural order”, a name published
for a taxon at the latter rank cannot be
considered to have been published
as the name of a family.
*Ex. 4.
Names published at the rank of order (“ŕad”)
by Berchtold & Presl
(O pŕirozenosti
rostlin .... 1820)
are not to be treated as having been published
at the rank of family, since the
term family
(“čeled”) was sometimes used to
denote a rank below the rank of order.
18.3.
A name of a family based
on an illegitimate generic name
is illegit-
imate unless conserved.
Ex.
5.
Caryophyllaceae Juss., nom. cons. (from
Caryophyllus Mill. non L.);
Winteraceae R.
Br. ex Lindl., nom. cons. (from
Wintera Murray,
an illegitimate synonym of
Drimys J. R.
Forst. & G. Forst.).
18.4.
When a name of a family has been published
with an improper Latin
termination,
the termination must be changed
to conform with the rule,
without change of the author citation
or date of publication (see Art.
32.7).
However, if such a name is published
with a non-Latin termination,
it is not
validly published.
Ex.
6.
“Coscinodisceae” (Kützing 1844),
published to designate a family,
is to be accepted
as
Coscinodiscaceae Kütz. 1844
and not attributed to De Toni,
who first used the correct
spelling
(in Notarisia 5: 915. 1890).
Ex.
7.
“Atherospermeae” (Brown 1814),
published to designate a family,
is to be accepted
as
Atherospermataceae R. Br.
and not attributed to Airy Shaw
(in Willis, Dict. Fl. Pl., ed. 7:
104. 1966),
who first used the correct spelling,
or to Lindley (Veg. Kingd.: 300. 1846),
who
used the spelling
“Atherospermaceae”.
Ex.
8.
However, Tricholomées
(Roze in Bull. Soc. Bot. France 23: 49. 1876),
published to
designate a family,
is not to be accepted as
“Tricholomataceae Roze”, as it has a French
rather than a Latin termination.
The name
Tricholomataceae was
finally validly published
by Pouzar (1983; see
App. IIA).
18.5.
The following names, of long usage,
are treated as validly published:
Compositae
(Asteraceae; type,
Aster L.);
Cruciferae
(Brassicaceae; type,
37 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 37 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
18-19 | Families – Subdivisions of families |
Brassica L.);
Gramineae
(Poaceae; type,
Poa L.);
Guttiferae
(Clusiaceae;
type,
Clusia L.);
Labiatae
(Lamiaceae; type,
Lamium L.);
Leguminosae
(Fabaceae; type,
Faba Mill.
[= Vicia L.]);
Palmae
(Arecaceae; type,
Areca
L.);
Papilionaceae
(Fabaceae; type,
Faba Mill.);
Umbelliferae
(Apiaceae;
type,
Apium L.). When the
Papilionaceae are regarded
as a family distinct
from the remainder of the
Leguminosae, the name
Papilionaceae is con-
served against
Leguminosae.
18.6.
The use, as alternatives, of the family names indicated
in parentheses
in Art. 18.5 is authorized.
19.1.
The name of a subfamily is a plural adjective
used as a noun; it is
formed in the same manner
as the name of a family (Art.
18.1)
but by using
the termination
-oideae instead of
-aceae.
19.2.
Names intended as names of subfamilies,
but published with their
rank denoted
by the term “suborder” (subordo) instead of subfamily,
are
treated as having been published
as names of subfamilies (see also Art.
18.2), unless this
would result
in a taxonomic
sequence with
a misplaced
rank-denoting term.
Ex. 1.
Cyrilloideae Torr. & A. Gray
(Fl. N. Amer. 1: 256. 1838) and
Sphenocleoideae
Lindl.
(Intr. Nat. Syst. Bot., ed. 2: 238. 1836)
were published as “suborder
Cyrilleae” and
“Sub-Order ?
Sphenocleaceae”, respectively.
Note 1.
If the term “subfamily” is simultaneously
used to denote a rank different
from “suborder”, a name published
for a taxon at the latter rank
cannot be con-
sidered
to have been published as the name of a subfamily.
19.3.
A tribe is designated in a similar manner,
with the termination
-eae,
and a subtribe similarly with the termination
-inae (but not
-virinae).
19.4.
The name of any subdivision of a family
that includes the type of the
adopted,
legitimate name of the family to which
it is assigned is to be based
on the generic name equivalent to that type
(Art.
10.6, but see Art.
19.7).
Ex.
2.
The type of the family name
Rosaceae
Juss. is
Rosa L. and hence the subfamily and
tribe which include
Rosa are to be called
Rosoideae Endl. and
Roseae DC.
Ex.
3.
The type of the family name
Gramineae
Juss.
(nom. alt.,
Poaceae Barnhart
– see Art.
18.5) is
Poa L. and hence the subfamily, tribe
and
subtribe which include
Poa are to be
called
Pooideae Asch.,
Poëae R. Br.
and
Poinae Dumort.
Note
2.
This provision applies only to the names
of those subordinate taxa that
include the type of the adopted name of the family
(but see Rec.19A.2).
38 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 38 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Subdivisions of families | 19-19A |
Ex.
4.
The subfamily including the type of the family name
Ericaceae Juss.
(Erica L.),
irrespective of priority, is to be called
Ericoideae Endl.,
and the tribe including this type is
called
Ericeae D. Don.
However,
the correct name of the tribe including both
Rhododendron
L.,
the type of the subfamily name
Rhododendroideae Endl., and
Rhodora L. is
Rhodoreae
D. Don (1834) not
Rhododendreae Brongn. (1843).
19.5.
A name of a subdivision of a family
based on an illegitimate generic
name
that is not the base of a conserved family name
is illegitimate.
Ex. 5.
The name
Caryophylloideae Arn. (1832), based on
Caryophyllaceae Juss., nom. cons.,
is legitimate although it is ultimately based
on the illegitimate
Caryophyllus Mill. non L.
19.6.
When a name of a taxon assigned to one
of the above categories has
been published
with an improper Latin termination, such as
-eae for a
subfamily or
-oideae for a tribe,
the termination must be changed to accord
with the rule, without change of the author citation
or date of publication
(see Art.
32.7).
However,
if such names are published with a non-Latin
termination they are not validly published.
Ex. 6.
“Climacieae”
(Grout, Moss Fl. N. Amer. 3: 4. 1928),
published to designate a
subfamily,
is to be changed to
Climacioideae Grout (1928).
Ex. 7.
However, Melantheen (Kittel
in Richard, Nouv. Elém. Bot., ed. 3,
Germ. Transl.:
727. 1840),
published to designate a tribe,
is not to be accepted as
“Melanthieae Kitt.”, as it
has a German
rather than a Latin termination. The name
Melanthieae was
later
validly
published
by Grisebach
(Spic. Fl. Rumel. 2: 377. 1846).
19.7.
When the
Papilionaceae are included in the family
Leguminosae
(nom. alt.,
Fabaceae; see Art.
18.5)
as a subfamily, the name
Papilionoid-
eae may be used as an alternative to
Faboideae.
19A.1.
When a family is changed to the rank of a
subdivision of a family, or the in-
verse change occurs, and no legitimate name
is available in the new rank,
the name
should be retained,
and only its termination
(-aceae, -oideae, -eae, -inae) altered.
Ex. 1.
The subtribe
Drypetinae Griseb. (1859)
when raised to the rank of tribe was named
Drypeteae Hurus. (1954); the subtribe
Antidesmatinae Müll. Arg. (1865)
when raised to the
rank of subfamily was named
Antidesmatoideae Hurus. (1954).
19A.2.
When a subdivision of a family
is changed to another such rank,
and no
legitimate name is available in the new rank,
its name should be based on the same
generic name
as the name in the former rank.
Ex. 2.
Among
the tribes of the family
Ericaceae
are
Pyroleae D. Don,
Monotropeae D.
Don, and
Vaccinieae D. Don,
none of which includes
the type of the family name
(Erica L.).
The later names
Pyroloideae A. Gray,
Monotropoideae A. Gray, and
Vaccinioideae Endl.
are based on the same generic names.
39 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 39 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
20 | Genera |
SECTION 3. NAMES OF GENERA AND SUBDIVISIONS OF GENERA
20.1.
The name of a genus is a noun in the nominative singular,
or a word
treated as such,
and is written with an initial capital letter (see Art.
60.2).
It
may be taken from any source whatever,
and may even be composed in an
absolutely arbitrary manner,
but it must not end in
-virus.
Ex. 1.
Rosa, Convolvulus, Hedysarum, Bartramia,
Liquidambar, Gloriosa, Impatiens, Rho-
dodendron, Manihot, Ifloga
(an anagram of
Filago).
20.2.
The name of a genus may not coincide with a
Latin technical term
in
use in morphology
at the time of publication
unless it was published before
1 January 1912
and accompanied by a specific name published
in accord-
ance with the binary system of Linnaeus.
Ex. 2.
“Radicula” (Hill, 1756) coincides with the
Latin technical term
“radicula” (radicle)
and was not accompanied
by a specific name in accordance
with the binary system of
Linnaeus. The name
Radicula is correctly attributed to Moench (1794),
who first combined
it with specific epithets.
Ex. 3.
Tuber F. H. Wigg. : Fr.,
when published in 1780,
was accompanied by a binary
specific name
(Tuber gulosorum F. H. Wigg.)
and is therefore validly published, even
though it coincides
with a Latin technical
term.
Ex. 4.
The intended generic names
“Lanceolatus” (Plumstead, 1952) and
“Lobata” (Chap-
man, 1952) coincide with
Latin technical terms
and are therefore not validly published.
Ex. 5.
Cleistogenes Keng (1934)
coincides with “cleistogenes”,
the English plural of a
technical term in use
at the time of publication.
Keng’s name is validly published, however,
because the technical term is not Latin.
Kengia Packer (1960),
published as a replacement
name for
Cleistogenes, is illegitimate under Art.
52.1.
Ex.
6.
Words such as
“radix”, “caulis”, “folium”, “spina”, etc.,
cannot now be validly
published as generic names.
20.3.
The name of a genus may not consist of two words,
unless these
words are joined by a hyphen.
Ex.
7.
“Uva ursi”,
as originally published by Miller (1754),
consisted of two separate
words unconnected by a hyphen,
and is therefore not validly published (Art.
32.1(c);
the
name is correctly attributed to Duhamel (1755) as
Uva-ursi (hyphenated when published).
Ex.
8.
However, names such as
Quisqualis L.
(formed by combining two words into one
when originally published),
Neves-armondia
K. Schum.,
Sebastiano-schaueria Nees, and
Solms-laubachia
Muschl. ex Diels
(all hyphenated
when originally published) are validly
published.
Note 1.
The names of intergeneric hybrids
are formed according to the provisions
of Art.
H.6.
40 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 40 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Genera | 20-20A |
20.4. The following are not to be regarded as generic names:
(a) Words not intended as names.
Ex.
9.
The designation
“Anonymos” was applied by Walter
(Fl. Carol.: 2, 4, 9, etc. 1788) to
28 different genera to indicate
that they were without names.
Ex.
10.
“Schaenoides” and
“Scirpoides”, as used by Rottbøll
(Descr. Pl. Rar.: 14, 27.
1772)
to indicate unnamed genera resembling
Schoenus and
Scirpus which he stated (on p.
7)
that he intended to name later,
are token words and not generic names.
These unnamed
genera were later legitimately named
Kyllinga Rottb. and
Fuirena Rottb.
(b) Unitary designations of species.
Note 2.
Examples such as
“Leptostachys” and
“Anthopogon”,
listed in pre-Tokyo
editions of the
Code,
were from publications now listed in
App.
VI.
20A.1. Authors forming generic names should comply with the following advice:
(a) To use Latin terminations insofar as possible.
(b) To avoid names not readily adaptable to the Latin language.
(c) Not to make names which are very long or difficult to pronounce in Latin.
(d) Not to make names by combining words from different languages.
(e)
To indicate, if possible,
by the formation or ending of the name
the affinities or
analogies of the genus.
(f) To avoid adjectives used as nouns.
(g)
Not to use a name similar to or derived
from the epithet in the name of one of
the species of the genus.
(h)
Not to dedicate genera to persons
quite unconnected with botany or at least
with natural science.
(i)
To give a feminine form
to all personal generic names,
whether they com-
memorate a man or a woman (see Rec.
60B).
(j)
Not to form generic names by combining parts of
two existing generic names,
because such names are likely to be confused
with nothogeneric names (see
Art.
H.6).
Ex. 1.
Hordelymus
(Jess.)
Harz is based on
Hordeum
[unranked]
Hordelymus
Jess.
The
epithet was formed
by combining parts of the generic names
Hordeum L. and
Elymus L. (see
also Art. H.3
Ex. 2).
41 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 41 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
21-21B | Subdivisions of genera |
21.1.
The name of a subdivision of a genus
is a combination of a generic
name and a subdivisional epithet.
A connecting term (subgenus, sectio, se-
ries, etc.) is used to denote the rank.
Note 1.
Names of
subdivisions
of the same genus,
even if they differ in rank, are
treated
as
homonyms
if they have the same epithet
but are based on different types
(Art.
53.4), the connecting term
not being part
of the name.
21.2.
The epithet is either of the same form
as a generic name, or a noun in
the genitive plural, or a plural adjective
agreeing in gender with the generic
name, but not a noun in the genitive singular.
It is written with an initial
capital letter (see Art.
32.7 and
60.2).
21.3.
The epithet in the name of a subdivision of a genus
is not to be
formed from the name of the genus
to which it belongs by adding the prefix
Eu-
(see also Art.
22.2).
Ex. 1.
Costus subg.
Metacostus; Ricinocarpos sect.
Anomodiscus; Valeriana sect.
Valerian-
opsis; Euphorbia sect.
Tithymalus; Pleione subg.
Scopulorum; Euphorbia subsect.
Tenellae;
Sapium subsect.
Patentinervia; Arenaria ser.
Anomalae; but not
Carex sect.
“Eucarex”.
21.4.
The use of a binary combination instead of
a subdivisional epithet is
not admissible.
Contrary to Art.
32.1(c),
names so constructed are validly
published
but are to be altered to the proper form without
change of author
citation or date of publication.
Ex. 2.
Sphagnum “b.
Sph. rigida”
(Lindberg in Öfvers. Förh. Kongl. Svenska
Vet-
ensk.-Akad. 19: 135. 1862) and
S. sect.
“Sphagna rigida”
(Limpricht, Laubm. Deutschl. 1:
116. 1885)
are to be cited as
Sphagnum [unranked]
Rigida Lindb. and
S. sect.
Rigida
(Lindb.) Limpr., respectively.
Note 2.
The names of hybrids
with the rank of a subdivision of a genus are formed
according to the provisions of Art.
H.7.
21A.1.
When it is desired to indicate the name
of a subdivision of the genus to
which a particular species belongs
in connection with the generic name
and spe-
cific epithet,
the subdivisional epithet should be placed
in parentheses between the
two; when desirable,
the subdivisional rank may also be indicated.
Ex. 1.
Astragalus (Cycloglottis) contortuplicatus;
A. (Phaca) umbellatus;
Loranthus (sect.
Ischnanthus)
gabonensis.
21B.1.
Recommendations made for forming
the name of a genus (Rec.
20A)
apply
equally to an epithet
of a subdivision of a genus,
unless Rec. 21B.2-4 recommend
otherwise.
42 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 42 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Subdivisions of genera | 21B-22 |
21B.2.
The epithet in the name of a subgenus
or section is preferably a noun, that
in the name of a subsection or lower subdivision
of a genus preferably a plural
adjective.
21B.3.
Authors, when proposing new epithets for names
of subdivisions of genera,
should avoid those in the form of a noun
when other co-ordinate subdivisions of the
same genus have them in the form of a plural adjective,
and vice-versa.
They
should also avoid, when proposing an epithet
for a name of a subdivision of a ge-
nus,
one already used for a subdivision
of a closely related genus, or one which is
identical with the name of such a genus.
21B.4.
When a section or a subgenus is raised
to the rank of genus, or the inverse
change occurs,
the original name or epithet should be retained
unless the resulting
name would be contrary to this
Code.
22.1.
The name of any subdivision of a genus
that includes the type of the
adopted, legitimate name of the genus
to which it is assigned is to repeat
that generic name unaltered as its epithet,
not followed by an author citation
(see Art.
46).
Such names are termed autonyms (Art.
6.8; see also Art.
7.6).
Ex. 1.
The subgenus which includes the type of the name
Rhododendron L. is to be named
Rhododendron L. subg.
Rhododendron.
Note 1.
This provision applies only to the names
of those subordinate taxa that
include the type of the adopted name of the genus
(but see Rec. 22A).
22.2.
A name of a subdivision of a genus
that includes the type (i.e. the
original type
or all elements eligible as type
or the previously designated
type)
of the adopted, legitimate name of the genus
is not validly published
unless its epithet repeats the generic name unaltered.
For the purposes of
this provision, explicit
indication that the nomenclaturally typical element
is included is considered as equivalent to
inclusion of the type, whether or
not it has been previously designated
(see also Art.
21.3).
Ex.
2.
“Dodecatheon sect.
Etubulosa”
(Knuth in Engler, Pflanzenr. 22: 234. 1905)
was not
validly published since
it was proposed for a section that included
D. meadia L.,
the original
type of the generic name
Dodecatheon L.
Ex.
3.
Cactus [unranked]
Melocactus L. (Gen. Pl., ed. 5: 210. 1754)
was proposed for one
of four unranked (Art.
35.3),
named subdivisions of the genus
Cactus, comprising
C. me-
locactus L.
(its type under Art. 22.6) and
C. mammillaris L.
It is validly published, even
though
C. mammillaris was subsequently designated
as the type of
Cactus L. (by
Coulter in
Contr. U. S. Natl. Herb.
3: 95. 1894).
22.3.
The first instance of valid publication
of a name of a subdivision of a
genus
under a legitimate generic name
automatically establishes the cor-
responding autonym (see also Art.
11.6 and
32.8).
43 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 43 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
22-22A | Subdivisions of genera |
Ex.
4.
The subgenus of
Malpighia L.
that includes the lectotype of the generic name
(M. glabra L.) is called
M. subg.
Malpighia, not
M. subg.
Homoiostylis Nied.; and the
section of
Malpighia that includes
the lectotype of the generic name is called
M. sect.
Malpighia, not
M. sect.
Apyrae DC.
Ex.
5.
However,
the correct name of the section of the genus
Rhododendron L. that includes
R. luteum Sweet, the type of
R. subg.
Anthodendron (Rchb.) Rehder, is
R. sect.
Pentanthera
G. Don,
the oldest legitimate name for the section,
and not
R. sect.
Anthodendron.
22.4.
The epithet in the name of a subdivision
of a genus may not repeat
unchanged the correct name of the genus,
unless the two names have the
same type.
22.5.
The epithet in the name of a subdivision of a genus
may not repeat
the generic name unaltered
if the latter is illegitimate.
22.6.
When the epithet
in the name of a subdivision of a genus
is identical
with or derived
from the epithet of one of its constituent species,
the type of
the name of the subdivision of the genus
is the same as that of the species
name,
unless the original author of the subdivisional name
designated an-
other type.
Ex.
6.
The type of
Euphorbia subg.
Esula Pers. is
E. esula L.; the designation of
E. peplus
L. as lectotype by Croizat
(in Revista Sudamer. Bot. 6: 13. 1939)
has no standing.
Ex. 7.
The type of
Plantago sect.
Oliganthos (Greek for few-flowered)
Barnéoud (Monogr.
Plantag.: 17. 1845)
is necessarily
P. pauciflora (Latin for few-flowered) Lam.;
the later
lectotype designation of
P. pauciflora by Rahn
(in Nordic J. Bot. 4: 609. 1984)
was
superfluous.
22.7.
When the epithet
in the name of a subdivision of a genus
is identical
with or derived from the epithet
in a specific name that is a later homonym,
its type is the type of that later homonym,
the correct name of which nec-
essarily has a different epithet.
22A.1.
A section including the type of the correct name
of a subgenus, but not
including
the type of the correct name of the genus, should,
where there is no
obstacle under the rules,
be given a name with the same epithet and type
as the
subgeneric name.
22A.2.
A subgenus not including the type
of the correct name of the genus should,
where there is no obstacle under the rules,
be given a name with the same epithet
and type as the correct name
of one of its subordinate sections.
Ex. 1.
Instead of using a new epithet
at the subgeneric level,
Brizicky raised
Rhamnus sect.
Pseudofrangula Grubov
to the rank of subgenus as
R. subg.
Pseudofrangula (Grubov)
Brizicky.
The type of both names is the same,
R. alnifolia L’Hér.
44 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 44 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Subdivisions of genera – Species | 22B-23 |
22B.1.
When publishing a name of a subdivision
of a genus that will also establish
an autonym, the author should mention
this autonym in the publication.
23.1.
The name of a species is a binary combination
consisting of the name
of the genus followed
by a single specific epithet in the form of an
adjective, a noun in the genitive,
or a word in apposition, or several words,
but not a phrase name of one or more
descriptive nouns and associated
adjectives in the ablative (see Art. 23.6(a)),
nor certain other irregularly
formed designations (see Art. 23.6(c)).
If an epithet consists of two or more
words,
these are to be united or hyphenated.
An epithet not so joined when
originally published is not to be rejected but,
when used, is to be united or
hyphenated, as specified in Art.
60.9.
23.2.
The epithet in the name of a species
may be taken from any source
whatever,
and may even be composed arbitrarily (but see Art.
60.1).
Ex. 1.
Cornus sanguinea, Dianthus monspessulanus,
Papaver rhoeas, Uromyces fabae,
Fumaria gussonei, Geranium robertianum,
Embelia sarasiniorum, Atropa bella-donna,
Impatiens noli-tangere, Adiantum capillus-veneris,
Spondias mombin
(an indeclinable epi-
thet).
23.3.
Symbols forming part of specific epithets
proposed by Linnaeus do
not
prevent valid
publication of
the relevant names but must be transcribed.
Ex. 2.
Scandix pecten ♀ L.
is to be transcribed as
Scandix pecten-veneris;
Veronica ana-
gallis ∇ L.
is to be transcribed as
Veronica anagallis-aquatica.
23.4.
The specific epithet,
with or without the addition of a transcribed
symbol, may not exactly repeat the generic name
(such repetition would re-
sult in a tautonym).
Ex. 3.
“Linaria linaria” and
“Nasturtium nasturtium-aquaticum”
are contrary to this rule
and cannot be validly published.
Ex. 4.
Linum radiola L. (1753)
when transferred to
Radiola Hill may not be named
“Ra-
diola radiola”,
as was done by Karsten (1882),
since that combination
cannot be validly
published (see Art.
32.1(c)).
The next oldest name,
L. multiflorum Lam. (1779),
is illegit-
imate,
being a superfluous name for
L. radiola. Under
Radiola,
the species has been given
the legitimate name
R. linoides Roth (1788).
45 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 45 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
23 | Species |
23.5.
The specific epithet,
when adjectival in form and not used as a noun,
agrees grammatically with the generic name;
when it is a noun in apposi-
tion or a genitive noun,
it retains its own gender and termination irres-
pective of the gender of the generic name.
Epithets not conforming to this
rule are to be corrected (see Art.
32.7).
In particular,
the usage of the word
element
-cola as an adjective is a correctable error.
Ex. 5.
Adjectival epithets:
Helleborus niger L.,
Brassica nigra (L.) W. D. J. Koch,
Ver-
bascum nigrum L.;
Rumex
cantabricus Rech. f.,
Daboecia
cantabrica (Huds.) K. Koch
(=
Vaccinium
cantabricum Huds.);
Vinca major L.,
Tropaeolum majus L.;
Bromus mollis L.,
Geranium molle L.;
Peridermium balsameum Peck,
derived from the epithet of
Abies bal-
samea (L.) Mill.,
treated as an adjective.
Ex. 6.
Names with a noun for an epithet:
Convolvulus cantabrica L.,
Gentiana pneumo-
nanthe L.,
Lythrum
salicaria L.,
Schinus
molle L.,
all with epithets featuring pre-Linnaean
generic names.
Gloeosporium balsameae Davis,
derived from the epithet of
Abies balsamea
(L.) Mill.,
treated as a noun.
Ex. 7.
Correctable errors:
The epithet of
Polygonum segetum Kunth (1817)
is a genitive
plural noun (of the corn fields);
the combination
Persicaria “segeta”,
proposed by Small,
is
a correctable error for
Persicaria segetum (Kunth) Small (1903).
—
In
Masdevallia echidna
Rchb. f. (1855),
the epithet corresponds to the generic name of an animal;
upon transfer to
Porroglossum Schltr., the combination
P. “echidnum” was proposed by Garay,
which is a
correctable error for
P. echidna (Rchb. f.) Garay (1953).
Ex. 8. Rubus “amnicolus” is a correctable error for R. amnicola Blanch. (1906).
23.6. The following designations are not to be regarded as specific names:
(a)
Descriptive designations consisting
of a generic name followed by a
phrase name
(Linnaean “nomen specificum legitimum”)
of one or more
descriptive nouns and associated adjectives
in the ablative.
Ex. 9.
Smilax “caule inermi”
(Aublet, Hist. Pl. Guiane 2, Tabl.: 27. 1775)
is an abbreviated
descriptive reference
to an imperfectly known species
which is not given a binomial in the
text
but referred to merely by a phrase name
cited from Burman.
(b)
Other designations of species consisting
of a generic name followed by
one or more words not intended
as a specific epithet.
Ex. 10.
Viola “qualis”
(Krocker, Fl. Siles. 2: 512, 517. 1790);
Urtica “dubia?” (Forsskål,
Fl. Aegypt.-Arab.: cxxi. 1775), the word “dubia?”
(doubtful)
being repeatedly used in
Forsskål’s work
for species which could not be reliably identified.
Ex. 11.
Atriplex “nova”
(Winterl, Index Hort. Bot. Univ. Hung.:
fol. A [8] recto et verso.
1788),
the word “nova” (new) being here used
in connection with four different species of
Atriplex. However, in
Artemisia nova A. Nelson
(in Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 27: 274. 1900),
nova was intended as a specific epithet,
the species having been newly distinguished from
others.
46 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 46 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Species | 23 |
Ex. 12.
Cornus “gharaf”
(Forsskål, Fl. Aegypt.-Arab.: xci, xcvi. 1775)
is an interim des-
ignation not intended as a species name.
An interim designation in Forsskål’s work is an
original designation (for an accepted taxon
and thus not a “provisional name” as defined in
Art.
34.1(b))
with an epithet-like vernacular
which is not used as an epithet in the “Cen-
turiae” part of the work.
Elcaja “roka”
(Forsskål, Fl. Aegypt.-Arab.: xcv. 1775)
is another
example of such an interim designation;
in other parts of the work (p. c, cxvi, 127)
this
species is not named.
Ex. 13.
In
Agaricus “octogesimus nonus” and
Boletus “vicesimus sextus”
(Schaeffer, Fung.
Bavar. Palat. Nasc.
1: t. 100. 1762; 2: t. 137. 1763),
the generic names are followed by or-
dinal adjectives used for enumeration.
The corresponding species were given validly pub-
lished names,
A. cinereus Schaeff. and
B. ungulatus Schaeff.,
in the final volume of the same
work (1774).
Ex. 14.
Honckeny (1782; see Art. 46
Ex.
38)
used species designations such as, in
Agrostis,
“A. Reygeri I.”,
“A. Reyg. II.”, “A. Reyg. III.”
(all referring to species described but not
named
in Reyger, Tent. Fl. Gedan.: 36-37. 1763), and also
“A. alpina. II” for a newly
described species following after
A. alpina Scop.
These are informal designations used for
enumeration, not validly published binomials;
they may not be expanded into, e.g.,
“Ag-
rostis reygeri-prima”.
(c)
Designations of species consisting
of a generic name followed by two
or more adjectival words in the nominative case.
Ex. 15.
Salvia “africana coerulea”
(Linnaeus, Sp. Pl.: 26. 1753) and
Gnaphalium “fruti-
cosum flavum”
(Forsskål, Fl. Aegypt.-Arab.: cxix. 1775)
are generic names followed by two
adjectival words in the nominative case.
They are not to be regarded as species names.
Ex. 16.
However,
Rhamnus “vitis idaea” Burm. f.
(Fl. Ind.: 61. 1768)
is to be regarded as a
species name,
since the generic name is followed by a noun
and an adjective, both in the
nominative case;
these words are to be hyphenated
(R. vitis-idaea) under the provisions of
Art. 23.1 and
60.9.
In
Anthyllis “Barba jovis” L. (Sp. Pl.: 720. 1753)
the generic name
is followed by nouns
in the nominative and in the genitive case,
respectively, and they are to be
hyphenated
(A. barba-jovis). Likewise,
Hyacinthus “non scriptus” L.
(Sp. Pl.: 316. 1753),
where the generic name is followed
by a negative particle and a past participle
used as an
adjective, is corrected to
H. non-scriptus, and
Impatiens “noli tangere” L. (Sp. Pl.: 938.
1753), where the generic name is followed by two verbs,
is corrected to
I. noli-tangere.
Ex. 17.
Similarly, in
Narcissus “Pseudo Narcissus” L.
(Sp. Pl.: 289. 1753)
the generic
name is followed
by an independent prefix
and a noun in the nominative case,
and the name
is to be corrected to
N. pseudonarcissus
under the provisions of Art. 23.1 and
60.9.
(d) Formulae designating hybrids (see Art. H.10.3).
23.7.
Phrase names used by Linnaeus as specific epithets
(“nomina trivia-
lia”) are to be corrected
in accordance with later usage by Linnaeus himself.
Ex. 18.
Apocynum “fol.
[foliis] androsaemi” L. is to be cited as
A. androsaemifolium L.
(Sp. Pl.: 213. 1753
[corr. L., Syst. Nat., ed. 10, 2: 946. 1759]); and
Mussaenda “fr.
[fructu]
frondoso” L., as
M. frondosa L. (Sp. Pl.: 177. 1753
[corr. L., Syst. Nat., ed. 10, 2: 931.
1759]).
47 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 47 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
23-23A | Species |
23.8.
Where the status of a designation of a species
is uncertain under Art.
23.6,
established custom is to be followed
(Pre. 10).
*Ex. 19.
Polypodium “F. mas”, P. “F. femina”, and
P. “F. fragile”
(Linnaeus, Sp. Pl.:
1090-1091. 1753)
are, in accordance with established custom,
to be treated as
P. filix-mas
L.,
P. filix-femina L., and
P. fragile L., respectively.
Likewise,
Cambogia “G. gutta” is to be
treated as
C. gummi-gutta L. (Gen. Pl.: [522]. 1754).
The intercalations
“Trich.”
[Tricho-
manes] and
“M.”
[Melilotus]
in the names of Linnaean species of
Asplenium and
Trifolium,
respectively, are to be deleted,
so that names in the form
Asplenium “Trich. dentatum” and
Trifolium “M. indica”,
for example, are treated as
A. dentatum L. and
T. indicum L.
(Sp. Pl.:
765, 1080. 1753).
23A.1.
Names of persons and also of countries
and localities used in specific
epithets
should take the form of nouns in the genitive
(clusii, porsildiorum,
saharae)
or of adjectives
(clusianus, dahuricus) (see also Art.
60, Rec.
60C and
60D).
23A.2.
The use of the genitive and the adjectival form
of the same word to
designate two different species
of the same genus should be avoided (e.g.
Lysi-
machia hemsleyana Oliv. and
L. hemsleyi Franch.).
23A.3.
In forming specific epithets, authors
should comply also with the following
suggestions:
(a) To use Latin terminations insofar as possible.
(b) To avoid epithets which are very long and difficult to pronounce in Latin.
(c) Not to make epithets by combining words from different languages.
(d) To avoid those formed of two or more hyphenated words.
(e) To avoid those which have the same meaning as the generic name (pleonasm).
(f)
To avoid those which express a character common
to all or nearly all the spec-
ies of a genus.
(g)
To avoid in the same genus those
which are very much alike,
especially those
which differ only in their last letters
or in the arrangement of two letters.
(h) To avoid those which have been used before in any closely allied genus.
(i)
Not to adopt epithets from unpublished names
found in correspondence,
travellers’ notes, herbarium labels,
or similar sources, attributing them to
their authors,
unless these authors have approved publication (see Rec.
34A).
(j)
To avoid using the names of little-known
or very restricted localities unless
the species is quite local.
48 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 48 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Infraspecific taxa | 24 |
SECTION 5. NAMES OF TAXA BELOW THE RANK OF SPECIES
(INFRASPECIFIC TAXA)
24.1.
The name of an infraspecific taxon
is a combination of the name of a
species and an infraspecific epithet.
A connecting term is used to denote the
rank.
Ex. 1.
Saxifraga aizoon subf.
surculosa Engl. & Irmsch.
This taxon may also be referred to
as
Saxifraga aizoon var.
aizoon subvar.
brevifolia f.
multicaulis subf.
surculosa Engl. &
Irmsch.;
in this way a full classification
of the subforma within the species
is given, not only
its name.
24.2.
Infraspecific epithets are formed
like specific epithets and, when ad-
jectival in form and not used as nouns,
they agree grammatically with the
generic name (see Art.
32.7).
Ex. 2. Solanum melongena var. insanum Prain (Bengal Pl.: 746. 1903, ‘insana’).
24.3.
Infraspecific names with final epithets such as
typicus, originalis,
originarius, genuinus, verus, and
veridicus, purporting to indicate the taxon
containing the type of the name
of the next higher taxon, are not validly
published unless they are autonyms (Art.
26).
Ex. 3.
Lobelia spicata “var.
originalis”
(McVaugh in Rhodora 38: 308. 1936)
was not
validly published (see Art. 26
Ex. 1),
whereas the autonyms
Galium verum L. subsp.
verum
and
G. verum var.
verum are
validly published.
Ex. 4.
Aloe perfoliata var.
vera L. (Sp. Pl.: 320. 1753)
is validly published because it does
not purport to contain the type of
A. perfoliata L. (1753).
24.4.
The use of a binary combination
instead of an infraspecific epithet is
not admissible. Contrary to Art.
32.1(c),
names so constructed are validly
published but are to be altered
to the proper form without change of the
author citation or date of publication.
Ex.
5.
Salvia grandiflora subsp.
“S. willeana”
(Holmboe in Bergens Mus. Skr., ser. 2, 1(2):
157. 1914) is to be cited as
S. grandiflora subsp.
willeana Holmboe.
Ex.
6.
Phyllerpa prolifera var.
“Ph. firma” (Kützing, Sp. Alg.: 495. 1849)
is to be altered to
P. prolifera var.
firma Kütz.
Note 1.
Infraspecific taxa within different species
may bear names with the same
final epithet;
those within one species may bear names
with the same final epithet
as the names
of other species (but see Rec. 24B.1).
Ex.
7.
Rosa glutinosa var.
leioclada H. Christ
(in Boissier, Fl. Orient. Suppl.: 222. 1888)
and
Rosa jundzillii f.
leioclada Borbás
(in Math. Term. Közlem. 16: 376, 383. 1880)
are
both permissible, as is
Viola tricolor var.
hirta Ging.
(in Candolle, Prodr. 1: 304. 1824),
in
spite of the previous existence
of a species named
Viola hirta L.
49 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 49 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
24-26 | Infraspecific taxa |
Note 2.
Names of infraspecific taxa
within the same species,
even if they differ in
rank, are
treated
as
homonyms if they have the same
final epithet
but are based on
different types (Art.
53.4), the connecting term
not being part
of the name.
24A.1.
Recommendations made for forming specific epithets (Rec.
23A)
apply
equally for infraspecific epithets.
24B.1.
Authors proposing new infraspecific names
should avoid
final epithets pre-
viously used as specific epithets in the same genus.
24B.2.
When an infraspecific taxon is raised
to the rank of species, or the inverse
change occurs, the final epithet of its name
should be retained unless the resulting
combination would be contrary to this
Code.
25.1.
For nomenclatural purposes,
a species or any taxon below the rank of
species is regarded as the sum
of its subordinate taxa, if any.
In fungi, a
holomorph also includes
its correlated form-taxa (see Art.
59).
Ex. 1.
When
Montia parvifolia (DC.) Greene
is treated as comprising two subspecies, one
must write
M. parvifolia subsp.
parvifolia
for that part of the species
that includes the
nomenclatural type
and excludes the type of the name
of the other subspecies,
M. parvifolia
subsp.
flagellaris (Bong.) Ferris.
The name
M. parvifolia applies to the species
in its entirety.
26.1.
The name of any infraspecific taxon
that includes the type of the
adopted, legitimate name of the species
to which it is assigned is to repeat
the specific epithet unaltered
as its final epithet,
not followed by an author
citation (see Art.
46).
Such names are termed autonyms (Art.
6.8; see also
Art.
7.6).
Ex. 1.
The variety which includes the type of the name
Lobelia spicata Lam. is to be named
Lobelia spicata Lam. var.
spicata (see also Art. 24
Ex. 3).
Note 1.
This provision applies only to the names
of those subordinate taxa that
include
the type of the adopted name of the species
(but see Rec. 26A).
26.2.
A name of an infraspecific taxon
that includes the type (i.e. the ho-
lotype or all syntypes or the previously
designated type) of the adopted,
50 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 50 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Infraspecific taxa | 26 |
legitimate name of the species to which
it is assigned is not validly pub-
lished unless its final epithet
repeats the specific epithet unaltered.
For the
purpose of this provision,
explicit indication that the nomenclaturally
typ-
ical element of the species is included
is considered as equivalent to inclu-
sion of the type, whether or not
it has been previously designated (see also
Art.
24.3).
Ex. 2.
The intended combination
“Vulpia myuros subsp.
pseudomyuros (Soy.-Will.) Maire
& Weiller” was not validly published in Maire
(Fl. Afrique N. 3: 177. 1955)
because it in-
cluded
“F. myuros L., Sp. 1, p. 74 (1753)
sensu stricto” in synonymy,
Festuca myuros L.
being the basionym of
Vulpia myuros (L.) C. C. Gmel.
Ex. 3.
Linnaeus (Sp. Pl.: 3. 1753)
recognized two named varieties under
Salicornia euro-
paea.
Since
S. europaea has no holotype
and no syntypes are cited,
both varietal names are
validly published irrespective
of the facts that the lectotype of
S. europaea, designated by
Jafri and Rateeb
(in Jafri & El-Gadi, Fl. Libya 58: 57. 1979),
can be attributed to
S. europaea
var.
herbacea L. (1753)
and that the latter name
was subsequently lectotypified by Piirainen
(in Ann. Bot. Fenn. 28: 82. 1991)
by the same specimen as the species name.
Ex. 4.
Linnaeus (Sp. Pl.: 779-781. 1753)
recognized 13 named varieties under
Medicago
polymorpha.
Since
M. polymorpha L. has neither a holotype
nor syntypes, all varietal names
are validly published, and indeed the lectotype
subsequently designated (by Heyn in Bull.
Res. Council Israel, Sect. D, Bot., 7: 163. 1959)
is not part of the original material
for any of
the varietal names of 1753.
26.3.
The first instance of valid publication
of a name of an infraspecific
taxon under a legitimate species name
automatically establishes the cor-
responding autonym (see also Art.
32.8 and
11.6).
Ex. 5.
The publication of the name
Lycopodium inundatum var.
bigelovii Tuck.
(in Amer. J.
Sci. Arts 45: 47. 1843)
automatically established the name of another variety,
L. inundatum
L. var.
inundatum, the type of which is that of the name
L. inundatum L.
Ex. 6.
Utricularia stellaris L. f. (1782) includes
U. stellaris var.
coromandeliana A. DC.
(Prodr. 8: 3. 1844) and
U. stellaris L. f. var.
stellaris (1844)
automatically established at the
same time.
When
U. stellaris is included in
U. inflexa Forssk. (1775) as a variety,
the correct
name of that variety, under Art.
11.6, is
U. inflexa var.
stellaris (L. f.) P. Taylor (1961).
Ex. 7.
Pangalo
(in Trudy Prikl. Bot. 23: 258. 1930) when describing
Cucurbita mixta
Pangalo distinguished two varieties,
C. mixta var.
cyanoperizona Pangalo and var.
steno-
sperma Pangalo,
together encompassing the entire circumscription
of the species.
Since
neither a holotype nor any syntypes
were indicated for
C. mixta, both varietal names were
validly published (see Art.
26.2).
Merrick & Bates (in Baileya 23: 96, 101. 1989),
in the
absence of known type material,
neotypified
C. mixta by an element
that can be attributed to
C. mixta var.
stenosperma.
As long as their choice of neotype is followed,
the correct name
for that variety is
C. mixta var.
mixta, not
C. mixta var.
stenosperma.
When it is treated as a
variety of
C. argyrosperma Huber (1867),
as was done by Merrick & Bates,
its correct name
under Art.
11.6 is not
C. argyrosperma var.
stenosperma (Pangalo) Merrick & D. M. Bates;
a combination based on
C. mixta is required.
51 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 51 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
26A-27 | Infraspecific taxa |
26A.1.
A variety including
the type of the correct name of a subspecies,
but not
including
the type of the correct name of the species,
should, where there is no
obstacle under the rules,
be given a name with the same final epithet
and type as the
subspecies name.
26A.2.
A subspecies not including
the type of the correct name of the species
should, where there is no obstacle under the rules,
be given a name with the same
final epithet
and type as a name of one of its subordinate varieties.
26A.3.
A taxon of rank lower than variety
which includes the type of the correct
name
of a subspecies or variety,
but not the type of the correct name of the species,
should, where there is no obstacle under the rules,
be given a name with the same
final epithet
and type as the name of the subspecies or variety.
On the other hand,
a
subspecies or variety which does not include
the type of the correct name of the
species
should not be given a name with the same final epithet
as a name of one of
its subordinate taxa
below the rank of variety.
Ex. 1.
Fernald treated
Stachys palustris subsp.
pilosa (Nutt.) Epling
(in Repert. Spec. Nov.
Regni Veg. Beih. 8: 63. 1934)
as composed of five varieties,
for one of which
(that including
the type of
S. palustris subsp.
pilosa) he made the combination
S. palustris var.
pilosa
(Nutt.) Fernald
(in Rhodora 45: 474. 1943),
there being no legitimate varietal name avail-
able.
Ex. 2.
There being no legitimate name available
at the rank of subspecies,
Bonaparte made
the combination
Pteridium aquilinum subsp.
caudatum (L.) Bonap.
(Notes Ptérid. 1: 62.
1915),
using the same final epithet
that Sadebeck had used earlier in the combination
P.
aquilinum var.
caudatum (L.) Sadeb.
(in Jahrb. Hamburg. Wiss. Anst. Beih. 14(3): 5. 1897),
both combinations being based on
Pteris caudata L.
Each name is legitimate, and both can
be used,
as by Tryon (in Rhodora 43: 52-54. 1941), who treated
P. aquilinum var.
caudatum
as one of four varieties under subsp.
caudatum (see Art.
34.2).
26B.1.
When publishing a name of an infraspecific taxon
that will also establish an
autonym,
the author should mention this autonym in the publication.
27.1.
The final epithet in the name
of an infraspecific taxon may not repeat
unchanged the epithet of the correct name
of the species to which the taxon
is assigned unless the two names have the same type.
27.2.
The final epithet in the name
of an infraspecific taxon may not repeat
unchanged the epithet of the species name
if that species name is illegit-
imate.
Ex. 1.
When Honda (in Bot. Mag. (Tokyo) 41: 385. 1927) published
Agropyron japonicum
var.
hackelianum Honda under the illegitimate
A. japonicum Honda (1927), which is a later
52 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 52 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Infraspecific taxa – Cultivated plants | 27-28 |
homonym of
A. japonicum (Miq.) P. Candargy (1901),
he did not validly publish an auto-
nym
“A. japonicum var.
japonicum” (see also Art. 55
Ex. 2).
SECTION 6. NAMES OF PLANTS IN CULTIVATION
28.1.
Plants brought from the wild into cultivation
retain the names that are
applied to the same taxa growing in nature.
Note 1.
Hybrids, including those arising in cultivation,
may receive names as pro-
vided in
App. I
(see also Art.
11.9,
40, and
50).
Note 2.
Additional, independent designations
for special categories of plants used
in agriculture, forestry, and horticulture
(and arising either in nature or cultivation)
are dealt with in the
International code of nomenclature
for cultivated plants,
where the term “cultivar” is defined
and regulations are provided for the formation
and use of cultivar epithets.
Note 3.
Nothing precludes the use, for cultivated plants,
of names published in
accordance
with the requirements of the botanical
Code.
Note 4.
Epithets in names published in conformity
with the botanical
Code may be
used as cultivar epithets
under the rules of the
International code of nomenclature
for cultivated plants,
when cultivar is considered
to be the appropriate status
for the
groups concerned.
Ex. 1.
Mahonia japonica DC. (1821)
may be treated as a cultivar,
which is then designated
as
Mahonia ‘Japonica’;
Taxus baccata var.
variegata Weston (1770),
when treated as a
cultivar, is designated as
Taxus baccata ‘Variegata’.
Note 5.
The
International code of nomenclature
for cultivated plants provides for
the establishment of cultivar epithets
differing markedly from epithets in Latin
form.
Ex. 2.
×Disophyllum ‘Frühlingsreigen’;
Eriobotrya japonica ‘Golden Ziad’ and
E. japonica
‘Maamora Golden Yellow’;
Phlox drummondii ‘Sternenzauber’;
Quercus frainetto ‘Hun-
garian Crown’.
Ex. 3.
Juniperus
×pfitzeriana ‘Wilhelm Pfitzer’ (P. A. Schmidt 1998)
was established for a
tetraploid cultivar
presumed to result from the original cross between
J. chinensis L. and
J. sabina L.
53 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 53 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
29-30 | Effective publication |
CHAPTER IV. EFFECTIVE AND VALID PUBLICATION
SECTION 1. CONDITIONS AND DATES OF EFFECTIVE PUBLICATION
29.1.
Publication is effected, under this
Code,
only by distribution of
printed matter
(through sale, exchange, or gift)
to the general public or at
least
to botanical institutions with libraries accessible
to botanists general-
ly.
It is not effected by communication of new names
at a public meeting,
by the placing of names in collections
or gardens open to the public, by the
issue of microfilm made from manuscripts,
typescripts or other unpub-
lished material,
or solely
by distribution
electronically or through
any
electronic medium.
Ex. 1.
Cusson announced his establishment of the genus
Physospermum in a memoir read at
the Société des Sciences de Montpellier in 1770,
and later in 1782 or 1783 at
the Société de
Médecine de Paris,
but its effective publication dates from 1787
(in Hist. Soc. Roy. Méd.
5(1): 279).
29A.1.
Publication of nomenclatural novelties
in periodicals (see Rec.
30A.2)
that
distribute an electronic version
as well as a printed version,
should only be in those
with the following features:
(a) The printed and electronic versions are identical in content and pagination;
(b) The electronic version is in a platform-independent and printable format;
(c)
The electronic version is publicly available
via the World Wide Web or its
successors;
(d)
The presence of nomenclatural novelties
is prominently indicated in the work
(see Rec.
30A.2).
30.1.
Publication by indelible autograph
before 1 January 1953 is ef-
fective.
Indelible autograph produced at a later date
is not effectively pub-
lished.
54 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 54 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Effective publication | 30 |
Ex. 1.
Salvia oxyodon Webb & Heldr.
was effectively published in an indelible autograph
catalogue placed on sale (Webb & Heldreich,
Catalogus plantarum hispanicarum ... ab A.
Blanco lectarum, Paris, Jul 1850, folio).
Ex. 2.
The
Journal of the International Conifer
Preservation Society, vol. 5[1]. 1997
(“1998”), consists of duplicated sheets
of typewritten text with handwritten additions and
corrections in several places.
The handwritten portions,
being indelible autograph published
after 1 January 1953,
are not effectively published.
Intended new combinations
(“Abies
koreana var.
yuanbaoshanensis”, p. 53)
for which the basionym reference is handwritten
are not validly published.
The entirely handwritten account
of a new taxon (p. 61: name,
Latin description, statement of type)
is treated as unpublished (see also Rec.
34A.1).
30.2.
For the purpose of this Article,
indelible autograph is handwritten
material reproduced by some mechanical
or graphic process (such as li-
thography, offset, or metallic etching).
Ex. 3.
Léveillé,
Flore du Kouy Tchéou (1914-1915),
is a work lithographed from a hand-
written text.
30.3.
Publication on or after 1 January 1953
in trade catalogues or non-
scientific newspapers,
and on or after 1 January 1973 in seed-exchange lists,
does not constitute effective publication.
30.4.
The distribution on or after 1 January 1953
of printed matter accom-
panying exsiccata
does not constitute effective publication.
Note 1.
If the printed matter is also distributed
independently of the exsiccata, it is
effectively published.
Ex. 4.
The printed labels of Fuckel’s
Fungi rhenani exsiccatae (1863-1874)
are effectively
published
even though not independently issued.
The labels antedate Fuckel’s subsequent
accounts (e.g., in Jahrb. Nassauischen Vereins
Naturk. 23-24. 1870).
Ex. 5.
Vězda’s
Lichenes selecti exsiccati (1967-)
were issued with printed labels that were
also distributed independently as printed fascicles;
the latter are effectively published and
new names appearing in Vězda’s exsiccata
are to be cited from the fascicles.
30.5.
Publication on or after 1 January 1953
of an independent non-serial
work stated to be a thesis submitted to
a university or other institute of
education for the purpose of obtaining
a degree is not effectively published
unless it includes an explicit statement
(referring to the requirements of the
Code for effective publication)
or other internal evidence that it is regarded
as an effective publication by its author or publisher.
Note 2.
The presence of
an International Standard Book Number (ISBN)
or a
statement of the name of the printer,
publisher, or distributor in the original printed
version is regarded as internal evidence
that the work was intended to be effec-
tively published.
Ex. 6.
“Meclatis in
Clematis; yellow flowering
Clematis species –
Systematic studies in
Clematis L.
(Ranunculaceae),
inclusive of cultonomic aspects” a “Proefschrift ter verkrijg-
55 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 55 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
30-30A | Effective publication |
ing van de graad van doctor ...
van Wageningen Universiteit” by Brandenburg,
was effec-
tively published on 8 June 2000,
because it bore the ISBN 90-5808-237-7.
Ex. 7.
The thesis “Comparative investigations
on the life-histories and reproduction of
some species in the siphoneous green algal genera
Bryopsis and
Derbesia” by Rietema,
submitted to Rijksuniversiteit te Groningen in 1975,
is stated to have been printed (“Druk”)
by Verenigde Reproduktie Bedrijven,
Groningen and is therefore effectively published.
Ex. 8.
The dissertation “Die Gattung
Mycena s.l.” by Rexer, submitted to
the Eberhard-
Karls-Universität Tübingen,
was effectively published in 1994
because it bore the statement
“Druck: Zeeb-Druck, Tübingen 7 (Hagelloch)”,
referring to a commercial printer.
The gene-
ric name
Roridomyces Rexer, typified by
Agaricus roridus Scop.,
and combinations in
Mycena are therefore validly published.
The generic name
Roridella E. Horak
(Röhrlinge
und Blätterpilze
in Europa: 509. 2005), also published with
A. roridus Scop. as type, is
illegitimate (Art.
52.1).
Ex. 9.
The thesis by Demoulin,
“Le genre
Lycoperdon en Europe et en Amérique du Nord”,
defended in 1971, does not contain internal evidence
that it is regarded as effectively pub-
lished.
Even if photocopies of it can be found in some libraries,
new species of
Lycoperdon,
e.g.
“L. americanum”, “L. cokeri”, and
”L. estonicum“, introduced there,
were validly pub-
lished
in the effectively published
“Espèces nouvelles ou méconnues du genre
Lycoperdon
(Gastéromycètes)”
(Demoulin in Lejeunia, n.s., 62: 1-28. 1972).
Ex. 10.
The dissertation
“Nasa and the conquest of South America –
Systematic Rearrange-
ments in
Loasaceae Juss.” submitted in June 1997 to
the Ludwig-Maximilians-Universität
München
by Weigend is not effectively published
as it does not include an ISBN,
the name
of any printer or publisher
or distributor, or any statement
that it was intended to be effec-
tively published under the
Code,
even though 40 copies were distributed,
all the other for-
malities
for the publication of new taxa were met,
and statements were made implying
effective publication but not mentioning the
Code, such as that although
“the majority of
names will be published
elsewhere ... for some ...
groups new names are here provided”. The
names intended to be published in the thesis
were validly published
in Taxon 55: 463-468.
2006.
Ex. 11.
Montanoa imbricata V. A. Funk
was validly published in “The systematics of
Mon-
tanoa
(Asteraceae, Heliantheae)”
(Funk in Mem. New York Bot. Gard. 36: 116. 1982),
not
in Funk’s dissertation “The Systematics of
Montanoa Cerv.
(Asteraceae)” submitted to the
Ohio State University in 1980,
nor in facsimile copies of the dissertation
printed from
microfiche and distributed,
on demand, by University Microfilms, Ann Arbor,
beginning in
1980.
30A.1.
It is strongly recommended that authors
avoid publishing new names and
descriptions or diagnoses of new taxa
(nomenclatural
novelties)
in ephemeral prin-
ted matter of any kind,
in particular printed matter that is multiplied
in restricted and
uncertain numbers,
in which the permanence of the text may be limited,
for which
effective publication
in terms of number of copies is not obvious,
or that is unlikely
to reach the general public.
Authors should also avoid publishing new names and
descriptions or diagnoses in popular periodicals,
in abstracting journals,
or on cor-
rection slips.
56 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 56 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Effective publication | 30A-31 |
Ex. 1.
Kartesz provided an unpaged,
printed insert titled
“Nomenclatural innovations” to
accompany the electronic version (1.0) of the
Synthesis of the North American flora
pro-
duced on compact disk (CD-ROM;
distribution through an
electronic medium in terms of
Art.
29.1).
This insert,
which is effectively published under Art.
29-30,
is the place of valid
publication of 41 new combinations,
which also appear on the disk,
in an item authored by
Kartesz:
“A synonymized checklist and atlas
with biological attributes for the vascular flora
of the United States, Canada, and Greenland” (e.g.,
Dichanthelium hirstii (Swallen) Kartesz
in Kartesz & Meacham, Synth. N. Amer. Fl.,
Nomencl. Innov.: [1]. Aug 1999).
Kartesz’s
procedure is not to be recommended,
as the insert is unlikely to be permanently stored and
catalogued in botanical libraries
and so reach the general public.
30A.2.
To aid availability
through time
and place,
authors
publishing nomencla-
tural novelties
should give preference to periodicals
that regularly publish taxon-
omic articles,
or else
printed copies of
a publication
(even if also distributed
elec-
tronically)
should be deposited
in at least ten,
but preferably more,
botanical or
other generally accessible
libraries throughout
the world including
a name-index-
ing centre
appropriate
to the taxonomic
group.
30A.3.
Authors and editors are encouraged
to mention nomenclatural novelties in
the summary or abstract,
or list them in an index in the publication.
31.1.
The date of effective publication
is the date on which the printed
matter became available as defined in Art.
29 and
30.
In the absence of
proof establishing some other date,
the one appearing in the printed matter
must be accepted as correct.
Ex. 1.
Individual parts of Willdenow’s
Species plantarum
were published as follows:
1(1),
Jun 1797;
1(2), Jul 1798;
2(1), Mar 1799;
2(2), Dec 1799;
3(1), 1800;
3(2), Nov 1802;
3(3),
Apr-Dec 1803;
4(1), 1805; 4(2), 1806;
these dates are presently accepted
as the dates of
effective publication
(see Stafleu & Cowan in Regnum Veg. 116: 303. 1988).
Ex. 2.
T. M. Fries first published
Lichenes arctoi in 1860
as an independently paginated
preprint,
which predates the identical version
published in a journal
(Nova Acta Reg. Soc.
Sci. Upsal. ser. 3, 3: 103-398. 1861).
Ex. 3.
Diatom Research, vol. 2, no. 2,
bears a title-page date of Dec 1987,
but the authors of
a paper included
in a later issue (vol. 3, p. 265)
stated that the date of publication was 18 Feb
1988,
which therefore should be taken as the date
of all nomenclatural novelties in that issue
of the journal.
Note 1.
Effective publication requires distribution
of printed matter, which estab-
lishes the date of effective publication,
even if a name is published in a periodical
with parallel printed and electronic versions.
Ex. 4.
The paper in which the name
Ceratocystis omanensis Al-Subhi & al.
is described was
available online in final form
on Science Direct on 7 November 2005,
and distributed in a
printed version in
Mycological Research 110(2): 237-245
on 7 March 2006.
The date of
effective publication of the name
for the purposes of this Article is 7 March 2006
and not 7
November 2005.
57 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 57 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
31-32 | Effective publication – Valid publication |
31.2.
When separates from periodicals or other works
placed on sale are
issued in advance,
the date on the separate is accepted
as the date of effect-
ive publication
unless there is evidence that it is erroneous.
Ex.
5.
The names of the
Selaginella species published by Hieronymus
(in Hedwigia 51:
241-272)
were effectively published on 15 October 1911,
since the volume in which the
paper appeared, though dated 1912, states (p. ii)
that the separate appeared on that date.
31A.1.
The date on which the publisher
or publisher’s agent delivers printed
matter to one of the usual carriers
for distribution to the public should be accepted
as its date of effective publication.
SECTION 2. CONDITIONS AND DATES OF VALID PUBLICATION OF
32.1.
In order to be validly published,
a name of a taxon (autonyms
excepted) must:
(a) be effectively published (see Art.
29-31)
on or after the
starting-point date of the respective group (Art.
13.1);
(b)
be composed
only of letters
of the Latin alphabet,
except as provided in
Art.
23.3
and Art.
60.4,
60.6,
60.9, and
60.10;
(c)
have a form which complies with the pro-
visions of Art.
16-27 (but see Art.
21.4 and
24.4), and Art.
H.6 and
H.7;
(d)
be accompanied by a description
or diagnosis or by a reference to a previ-
ously and effectively published description
or diagnosis
(except as provid-
ed in Art.
42.3,
44.1, and
H.9); and
(e)
comply with the special provisions
of Art.
33-45 (see also Art.
61).
32.2.
A diagnosis of a taxon is a statement of that
which in the opinion of
its author distinguishes
the taxon from other taxa.
Ex.
1.
“Egeria”
(Néraud
in Gaudichaud, Voy. Uranie, Bot.: 25, 28. 1826),
published with-
out a description
or a diagnosis or a reference to a former one,
was not validly published.
Ex.
2.
“Loranthus macrosolen Steud.”
originally appeared without a description
or diag-
nosis on the printed labels
issued about the year 1843
with Sect. II, No. 529, 1288, of
Schimper’s herbarium specimens of Abyssinian plants;
the name was not validly published,
however, until Richard (Tent. Fl. Abyss. 1: 340. 1847)
supplied a description.
*Ex.
3.
In Don,
Sweet’s Hortus britannicus, ed. 3 (1839),
for each listed species the flower
colour,
the duration of the plant,
and a translation into English
of the specific epithet are
given in tabular form.
In many genera the flower colour and duration
may be identical for all
species
and clearly their mention is not intended
as a validating description or diagnosis.
58 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 58 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Valid publication | 32 |
New names appearing in that work
are therefore not validly published,
except in some cases
where reference
is made to earlier descriptions or diagnoses
or to validly published basio-
nyms.
Ex. 4.
“Crepis praemorsa subsp.
tatrensis”
(Dvorák & Dadáková in Biológia (Bratislava)
32: 755. 1977) appeared with “a subsp.
praemorsa karyotypo achaeniorumque longitudine
praecipue differt”.
This statement specifies the features
by which the two taxa differ but not
how these features differ
and so it does not satisfy the requirement of Art.
32.1(d)
for a
“description or diagnosis”.
Ex. 5.
The generic name
Epilichen Clem. (Gen. Fungi 174. 1909)
is validly published with
the two-word diagnosis
“Karschia lichenicola”,
referring to the ability of the included
species formerly included in
Karschia to grow on lichens.
This statement, in the opinion of
Clements, distinguished the genus
from others although provision of such a diagnosis
would
not be considered good practice today.
32.3.
The requirements of Art. 32.1(d)
are not met by statements describing
properties such as purely aesthetic features,
economic, medicinal or culinary
usage,
cultural significance, cultivation techniques,
geographical origin, or
geological age.
Ex. 6.
“Musa basjoo”
(Siebold in Verh. Bat. Genootsch. Kunsten 12: 18. 1830)
appeared
with
“Ex insulis Luikiu introducta,
vix asperitati hiemis resistens.
Ex foliis linteum, prae-
sertim in insulis Luikiu
ac quibusdam insulis provinciae Satzuma conficitur.
Est haud dubie
linteum,
quod Philippinis incolis audit Nippis”.
This statement gives information about the
economic use (linen is made from the leaves),
horticultural attribute
(scarcely survives the
winter),
and on its origin
(introduced from the Ryukyu Islands),
but since there is no de-
scriptive information given for the “leaves”,
the only descriptive feature mentioned,
it does
not satisfy the requirement of Art. 32.1(d)
for a “description or diagnosis”.
Musa basjoo
Siebold & Zucc. ex Iinuma
was later validly published in Iinuma, Sintei Somoku Dzusetsu
[Illustrated Flora of Japan], ed. 2, 3: pl. 1. 1874
with floral details and an extensive de-
scription in Japanese on the page facing the plate.
32.4.
When it is doubtful whether a descriptive statement
satisfies the
requirement of Art.
32.1(d)
for a “description or diagnosis”,
a request for a
decision may be submitted
to the General Committee (see
Div. III),
which
will refer it for examination
to the committee for the appropriate taxonomic
group. A recommendation whether or not
to treat the name concerned as
validly published may then be put forward
to an International Botanical
Congress,
and if ratified will become a binding decision.
32.5.
For the purpose of valid publication of a name,
reference to a pre-
viously
and effectively published description or diagnosis
may be direct or
indirect (Art. 32.6).
For names published on or after 1 January 1953 it must,
however, be full and direct as specified in Art.
33.4.
32.6.
An indirect reference is a clear (if cryptic)
indication, by an author
citation
or in some other way, that a previously
and effectively published
description
or diagnosis applies.
59 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 59 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
32 | Valid publication |
Ex.
7.
“Kratzmannia” (Opiz in Berchtold & Opiz,
Oekon.-Techn. Fl. Böhm. 1: 398. 1836)
was published with a diagnosis
but was not definitely accepted by the author
and therefore
was not validly published.
Kratzmannia Opiz (Seznam: 56. 1852),
lacking description or
diagnosis,
is however definitely accepted,
and its citation as
“Kratzmannia O.”
constitutes
indirect reference
to the diagnosis published in 1836.
Ex.
8.
Opiz published the name of the genus
Hemisphace (Benth.) Opiz (1852)
without a
description or diagnosis,
but as he wrote
“Hemisphace Benth.”
he indirectly referred to the
previously effectively published description
by Bentham (Labiat. Gen. Spec.: 193. 1833) of
Salvia sect.
Hemisphace.
Ex.
9.
The new combination
Cymbopogon martini (Roxb.) Will. Watson (1882)
is validly
published
through the
cryptic notation
“309”, which, as explained at the top of the same
page, is the running-number of the species
(Andropogon martini Roxb.) in Steudel
(Syn. Pl.
Glumac. 1: 388. 1854).
Although the reference to the basionym
Andropogon martini is indi-
rect,
it is unambiguous (but see Art. 45
Ex. 1; see also Rec.
60C.2).
Ex.
10.
Miller (1768), in the preface to
The gardeners dictionary, ed. 8,
stated that he had
“now applied Linnaeus’s method
entirely except in such particulars ...”,
of which he gave
examples.
In the main text,
he often referred to Linnaean genera
under his own generic
headings, e.g., to
Cactus L. [pro parte] under
Opuntia Mill.
Therefore an implicit reference
to a Linnaean binomial may be assumed
when this is appropriate,
and Miller’s binomials are
then accepted as new combinations (e.g.,
O.
ficus-indica (L.) Mill., based on
C.
ficus-indica
L.) or
nomina nova (e.g.,
O.
vulgaris Mill., based on
C.
opuntia L.:
both names have the
reference to
“Opuntia vulgo herbariorum”
of Bauhin & Cherler in common).
Ex. 11.
Although no authors are cited
for the names in Kummer’s
Führer in die Pilzkunde
(1871)
statements therein allow implicit reference
to earlier authors such as Fries (see Art.
33
Ex. 7
and Pennycook in Mycotaxon 84: 163-219, 2002).
32.7.
Names or epithets published with an
improper
Latin termination but
otherwise in accordance with this
Code are regarded as validly published;
they are to be changed to accord with Art.
16-19,
21,
23 and
24, without
change of the author citation or date of publication
(see also Art.
60.11).
32.8.
Autonyms (Art.
6.8)
are accepted as validly published names,
dating
from the publication
in which they were established (see Art.
22.3 and
26.3),
whether or not they appear in print
in that publication.
32.9.
Names in specified ranks included
in publications listed as sup-
pressed works (opera utique oppressa;
App.
VI)
are not validly published.
Proposals for the addition of publications to
App.
VI
must be submitted to
the General Committee (see
Div. III),
which will refer them for examin-
ation
to the committees for the various taxonomic groups
(see Rec. 32F; see
also Art.
14.14).
32.10.
When a proposal for the suppression
of a publication has been
approved
by the General Committee after study
by the committees for the
taxonomic groups concerned,
suppression of that publication is authorized
subject to the decision of a later
International Botanical Congress.
60 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 60 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Valid publication | 32-33 |
Note 1.
For valid publication of names of plant taxa
that were originally not
treated as plants,
see Art.
45.4.
32A.1.
A name should not be validated solely
by a reference to a description or
diagnosis published before 1753.
32B.1.
The description or diagnosis of any new taxon
should mention the points in
which the taxon
differs from its allies.
32C.1.
When naming a new taxon,
authors should not adopt a name that has been
previously but not validly published
for a different taxon.
32D.1.
In describing or diagnosing new taxa,
authors should, when possible, sup-
ply figures with details of structure
as an aid to identification.
32D.2.
In the explanation of the figures,
authors should indicate the specimen(s)
on which they are based (see also Rec.
8A.2).
32D.3.
Authors should indicate clearly
and precisely the scale of the figures which
they publish.
32E.1.
Descriptions or diagnoses of parasitic plants
should always be followed by
indication of the hosts,
especially those of parasitic fungi.
The hosts should be
designated by their scientific names
and not solely by names in modern languages,
the applications of which are often doubtful.
32F.1.
When a proposal for the suppression of a publication
under Art. 32.9 has
been referred to the appropriate committees for study,
authors should follow ex-
isting usage
of names as far
as possible pending the General Committee’s
rec-
ommendation on the proposal.
33.1.
A combination (autonyms excepted)
is not validly published unless
the author definitely associates the final epithet
with the name of the genus
or species,
or with its abbreviation.
61 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 61 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
33 | Valid publication |
Ex. 1.
Combinations validly published:
In Linnaeus’s
Species plantarum
the placing of the
epithet
in the margin opposite the name of the genus
clearly associates the epithet with the
name of the genus.
The same result is attained in Miller’s
Gardeners dictionary, ed. 8,
by the
inclusion of the epithet in parentheses
immediately after the name of the genus,
in Steudel’s
Nomenclator botanicus by the arrangement
of the epithets in a list headed
by the name of the
genus, and in general
by any typographical device which associates an epithet
with a par-
ticular generic or specific name.
Ex. 2.
Combinations not validly published:
Rafinesque’s statement under
Blephilia that
“Le
type de ce genre est la
Monarda ciliata Linn.”
(in J. Phys. Chim. Hist. Nat. Arts 89: 98.
1819)
does not constitute valid publication
of the combination
B. ciliata,
since Rafinesque
did not
definitely associate the epithet
ciliata with the generic name
Blephilia.
Similarly, the
combination
Eulophus peucedanoides
is not to be attributed to Bentham & Hooker
(Gen. Pl.
1: 885. 1867)
on the basis of their listing of
“Cnidium peucedanoides, H. B. et K.” under
Eulophus.
Ex. 3.
Erioderma polycarpum subsp.
verruculosum Vain.
(Étude Lich. Brésil 1: 202. 1890)
is validly published since Vainio
clearly linked the subspecific epithet
to the specific epithet
by an asterisk.
Ex. 4.
Tuckerman (in Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts 12: 168, 1877)
described
“Erioderma vellig-
erum subsp. nov.”,
but did not associate the subspecific epithet
with the epithet of any
species name.
His statement that his new subspecies was “very near:
E. chilense”,
from
which he provided distinguishing features,
does not effect valid publication of his intended
subspecies name.
33.2.
Before 1 January 1953 an indirect reference to
a basionym or re-
placed synonym
is sufficient for valid publication
of a new combination, a
new generic name with a basionym,
or a nomen novum.
Thus, errors in the
citation of the basionym or
replaced synonym, or in author citation (Art.
46),
do not affect valid publication of such names.
Ex. 5.
The name
“Persicaria runcinata (Hamilt.)”
was included in a list of names by
Masamune
(in Bot. Mag. (Tokyo) 51: 234. 1937)
with no further information.
The name
Polygonum runcinatum
was validly published by Don
(Prodr. Fl. Nepal.: 73. 1825) and
ascribed there to “Hamilton mss”.
The mention by Masamune of “Hamilt.”
is regarded as an
indirect reference
through Buchanan-Hamilton to
the name published by Don, and the
combination
Persicaria runcinata (Buch.-Ham. ex D. Don) Masam.
must be accepted as
validly published.
Ex. 6.
The new binomials in Miller’s
The gardeners dictionary, ed. 8 (1768)
that adopt
epithets used by Linnaeus
are regarded as new combinations, e.g.
Opuntia ficus-indica (L.)
Mill., based on
Cactus ficus-indica L. (see Art. 32
Ex. 10).
Ex. 7.
In
Kummer’s
Führer
in die Pilzkunde (1871)
the statement that the author intended
to adopt at generic rank the subdivisions of
Agaricus then in use,
which at the time were those
of Fries,
and the general arrangement of the work,
which faithfully follows that of Fries,
provide indirect reference to Fries’s
earlier names of “tribes”.
Therefore, names such as
Hypholoma (Fr. : Fr.) P. Kumm. and
H. fasciculare (Huds. : Fr.)
are accepted as being based
on the corresponding Friesian names (here:
A. “tribus”
Hypholoma Fr. : Fr. and
A. fascic-
ularis Huds. : Fr.)
although Kummer did not explicitly refer to Fries.
62 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 62 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Valid publication | 33 |
33.3.
Before
1 January 1953,
if,
for a presumed new combination,
no ref-
erence to a basionym is given
but the epithet of a previously
and validly
published name
that applies to the same taxon is adopted
and that name is
neither cited
nor indicated
in any way,
the new combination is validly
published as such if, and only if,
it would otherwise be
a
validly published
name.
This provision
also applies to a
new generic name
presumed to be
based on the epithet
of an earlier
validly published name
of a subdivision of
a genus.
Ex.
8.
Scaevola taccada
was validly published by Roxburgh (1814)
by reference to an
illustration in Rheede (Hort. Malab. 4: t. 59. 1683)
that appears to be its sole basis.
As the
name applies to the species
previously described as
Lobelia taccada Gaertn. (1788),
it is
treated as a new combination,
S. taccada (Gaertn.) Roxb.,
not as the name of a new species,
even though
L. taccada
is neither cited
nor indicated in any
way in Roxburgh’s protologue.
Ex. 9.
Brachiolejeunea
was published by Stephani & Spruce
(in Hedwigia 28: 167. 1889)
for a taxon that had previously been described as
Lejeunea subg.
Brachiolejeunea Spruce
(in
Trans. & Proc. Bot. Soc. Edinburgh
15: 75, 129. 1884)
but without any reference to Spruce’s
earlier publication.
Because Stephani & Spruce
provided a description of
B. plagiochiloides
that under Art.
42
is a descriptio generico-specifica
of a monotypic genus the name would be
validly published as a new genus.
It is, however, to be treated
as a new generic name based
on Spruce’s subgeneric name, even though
L. subg.
Brachiolejeunea is neither cited nor
indicated in any way
in the protologue of Stephani & Spruce.
Ex. 10.
When Sampaio published
“Psorama murale Samp.”
(in Sampaio & Crespo in Bol.
Real Soc. Esp. Hist. Nat. 27: 142. 1927),
he adopted the epithet of
Lichen murale Schreb.
(1771),
a name applied to the same taxon,
without indicating that name directly
or indirectly.
He cited
Lecanora saxicola Ach. in synonymy.
Psorama murale is to be treated
as a new
combination based on
Lichen murale because otherwise
it would be a validly published but
illegitimate replacement name for
Lecanora saxicola.
33.4.
On
or after
1 January 1953, a new combination,
a new generic
name
with a basionym,
or an avowed substitute (replacement name,
nomen nov-
um)
based on a previously and validly published name
is not validly pub-
lished unless its basionym
(name-bringing or epithet-bringing synonym) or
the replaced synonym
(when a new name is proposed)
is clearly indicated
and a full and direct reference
given to its author and place of valid pub-
lication, with page or plate reference and date
(but see Art.
33.5 and
33.7).
On or after
1 January 2007,
a new combination,
a new generic name
with a
basionym,
or an avowed substitute
is not validly published
unless its bas-
ionym or replaced
synonym is cited.
Ex.
11.
In transferring
Ectocarpus mucronatus D. A. Saunders to
Giffordia, Kjeldsen &
Phinney
(in Madroño 22: 90. 27 Apr 1973)
cited the basionym and its author but without
reference to its place of valid publication.
They later
(in Madroño 22: 154. 2 Jul 1973)
validly
published
the binomial
G. mucronata (D. A. Saunders) Kjeldsen &
H. K. Phinney
by
giving a full and direct reference
to the place of valid publication of the basionym.
63 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 63 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
33 | Valid publication |
Note 1.
For the purpose of this
Code, a page reference
(for publications with a
consecutive pagination)
is a reference to the page or pages
on which the basionym
or replaced synonym
was validly published
or on which the protologue is printed,
but not to the pagination of the whole publication
unless it is coextensive with that
of the protologue.
Ex.
12.
When proposing
“Cylindrocladium infestans”, Peerally
(in Mycotaxon 40: 337.
1991)
cited the basionym as
“Cylindrocladiella infestans Boesew.,
Can. J. Bot. 60: 2288-
2294. 1982”.
As this refers to the pagination
of Boesewinkel’s entire paper,
not of the
protologue
of the intended basionym alone,
the combination was not validly published by
Peerally.
Ex. 13.
The new combination
Conophytum marginatum subsp.
littlewoodii (L. Bolus) S. A.
Hammer
(Dumpling & His Wife:
New Views Gen. Conophytum: 181. 2002),
being made
prior to 1 January 2007,
was validly published even though
Hammer did not cite the basio-
nym
(Conophytum littlewoodii)
but only indicated it by citing
its bibliographic reference.
33.5.
For
names published
on or after
1 January 1953,
errors
in the citation
of the basionym or replaced synonym,
including incorrect author citation
(Art.
46),
but not omissions (Art.
33.4), do not
preclude valid publication
of
a new combination, new generic name
with a
basionym, or nomen novum.
Ex.
14.
Aronia arbutifolia var.
nigra (Willd.) F. Seym.
(Fl. New England: 308. 1969)
was
published as a new combination “Based on
Mespilus arbutifolia L. var.
nigra Willd., in Sp.
Pl. 2: 1013. 1800.”
Willdenow treated these plants in the genus
Pyrus, not
Mespilus,
and
publication was in 1799, not 1800;
these errors are treated
as bibliographic errors of citation
and do not
prevent valid publication
of the new combination.
Ex. 15.
The new combination
Agropyron desertorum var.
pilosiusculum (Melderis) H. L.
Yang
(in Kuo, Fl. Reipubl. Popularis Sin. 9(3): 113. 1987)
was unknowingly but validly
published by Yang, who wrote
“Agropyron desertorum ... var.
pilosiusculum Meld.
in
Norlindh, Fl. Mong. Steppe. 1: 121. 1949”,
which constitutes a full
and direct reference to
the basionym,
A. desertorum f.
pilosiusculum Melderis,
despite the error in citing the rank-
denoting term.
33.6.
Mere reference to the
Index kewensis, the
Index of fungi, or any work
other than that in which the name was
validly published does not constitute
a full and direct reference to
the original publication of a name (but see Art.
33.7).
Ex.
16.
Ciferri
(in Mycopathol. Mycol. Appl. 7: 86-89. 1954),
in proposing 142 new
combinations in
Meliola,
omitted references to places of publication
of basionyms, stating
that they could be found in Petrak’s lists or in the
Index of fungi;
none of these combinations
was validly published.
Similarly, Grummann (Cat. Lich. Germ.: 18. 1963)
introduced a new
combination in the form
Lecanora campestris f.
“pseudistera (Nyl.) Grumm. c.n. —
L. p.
Nyl., Z 5: 521”,
in which “Z 5” referred to Zahlbruckner
(Cat. Lich. Univ. 5: 521. 1928),
who gave the full citation of the basionym,
Lecanora pseudistera Nyl.;
Grummann’s com-
bination was not validly published.
Note 2.
The publication of a name for a taxon
previously known under a misap-
plied name must be valid under Art.
32-45.
This procedure is not the same as
64 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 64 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Valid publication | 33 |
publishing an avowed substitute
(replacement name, nomen novum) for a validly
published but illegitimate name (Art.
58.1),
the type of which is necessarily the
same as
that of the name which it replaced (Art.
7.3).
Ex.
17.
Sadleria hillebrandii Rob. (1913)
was introduced as a “nom. nov.” for
“Sadleria
pallida
Hilleb. Fl. Haw. Is. 582. 1888.
Not Hook. & Arn. Bot. Beech. 75. 1832.”
Since the
requirements of Art.
32-45
were satisfied (for valid publication,
prior to 1935, simple refer-
ence to a previous description
or diagnosis in any language was sufficient),
the name is
validly published.
It is, however, to be considered the name
of a new species, validated by
Hillebrand’s description of the taxon
to which he misapplied the name
S. pallida Hook. &
Arn.,
and not a nomen novum as stated by Robinson;
hence, Art.
7.3
does not apply.
Ex.
18.
Juncus bufonius “var.
occidentalis”
(Hermann in U.S. Forest Serv., Techn. Rep.
RM-18: 14. 1975)
was published as a “nom. et stat. nov.” for
J. sphaerocarpus “auct. Am.,
non Nees”.
Since there is no Latin diagnosis,
designation of type, or reference
to any pre-
vious publication
providing these requirements,
the name is not validly published.
33.7.
On
or after
1 January 1953,
in any of the following cases,
a full and
direct
reference to a work other than that
in which the basionym or replaced
synonym
was validly published is treated
as an error to be corrected,
not
affecting the valid publication
of a new combination, a new
generic name
with a
basionym, or nomen novum:
(a)
when the name cited as
the basionym
or replaced synonym was validly
published earlier than in the cited publication,
but in that cited publi-
cation, in which all conditions for valid publication
are again fulfilled,
there is no reference
to the actual place of valid publication;
(b)
when the failure to cite
the place of valid publication
of the basionym or
replaced synonym is explained by
the later nomenclatural starting point
for the group concerned,
and in particular by the backward shift of the
starting date for some fungi;
(c)
when an intended new combination
or new generic name
with a
basio-
nym
would otherwise be validly published as a
(legitimate or illegiti-
mate) nomen novum; or
(d)
when an intended new combination, new generic name
with a basio-
nym,
or nomen novum
would otherwise be the validly published name
of a new taxon.
Ex.
19.
(a)
The combination
Trichipteris kalbreyeri
was proposed by Tryon (1970)
with a
full and direct reference to
“Alsophila Kalbreyeri C. Chr.
Ind. Fil. 44. 1905”.
This, however,
is not the place of valid publication of
the intended basionym,
which had previously been
published,
with the same type, by Baker (1891; see Art. 6
Ex. 1).
As Christensen provided
no reference to
Baker’s earlier publication, Tryon’s error of citation
does not affect the valid
publication
of his new combination, which is to be cited as
T. kalbreyeri (Baker) R. M.
Tryon.
65 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 65 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
33 | Valid publication |
Ex.
20.
(a)
The intended new combination
“Machaerina iridifolia” was proposed
by Koy-
ama (in Bot. Mag. (Tokyo) 69: 64. 1956)
with a full and direct reference to
“Cladium
iridifolium
Baker, Flor. Maurit. 424 (1877)”.
However,
C. iridifolium had been proposed by
Baker as a new combination based on
Scirpus iridifolius Bory (1804).
As Baker provided an
explicit reference to Bory, Art.
33.7(a)
does not apply and the combination under
Ma-
chaerina
was not validly published by Koyama.
Ex.
21.
(b)
The combination
Lasiobelonium corticale
was proposed by Raitviir (1980)
with
a full and direct reference to
Peziza corticalis
in Fries (Syst. Mycol. 2: 96. 1822).
This,
however,
is not the place of valid publication of
the basionym, which, under the
Code
operating in 1980, was in Mérat
(Nouv. Fl. Env. Paris, ed. 2, 1: 22. 1821),
and under the
current
Code is in Persoon (Observ. Mycol. 1: 28. 1796).
Raitviir’s error of citation, being
partly explained by the backward shift
of the starting date for ascomycetes
and partly by the
absence of a reference to Mérat
in Fries’s work, does not
negate valid
publication of the new
combination,
which is to be cited as
L. corticale (Pers. : Fr.) Raitv.
Ex. 22.
(c)
The intended new combination
Mirabilis laevis subsp.
glutinosa was proposed
by Murray
(in Kalmia 13: 32. 1983)
with a full and direct reference to
“Mirabilis glutinosa
A. Nels.,
Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash. 17: 92 (1904)” as “basionymum”.
This, however, cannot be
a basionym because
it is an illegitimate later homonym of
M. glutinosa Kuntze (1898);
it is
also the replaced synonym of
Hesperonia glutinosa Standl. (1909).
Under Art. 33.7(c)
Murray validly published a new combination based on
H. glutinosa because otherwise he
would have published a nomen novum for
M. glutinosa.
The name is therefore to be cited as
M. laevis subsp.
glutinosa (Standl.) A. E. Murray.
Ex. 23.
(d)
The nomen novum
Agropyron kengii was proposed by Tzvelev (1968)
with a
full and direct reference to
“Roegneria hirsuta Keng,
Fl. ill. sin., Gram. (1959) 407”.
This,
however,
is not the place of valid publication of
the intended replaced synonym, which was
subsequently validly
published by Keng (1963).
As Tzvelev also provided a Latin descrip-
tion and indicated a single gathering as the type,
the nomen novum was validly published as
such
because it would otherwise have been
the validly published name of a new taxon.
33.8.
On or after 1 January 1953,
if an author claims to be publishing a new
combination, new generic name with a basionym,
or avowed substitute, but
fails to provide
the full information required under Art.
33.4,
as qualified by
Art.
33.5 and
33.7,
the name is not validly published
even though the author
may have at the same time
provided other information
that would have
resulted in valid publication
as the name of a new taxon.
33.9.
A name given to a taxon of which
the rank is at the same time,
contrary to Art.
5,
denoted by a misplaced term is not validly published.
Such misplacements include forms divided into varieties,
species contain-
ing genera,
and genera containing families or tribes.
33.10.
Only those names published
with the rank-denoting terms that must
be removed so as to achieve a proper sequence
are to be regarded as not
validly published.
In cases where terms are switched,
e.g. family-order, and
a proper sequence can be achieved
by removing either or both of the
rank-denoting terms,
names at neither rank are validly published
unless one
66 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 66 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Valid publication | 33-34 |
is a secondary rank (Art.
4.1)
and one is a principal rank (Art.
3.1), e.g.
family-genus-tribe,
in which case only names published at the secondary
rank are not validly published.
Ex. 24.
“Sectio
Orontiaceae” was not validly published by Brown
(Prodr.: 337. 1810) since
he misapplied
the term “sectio” to a rank higher than genus.
Ex.
25.
“Tribus
Involuta” and “tribus
Brevipedunculata”
(Huth in Bot. Jahrb. Syst. 20: 365,
368. 1895)
are not validly published names,
since Huth misapplied the term “tribus” to a
rank lower than section, within the genus
Delphinium.
Note 3.
Sequential use of the same rank-denoting term
in a taxonomic sequence
does not represent
misplaced-rank denoting terms.
Ex. 26.
Danser
(in Recueil Trav. Bot. Néerl. 18: 125-210. 1921)
published ten new names
of subspecies
in a treatment of
Polygonum in which he recognized subspecies
(indicated by
Roman numerals) within subspecies
(indicated by Arabic numerals).
These do not represent
misplaced rank-denoting terms, so Art.
33.9
does not apply and the new names are validly
published.
33.11.
Situations where the same rank-denoting term
is used at more than
one non-successive position
in the taxonomic sequence represent informal
usage of rank-denoting terms.
Names published with such rank-denoting
terms are treated as unranked (see Art.
35.1 and
35.3).
Ex. 27.
Names published with the term “series”
by Bentham & Hooker (Gen. Pl. 1-3.
1862-1883)
are treated as unranked because this term was used
at seven different hierar-
chical positions
in the taxonomic sequence.
Therefore, the sequence in
Rhynchospora (3:
1058-1060. 1883)
of genus-“series“-section does not contain
a misplaced rank-denoting
term.
33.12.
An exception to Art.
33.9
is made for names of the subdivisions of
genera termed tribes (tribus) in Fries’s
Systema mycologicum,
which are
treated as validly published names
of subdivisions of genera.
Ex.
28.
Agaricus “tribus”
Pholiota Fr. (Syst. Mycol. 1: 240. 1821),
sanctioned in the same
work,
is the validly published basionym
of the generic name
Pholiota (Fr. : Fr.) P. Kumm.
(1871)
(see Art. 33
Ex.
7).
33A.1.
The full and direct reference
to the place of publication of the basionym or
replaced synonym should immediately follow
a proposed new combination or
nomen novum.
It should not be provided by mere cross-reference
to a bibliography
at the end of the publication
or to other parts of the same publication,
e.g. by use of
the abbreviations
“loc. cit.” or
“op. cit.”
34.1.
A name is not validly published
(a)
when it is not accepted by the
author in the original publication;
(b)
when it is merely proposed in anti-
67 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 67 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
34 | Valid publication |
cipation of the future acceptance of the
taxon concerned,
or of a particular
circumscription,
position, or rank of the
taxon
(so-called provisional name),
except as provided for in Art.
59;
(c)
when it is merely cited as a synonym;
(d)
by the mere mention of the subordinate taxa
included in the taxon
concerned.
Art. 34.1(a) does not apply to names
published with a question
mark or other indication of taxonomic doubt,
yet accepted by their author.
Ex. 1.
(a)
“Sebertia”, proposed by Pierre (ms.)
for a monotypic genus,
was not validly
published by Baillon
(in Bull. Mens. Soc. Linn. Paris 2: 945. 1891)
because he did not ac-
cept the genus.
Although he gave a description of it,
he referred its only species
“Sebertia
acuminata Pierre (ms.)”
to the genus
Sersalisia R. Br. as
S. ?
acuminata,
which he thereby
validly published
under the provision of Art. 34.1, last sentence.
The name
Sebertia was
validly published by Engler (1897).
Ex. 2.
(a)
The designations listed in the lefthand column
of the Linnaean thesis
Herbarium
amboinense defended by Stickman (1754)
were not names accepted by Linnaeus upon
publication and are not validly published.
Ex. 3.
(a)
Coralloides gorgonina Bory
was validly published in a paper by Flörke
(in Mag.
Neusten Entdeck. Gesammten Naturk. Ges.
Naturf. Freunde Berlin 3: 125. 1809), even
though Flörke did not accept it as a new species.
At Bory’s request, Flörke included Bory’s
diagnosis (and name) making Bory
the author of the name under Art.
46.2.
The acceptance
or otherwise of the name
by Flörke is not, therefore,
relevant for valid publication.
Ex.
4.
(a) (b)
The designation
“Conophyton”, suggested by Haworth
(Rev. Pl. Succ.: 82.
1821) for
Mesembryanthemum sect.
Minima Haw. (Rev. Pl. Succ.: 81. 1821)
in the words
“If this section proves to be a genus, the name of
Conophyton would be apt”, was not a
validly published generic name since Haworth
did not adopt it or accept the genus.
The
name was validly published as
Conophytum N. E. Br. (1922).
Ex.
5.
(b)
“Pteridospermaexylon” and
“P. theresiae” were published by Greguss
(in Földt.
Közl. 82: 171. 1952)
for a genus and species of fossil wood.
As Greguss explicitly stated
“Vorläufig benenne ich es mit den Namen ...”
[provisionally I designate it by the names ...],
these are provisional names and as such
are not validly published.
Ex. 6.
(b)
The designation
“Sterocaulon subdenudatum” proposed by Havaas
(in Bergens
Mus. Arbok. 12: 13, 20. 1954)
is not validly published in spite of it being presented
as a new
species with a Latin diagnosis,
since on both pages it was indicated to be “ad int.”
Ex.
7.
(c)
“Ornithogalum undulatum hort. Bouch.”
was not validly published by Kunth
(Enum. Pl. 4: 348. 1843)
when he cited it as a synonym under
Myogalum boucheanum
Kunth;
the combination under
Ornithogalum L. was validly published later:
O. boucheanum
(Kunth) Asch. (1866).
Ex.
8.
(d)
The family designation
“Rhaptopetalaceae”
was not validly published by Pierre
(in Bull. Mens. Soc. Linn. Paris 2: 1296. Mai 1897),
who merely mentioned the constituent
genera,
Brazzeia Baill.,
“Scytopetalum”, and
Rhaptopetalum Oliv.,
but gave no description
or diagnosis;
the family bears the name
Scytopetalaceae Engl. (Oct 1897),
accompanied by
a description.
Ex.
9.
(d)
The generic designation
“Ibidium” was not validly published by Salisbury
(in
Trans. Hort. Soc. London 1: 291. 1812),
who merely mentioned four included species but
supplied no generic description or diagnosis.
68 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 68 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Valid publication | 34-34A |
Ex. 10.
(final sentence)
Aponogetonaceae Planch.
(in Bot. Mag.: ad. t. 4894. 1856) was val-
idly published by reference to the description of
“Aponogétacées” (Planchon in Ann. Sci.
Nat., Bot., sér. 3, 1: 119. 1844) even though
Hooker indicated taxonomic doubt when he
wrote (pp. [4-5]) “M. Planchon ... suggests that
Aponogeton should form a suborder of
Al-
ismaceae, or probably a new order,
Aponogetaceae”.
34.2.
When, on or after 1 January 1953,
two or more different names based
on the same type are proposed simultaneously
for the same taxon by the
same author
(so-called alternative names),
none of them is validly pub-
lished.
This rule does not apply in those cases
where the same combination
is simultaneously
used at different ranks,
either for infraspecific taxa within
a species or
for subdivisions of a genus within a genus (see Rec.
22A.1-2
and
26A.1-3).
Ex.
11.
The species of
Brosimum Sw. described by Ducke
(in Arch. Jard. Bot. Rio de
Janeiro 3: 23-29. 1922)
were published with alternative names under
Piratinera Aubl.
added
in a footnote (pp. 23-24).
The publication of both sets of names,
being effected before 1
January 1953,
is valid.
Ex.
12.
“Euphorbia jaroslavii”
(Poljakov in Bot. Mater. Gerb. Bot. Inst. Komarova Akad.
Nauk SSSR 15: 155. 1953)
was published with an alternative designation,
“Tithymalus
jaroslavii”.
Neither was validly published.
However, one name,
Euphorbia yaroslavii
(with
a different transliteration of the initial letter),
was validly published by Poljakov (1961),
who
effectively published it with
a reference
to the earlier publication and simultaneously
rejected
assignment to
Tithymalus.
Ex.
13.
Description of
“Malvastrum bicuspidatum subsp.
tumidum S. R. Hill var.
tumidum,
subsp. et var. nov.”
(in Brittonia 32: 474. 1980)
simultaneously validated both
M. bicus-
pidatum subsp.
tumidum S. R. Hill and
M. bicuspidatum var.
tumidum S. R. Hill.
Ex.
14.
Hitchcock (in Univ. Wash. Publ. Biol.
17(1): 507-508. 1969) used the name
Bromus
inermis subsp.
pumpellianus (Scribn.) Wagnon
and provided a full and direct reference to its
basionym,
B. pumpellianus Scribn.
Within that subspecies, he recognized varieties,
one of
which he named
B. inermis var. pumpellianus
(without author citation but clearly based on
the same basionym and type).
In so doing,
he met the requirements for valid publication of
B. inermis var.
pumpellianus (Scribn.) C. L. Hitchc.
Note 1.
The name of a fungal holomorph
and that of a correlated anamorph (see
Art.
59),
even if
proposed
simultaneously,
are not alternative names in the sense of
Art. 34.2, and both are validly published.
They have different types,
and the cir-
cumscription of the holomorph
is considered to include the anamorph,
but not vice
versa.
Ex.
15.
Lasiosphaeria elinorae Linder (1929),
the name of a fungal holomorph,
and the
simultaneously published name
of a correlated anamorph,
Helicosporium elinorae Linder,
are both validly published,
and both can be used under Art.
59.5.
34A.1.
Authors should avoid mentioning
in their publications previously unpub-
lished names that they do not accept,
especially if the persons responsible for these
69 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 69 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
34A-35 | Valid publication |
unpublished names have not formally
authorized their publication (see Rec.
23A.3(i)).
35.1.
A new name or combination published
on or after 1 January 1953
without a clear indication of the rank
of the taxon concerned is not validly
published.
35.2.
For suprageneric names published on
or after 1 January 1908, the use
of one of the terminations specified in Rec.
16A.1-3, Art.
17.1,
18.1,
19.1,
and
19.3
is accepted as an indication of the corresponding rank,
unless this
(a) would conflict
with the explicitly designated rank of the taxon
(which
takes precedence),
(b) would result in a rank sequence
contrary to Art.
5
(in
which case Art.
33.9 applies), or
(c) would
result in a rank
sequence in
which the same
rank-denoting term
occurs at more
than one
hierarchical
position.
Ex. 1.
Jussieu (in Mém. Mus. Hist. Nat. 12: 497. 1827)
proposed
Zanthoxyleae without
specifying the rank.
Although he employed the present termination for tribe
(-eae), that
name,
being published prior to 1908, is unranked.
Zanthoxyleae Dumort.
(Anal. Fam. Pl.:
45. 1829),
however, is a tribal name,
as Dumortier specified its rank.
Ex. 2.
Nakai (Chosakuronbun Mokuroku
[Ord. Fam. Trib. Nov.], 1943)
validly published
the names
Parnassiales, Lophiolaceae,
Ranzanioideae, and
Urospatheae.
He indicated the
respective ranks of order,
family, subfamily, and tribe,
by virtue of their terminations, even
though he did not mention these ranks explicitly.
35.3.
A new name or combination published before
1 January 1953 with-
out a clear indication
of its rank is validly published provided
that all other
requirements
for valid publication are fulfilled;
it is, however, inoperative
in questions of priority
except for homonymy (see Art.
53.4).
If it is a new
name,
it may serve as a basionym
for subsequent combinations or a re-
placed synonym for nomina nova in definite ranks.
Ex. 3.
The groups
“Soldanellae”, “Sepincoli”,
“Occidentales”, etc., were published with-
out any indication of rank under
Convolvulus L. by House
(in Muhlenbergia 4: 50. 1908).
The names
C. [unranked]
Soldanellae, etc.,
are validly published
but they are not in any
definite rank and have no status
in questions of priority except
for purposes
of homonymy.
Ex. 4.
In
Carex L., the epithet
Scirpinae was used in the name of
a
subdivision
of a
genus of
no stated rank by Tuckerman
(Enum. Meth. Caric.: 8. 1843);
this taxon was assigned sec-
tional rank
by Kükenthal (in Engler, Pflanzenr. 38: 81. 1909)
and its name may be cited as
Carex sect.
Scirpinae (Tuck.) Kük.
(C. [unranked]
Scirpinae Tuck.).
Ex. 5.
Loesener published
“Geranium andicola var. vel forma
longipedicellatum”
(Bull.
Herb. Boissier, ser. 2, 3(2): 93. 1903)
without a clear indication of infraspecific rank.
The
name is correctly cited as
“G. andicola [unranked]
longipedicellatum Loes.”
The epithet
was used in a subsequent combination,
G. longipedicellatum (Loes.) R. Knuth (1912).
70 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 70 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Valid publication | 35-36 |
35.4.
If in one whole publication (Art. 35.5),
prior to 1 January 1890,
only
one infraspecific rank is admitted,
it is considered to be that of variety un-
less this would be contrary to the author’s
statements in the same publica-
tion.
35.5.
In questions of indication of rank,
all publications appearing under
the same title and by the same author,
such as different parts of a flora
issued at different times
(but not different editions of the same work),
must
be considered as a whole,
and any statement made therein designating the
rank of taxa included in the work
must be considered as if it had been
published together with the first instalment.
Ex. 6.
In Link’s
Handbuch (1829-1833)
the rank-denoting term “O.” (ordo)
was used in all
three volumes.
These names of orders cannot be considered
as having been published as
names of families (Art.
18.2)
since the term family was used for
Agaricaceae and
Tremel-
laceae under the order
Fungi in vol. 3 (pp. 272, 337; see Art. 18
Note 1).
This applies to all
three volumes of the
Handbuch, even though vol. 3 was published later
(Jul -29 Sep 1833)
than vols. 1 and 2 (4-11 Jul 1829).
36.1.
On or after 1 January 1935 a name of a new taxon
(algal and all fossil
taxa excepted)
must, in order to be validly published,
be accompanied by a
Latin description
or diagnosis or by a reference to a previously and
effec-
tively published Latin description
or diagnosis (but see Art.
H.9).
Ex. 1.
Arabis “Sekt.
Brassicoturritis O. E. Schulz” and “Sekt.
Brassicarabis O. E. Schulz”
(in Engler & Prantl, Nat. Pflanzenfam.,
ed. 2, 17b: 543-544. 1936),
published with German
but no Latin descriptions
or diagnoses, are not validly published names.
Ex. 2.
“Schiedea gregoriana”
(Degener, Fl. Hawaiiensis, fam. 119. 9 Apr 1936)
was ac-
companied by an English
but no Latin description and is accordingly
not a validly published
name.
Schiedea kealiae
Caum & Hosaka (in Occas. Pap. Bernice Pauahi Bishop Mus.
11(23): 3. 10 Apr 1936),
the type of which is part of the material used by Degener,
is pro-
vided with a Latin description
and is validly published.
Ex. 3.
Alyssum flahaultianum Emb.,
first published without a Latin description or diagnosis
(in Bull. Soc. Hist. Nat. Maroc 15: 199. 1936),
was validly published posthumously when a
Latin translation of Emberger’s original
French description was provided
(in Willdenowia
15: 62-63. 1985).
36.2.
In order to be validly published,
a name of a new taxon of non-fossil
algae published on or after 1 January 1958
must be accompanied by a Latin
description
or diagnosis or by a reference to a previously
and effectively
published Latin description
or diagnosis.
Ex. 4.
Although
Neoptilota Kylin (Gatt. Rhodophyc.: 392. 1956)
was accompanied by only
a German description,
it is a validly published name since it applies
to an alga and was
published before 1958.
71 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 71 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
36-37 | Valid publication |
36.3.
In order to be validly published,
a name of a new taxon of fossil
plants
published on or after 1 January 1996
must be accompanied by a Latin
or English description or diagnosis
or by a reference to a previously and
effectively published Latin or English description
or diagnosis.
36A.1.
Authors publishing names of new taxa
of non-fossil plants should give or
cite a full description in Latin
in addition to the diagnosis.
37.1.
Publication on or after 1 January 1958
of the name of a new taxon of
the rank of genus or below is valid only
when the type of the name is indi-
cated (see Art.
7-10; but see Art. H.9
Note 1
for the names of certain hy-
brids).
37.2.
For the name of a new species or infraspecific taxon,
indication of the
type as required by Art. 37.1
can be achieved by reference to an entire gath-
ering, or part thereof, even if it consists
of two or more specimens as de-
fined in Art.
8
(see also Art. 37.7).
Ex. 1.
When Cheng described
“Gnetum cleistostachyum”
(in Acta Phytotax. Sin. 13(4): 89.
1975)
the name was not validly published
because two gatherings were designated as types:
K. H. Tsai 142 (as “♀ Typus”) and
X. Jiang 127 (as “♂ Typus”).
Note 1.
When the type is indicated by reference
to a gathering that consists of
more than one specimen,
those specimens are syntypes (see Art.
9.4).
Ex.
2.
The protologue of
Laurentia frontidentata E. Wimm.
(in Engler, Pflanzenr. 108: 855.
1968)
includes the type statement
“E. Esterhuysen No. 17070!
Typus – Pret., Bol.”
The
name is validly published
because a single gathering is cited,
despite the mention of dup-
licate specimens (syntypes) in two different herbaria.
37.3.
For the name of a new genus
or subdivision of a genus,
reference
(direct or indirect)
to one species name only,
or the citation of the holotype
or lectotype of one previously
or simultaneously published species name
only,
even if that element is not explicitly designated as type,
is acceptable
as indication of the type
(see also Art.
22.6;
but see Art. 37.6).
Similarly, for
the name of a new species
or infraspecific taxon, mention of a single
specimen or gathering (Art. 37.2)
or illustration (when permitted by Art.
37.4
or 37.5),
even if that element is not explicitly
designated as type, is
acceptable as indication of the type
(but see Art. 37.6).
Ex.
3.
“Baloghia pininsularis”
was published by Guillaumin
(in Mém. Mus. Natl. Hist.
Nat., B, Bot. 8: 260. 1962)
with two cited gatherings:
Baumann 13813 and
Baumann 13823.
As the author failed to designate one of them as the type,
he did not validly publish the name.
72 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 72 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Valid publication | 37 |
Valid publication was effected
when
McPherson & Tirel
(in Fl. Nouv.-Caléd. 14: 58. 1987)
wrote
“Lectotype (désigné ici):
Baumann-Bodenheim 13823 (P!; iso-, Z)”
while providing a
full and direct reference
to Guillaumin’s Latin description (Art.
45.1;
see Art. 46
Ex.
9);
McPherson & Tirel’s
use of
“lectotype”
is correctable to
“holotype” under Art.
9.8.
Note
2.
Mere citation of a locality does not constitute mention
of a single spec-
imen or gathering.
Concrete reference to some detail relating
to the actual type, such
as the
collector’s name or collecting number or date,
is required.
Note
3.
Cultures of fungi and algae preserved
in a metabolically inactive state are
acceptable as types (Art.
8.4;
see also Rec.
8B.1).
37.4.
For the purpose of this Article,
the type of a name of a new species or
infraspecific taxon (fossils excepted: see Art.
8.5)
may be an illustration
prior to 1 January 2007,
on or after which date,
the type must
be a specimen
(except as provided
in Art. 37.5).
37.5.
For the purpose
of this Article,
the type of a name
of a new species or
infraspecific taxon
of microscopic algae or microfungi
(fossils excepted:
see Art.
8.5) may be
an effectively published
illustration
if there are tech-
nical difficulties of preservation or if
it is impossible to preserve a specimen
that would show the features attributed to the taxon
by the author of the
name.
37.6.
For the name of a new taxon of the rank of genus
or below published
on or after 1 January 1990,
indication of the type must include one of the
words “typus” or “holotypus”, or its abbreviation,
or its equivalent in a
modern language
(see also Rec. 37A).
In the case of
the name of a
new
genus or subdivision
of a genus
that is monotypic
(as defined in Art.
42.2),
indication of
the type of
the species name
is sufficient.
37.7.
For the name of a new species or infraspecific taxon
published on or
after 1 January 1990
of which the type is a specimen or unpublished illus-
tration, the single herbarium or collection or institution
in which the type is
conserved must be specified.
Ex. 4.
In the protologue of
Setaria excurrens var.
leviflora Keng ex S. L. Chen
(in Bull.
Nanjing Bot. Gard. 1988-1989: 3. 1990)
the gathering
Guangxi Team 4088 was indicated as
““模式” (Chinese for “type”)
and the herbarium where the type is conserved
was specified as
“中国科学院植物研究所標本室”
(Botanical Research Institute,
Chinese Academy of Sciences,
i.e. PE).
Note
4.
Specification of the herbarium or collection
or institution may be made in
an abbreviated form,
e.g. as given in
Index herbariorum, part I, or in the
World
directory of collections
of cultures of microorganisms.
Ex. 5.
When ’t Hart described
“Sedum eriocarpum subsp.
spathulifolium”
(in Ot Sist. Bot.
Dergisi 2(2): 7. 1995)
the name was not validly published
because no herbarium or collec-
tion or institution in which
the holotype specimen was conserved was specified.
Valid pub-
lication was effected when
’t Hart (in Strid & Tan, Fl. Hellen. 2: 325. 2002)
wrote “Type ...
73 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 73 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
37-40 | Valid publication |
’t Hart HRT-27104 ... (U)”
while providing a full and direct
reference to his previously pub-
lished Latin diagnosis (Art.
45.1).
37A.1.
The indication of the nomenclatural type
should immediately follow the
description
or diagnosis and should include the Latin word
“typus” or “holotypus”.
38.1.
In order to be validly published,
a name of a new taxon of fossil
plants
of specific or lower rank published on
or after 1 January 1912 must
be accompanied by an illustration or figure
showing the essential charac-
ters,
in addition to the description or diagnosis,
or by a reference to a pre-
viously and effectively published illustration or figure.
38.2.
For the name of a new species
or infraspecific taxon of fossil plants
published on or after 1 January 2001,
at least
one of the validating illus-
trations must be identified
as representing the type specimen (see also Art.
9.13).
39.1.
In order to be validly published,
a name of a new taxon of non-fossil
algae
of specific or lower rank published
on or after 1 January 1958 must be
accompanied by an illustration or figure showing
the distinctive morpho-
logical features,
in addition to the Latin description or diagnosis,
or by a
reference to a previously and effectively
published illustration or figure.
39A.1.
The illustration or figure required by Art. 39
should be prepared from ac-
tual specimens,
preferably including the holotype.
40.1.
In order to be validly published,
names of hybrids of specific or
lower rank
with Latin epithets must comply with
the same rules as names of
non-hybrid taxa of the same rank.
Ex. 1.
“Nepeta
×faassenii”
(Bergmans, Vaste Pl. Rotsheesters, ed. 2: 544. 1939, with a
description in Dutch; Lawrence in Gentes Herb. 8: 64. 1949,
with a diagnosis in English) is
not validly published,
not being accompanied by or associated with
a Latin description or
diagnosis.
The name
Nepeta
×faassenii Bergmans ex Stearn (1950)
is validly published,
being accompanied by a Latin description.
74 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 74 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Valid publication | 40-41 |
Ex. 2.
“Rheum
×cultorum”
(Thorsrud & Reisaeter, Norske Plantenavn: 95. 1948),
being
there a nomen nudum,
is not validly published.
Ex. 3.
“Fumaria
×salmonii” (Druce, List Brit. Pl.: 4. 1908)
is not validly published, as only
the presumed parentage
F. densiflora ×
F. officinalis is stated.
Note 1.
For names of hybrids of the rank of genus
or subdivision of a genus, see
Art. H.9.
41.1.
In order to be validly published,
a name of a family or subdivision of
a family must be accompanied
(a) by a description or diagnosis of the
taxon, or
(b) by a reference (direct or indirect)
to a previously and effec-
tively published description or diagnosis
of a family or subdivision of a
family.
Ex. 1.
“Pseudoditrichaceae fam. nov.”
(Steere & Iwatsuki in Canad. J. Bot. 52: 701. 1974)
was not a validly published name of a family
as there was no Latin description or diagnosis
nor reference to either, but only mention of
the single included genus and species (see Art.
34.1(d)),
“Pseudoditrichum mirabile gen. et sp. nov.”,
both validly published under Art.
42
by a single Latin diagnosis.
Ex. 2.
Presl did not validly publish
“Cuscuteae”
(in Presl & Presl, Delic. Prag.: 87. 1822) as
the name of a family (see “Praemonenda”, pp. [3-4])
by direct reference to the previously
and effectively published description of
“Cuscuteae” (Berchtold & Presl,
Přir. Rostlin: 247.
1820)
because the latter is the name of an order (see Art. 18
*Ex.
4).
41.2.
In order to be validly published, a name of a genus
or subdivision of a
genus must be accompanied
(a) by a description or diagnosis of the taxon
(but see Art.
42), or
(b) by a reference (direct or indirect)
to a previously
and effectively published
description or diagnosis of a genus or subdivision
of a genus.
Ex.
3.
Validly published generic names:
Carphalea Juss.,
accompanied by a generic de-
scription;
Thuspeinanta T. Durand,
replacing the name of the previously described genus
Tapeinanthus Boiss. ex Benth. (non Herb.);
Aspalathoides (DC.) K. Koch,
based on the
name of a previously described section,
Anthyllis sect.
Aspalathoides DC.;
Scirpoides Ség.
(Pl. Veron. Suppl.: 73. 1754),
accepted there but without a generic description
or diagnosis,
validly published
by indirect reference
(through the title of the book
and a general statement
in the preface) to the generic diagnosis
and further direct references in Séguier
(Pl. Veron. 1:
117. 1745).
Note 1.
An exception to Art. 41.2
is made for the generic names
first published by
Linnaeus in
Species plantarum,
ed. 1 (1753) and ed. 2 (1762-1763),
which are treat-
ed
as having been validly published on those dates
(see Art.
13.4).
Note 2.
In certain circumstances, an illustration
with analysis is accepted as
equivalent
to a generic description or diagnosis (see Art.
42.3).
75 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 75 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
41-42 | Valid publication |
41.3.
In order to be validly published,
a name of a species or infraspecific
taxon must be accompanied
(a) by a description or diagnosis
of the taxon
(but see Art.
42 and
44), or
(b) by a reference to a previously
and effectively
published description
or diagnosis of a species or infraspecific taxon.
A
name of a species may also be validly published
(c), under certain circum-
stances, by reference to a genus the name of which
was previously and
validly published simultaneously
with its description or diagnosis. A ref-
erence as mentioned under (c)
is acceptable only if neither the author of the
name of the genus nor the author
of the name of the species indicates that
more than one species belongs to the genus
in question.
Ex.
4.
Trilepisium Thouars (1806) was validated
by a generic description but without
mention of a name of a species.
T. madagascariense DC. (1825)
was subsequently proposed
without a description or diagnosis of the species.
Neither author gave any indication that
there was more than one species in the genus.
Candolle’s specific name is therefore validly
published.
42.1.
The names of a genus and a species may be
validly published
simultaneously
by provision of a single description
(descriptio generico-
specifica) or diagnosis,
even though this may have been intended as only
generic or specific,
if all of the following conditions obtain:
(a) the genus is
at that time monotypic;
(b) no other names (at any rank) have previously
been validly published based on the same type; and
(c) the names of the ge-
nus and species
otherwise fulfil the requirements for valid publication.
Reference to an earlier description or diagnosis
is not acceptable in place of
a descriptio generico-specifica.
42.2.
For the purpose of Art. 42, a monotypic genus
is one for which a
single binomial is validly published,
even though the author may indicate
that other species are attributable to the genus.
Ex. 1.
Nylander (1879) described the new species
“Anema nummulariellum” in a new
genus
“Anema” without providing
a generic description or diagnosis.
Since at the same time
he also transferred
Omphalaria nummularia Durieu & Mont. to
“Anema”,
none of his
names was validly published.
They were later validated by Forsell (1885).
Ex. 2.
The names
Kedarnatha P. K. Mukh. & Constance (1986) and
K. sanctuarii P. K.
Mukh. & Constance,
the latter designating the single, new species of the new genus,
are both
validly published although a Latin description
was provided only under the generic name.
Ex. 3.
Piptolepis phillyreoides Benth. (1840)
was a new species assigned to the monotypic
new genus
Piptolepis published with a combined generic
and specific description, and both
names are validly published.
Ex. 4.
In publishing
“Phaelypea” without a generic description or diagnosis,
P. Browne
(Civ. Nat. Hist. Jamaica: 269. 1756)
included and described a single species,
but he gave the
76 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 76 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Valid publication | 43-43 |
species a phrase-name
not a validly published binomial.
Art. 42 does not therefore apply and
“Phaelypea” is not a validly published name.
42.3.
Prior to 1 January 1908 an illustration
with analysis, or for non-
vascular plants
a single figure showing details aiding identification,
is ac-
ceptable, for the purpose of this Article,
in place of a written description or
diagnosis.
42.4.
For the purpose of Art. 42,
an analysis is a figure or group of figures,
commonly separate from the main illustration of the plant
(though usually
on the same page or plate),
showing details aiding identification,
with or
without a separate caption.
Ex. 5.
The generic name
Philgamia Baill. (1894) was validly published,
as it appeared on a
plate with analysis
of the only included species,
P. hibbertioides Baill.,
and was published
before 1 January 1908.
43.1.
A name of a taxon below the rank of genus
is not validly published
unless the name of the genus or species
to which it is assigned is validly
published
at the same time or was validly published previously.
Ex. 1.
Binary designations for six species of
“Suaeda”, including
“S. baccata” and
“S.
vera”,
were published with descriptions and diagnoses
by Forsskål (Fl. Aegypt.-Arab.: 69-
71. 1775),
but he provided no description or diagnosis
for the genus: these were not there-
fore validly published names.
Ex. 2.
Müller (in Flora 63: 286. 1880)
published the new genus
“Phlyctidia” with the spe-
cies
“P. hampeana n. sp.”,
“P. boliviensis” (=
Phlyctis boliviensis Nyl.),
“P. sorediiformis”
(=
Phlyctis sorediiformis Kremp.),
“P. brasiliensis” (=
Phlyctis brasiliensis Nyl.), and
“P.
andensis” (=
Phlyctis andensis Nyl.).
These were not, however,
validly published specific
names
in this place, because the intended generic name
“Phlyctidia” was not validly pub-
lished;
Müller gave no generic description or diagnosis but only
a description and a diag-
nosis of the new species
“P. hampeana”.
This description and diagnosis
did not validate the
generic name
as a descriptio generico-specifica under Art.
42
since the new genus was not
monotypic.
Valid publication of the name
Phlyctidia was by Müller (1895),
who provided a
short generic diagnosis
and explicitly included only two species,
the names
of which,
P.
ludoviciensis Müll. Arg. and
P. boliviensis (Nyl.) Müll. Arg.,
were also validly published in
1895.
Note 1.
This Article applies also when specific
and other epithets are published
under words not to be regarded as generic names
(see Art.
20.4).
Ex. 3.
The binary designation
“Anonymos aquatica”
(Walter, Fl. Carol.: 230. 1788)
is not a
validly published name.
The correct name for the species concerned is
Planera aquatica J.
F. Gmel. (1791),
and the date of the name,
for purposes of priority, is 1791.
The name must
not be cited as
“P. aquatica (Walter) J. F. Gmel.”
Ex. 4.
Despite the existence of the generic name
Scirpoides Ség. (1754),
the binary desig-
nation
“S. paradoxus”
(Rottbøll, Descr. Pl. Rar.: 27. 1772)
is not validly published since
77 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 77 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
43-45 | Valid publication |
“Scirpoides” in Rottbøll’s context was a word
not intended as a generic name.
The first
validly published name for this species is
Fuirena umbellata Rottb. (1773).
44.1.
The name of a species or of an infraspecific taxon
published before 1
January 1908
may be validly published even if only accompanied by an
illustration with analysis (as defined in Art.
42.4).
Ex. 1. Panax nossibiensis Drake (1896) was validly published on a plate with analysis.
44.2.
Single figures of non-vascular plants showing details
aiding identi-
fication are considered
as illustrations with analysis (see also Art.
42.4).
Ex. 2.
Eunotia gibbosa Grunow (1881),
a name of a diatom, was validly published by pro-
vision of a figure of a single valve.
45.1.
The date of a name is that of its valid publication.
When the various
conditions for valid publication
are not simultaneously fulfilled, the date is
that on which the last is fulfilled.
However, the name must always be ex-
plicitly accepted in the place of its validation.
A name published on or after
1 January 1973
for which the various conditions for valid publication are
not simultaneously fulfilled is not validly published
unless a full and direct
reference (Art.
33.4)
is given to the places where these requirements
were
previously fulfilled
(but see Art.
33.6).
Ex. 1.
“Clypeola minor” first appeared
in the Linnaean thesis
Flora monspeliensis (1756),
in a list of names preceded by numerals
but without an explanation of the meaning of these
numerals and without any other descriptive matter;
when the thesis was reprinted in vol. 4 of
the
Amoenitates academicae (1759),
a statement was added explaining that the numbers
referred to earlier descriptions published in Magnol’s
Botanicon monspeliense. However,
“Clypeola minor” was absent from the reprint,
being no longer accepted by Linnaeus, and
was not therefore validly published.
Ex. 2.
When proposing
“Graphis meridionalis”
as a new species, Nakanishi
(in J. Sci.
Hiroshima Univ., Ser. B(2), 11: 75. 1966)
provided a Latin description
but failed to desig-
nate a holotype.
Graphis meridionalis M. Nakan.
was validly published
when Nakanishi (in
J. Sci. Hiroshima Univ., Ser. B(2), 11: 265.
1967)
designated the holotype of the name and
provided a full and direct reference to
his
previous publication.
45.2.
A correction of the original spelling of a name
(see Art.
32.7 and
60)
does not affect its date of valid publication.
Ex. 3.
The correction of the erroneous spelling of
Gluta “benghas” (Linnaeus, Mant.
Pl.:
293. 1771) to
G. renghas L.
does not affect the date of publication
of the name even though
the correction dates only from 1883
(Engler in Candolle & Candolle, Monogr. Phan. 4: 225).
78 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 78 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Valid publication | 45 |
45.3.
For purposes of priority only legitimate names
are taken into con-
sideration (see Art.
11,
52-54). However,
validly published earlier homo-
nyms,
whether legitimate or not, shall
cause rejection of their later homo-
nyms, unless the latter are
conserved or sanctioned (but see Art. 15
Note 1).
45.4.
If a taxon
originally assigned to a group not covered by this
Code is
treated as belonging to a group of
plants other than algae
or fungi,
the
authorship and date of any of its names are determined
by the first pub-
lication that satisfies the requirements
for valid publication under this
Code.
If the taxon is treated as
belonging to the algae
or fungi,
any of its
names need satisfy only the requirements
of the pertinent non-botanical
Code for status equivalent
to valid publication under the present
Code (but
see Art.
54,
regarding homonymy).
However,
a name generated in
zoolog-
ical nomenclature
in accordance
with the Principle
of Coordination
is not
considered
validly published
under the botanical
Code unless
it appears in
print
and is applied to
an accepted taxon.
Ex. 4.
Amphiprora Ehrenb. (1843), an available¹ name
for a genus of animals, was
first
treated as belonging to the algae
by Kützing (1844).
Amphiprora has priority in botanical
nomenclature from 1843, not 1844.
Ex. 5.
Petalodinium Cachon & Cachon-Enj.
(in Protistologia 5: 16. 1969)
is available under
the
International code of zoological nomenclature
as the name of a genus of dinoflagellates.
When the taxon is treated as belonging to the algae,
its name retains its original authorship
and date even though the original publication
lacked a Latin description or diagnosis.
Ex. 6.
Labyrinthodyction Valkanov
(in Progr. Protozool. 3: 373. 1969),
available under the
International code of zoological nomenclature
as the name of a genus of rhizopods, is
con-
sidered to have been
validly published
in 1969 if
the taxon is treated as belonging to the
fungi
even though
the original publication lacked a Latin description
or diagnosis.
Ex. 7.
Protodiniferaceae Kof. & Swezy
(in Mem. Univ. Calif. 5: 111. 1921,
“Protodinife-
ridae”),
available under the
International code of zoological nomenclature,
is validly pub-
lished as a name of a family
of algae with its original authorship and date
but with the
original termination
changed in accordance with Art.
18.4 and
32.7.
Ex. 8.
Pneumocystis P. Delanoë & Delanoë
(in Comp. Rend. Acad. Hebd. Séances Acad.
Sci. 155: 660. 1912) was published
for a “protozoan” genus with a description
expressing
doubt as to its generic status,
“Si celui-ci doit constituer un genre nouveau,
nous proposons
de lui donner le nom de
Pneumocystis Carinii”.
Under Art.
34.1(b)
Pneumocystis would not
be validly published, but Art. 11.5.1 of the
International code of zoological nomenclature
allows for such qualified publication
at that time and therefore
Pneumocystis is an available
name under the
ICZN and, as provided by Art.
45.4,
validly published under this
Code.
Ex. 9.
Pneumocystis jirovecii Frenkel
(in Natl. Cancer Inst. Monogr. 43: 16. 1976,
‘jiroveci’),
treated as a protozoan,
was published with only an English description
and without desig-
———————————————————————
¹
The word “available” in the
International code of zoological nomenclature
is equivalent
to “validly published” in the present
Code.
79 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 79 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
45-46 | Valid publication – Author citations |
nation of a type, but these conditions
are no obstacle to availability
under Art. 72.3 and Rec.
13B of the
International code of zoological nomenclature.
Therefore, when considered the
name of a fungus,
P. jirovecii, with modified termination (Art.
60.11),
is accepted as validly
published under Art.
45.4.
Subsequent publication of a Latin diagnosis by Frenkel
(J. Eu-
karyot. Microbiol. 46 Suppl.: 91S. 1999),
who treated the species as a fungus,
was necessary
under the edition of the
ICBN in operation at that time,
but is no longer so; hence, under this
Code, P. jirovecii
has priority from 1976, not 1999.
Ex. 10.
Fibrillanosema crangonycis Galbreath & al.
(in Int. J. Parasitol. 34: 241-242.
2004),
was described as belonging to the
Microsporidia,
which until recently were con-
sidered to constitute a protozoan phylum.
Its name is available under the
International code
of zoological nomenclature
and is considered to be validly published
when treated as a
fungus
although it lacks a Latin description or diagnosis.
45A.1.
A new name should be followed
by a direct citation indicating its novel
status, including the word “novus”
(-a, -um) or its abbreviation, e.g.
genus novum
(gen. nov.),
species nova (sp. nov.),
combinatio nova (comb. nov.),
nomen novum
(nom. nov.), or
status novus (stat. nov.).
45B.1.
Authors should indicate precisely
the dates of publication of their works.
In
a work appearing in parts
the last-published sheet of the volume
should indicate the
precise dates on which
the different fascicles or parts of the volume
were published
as well as the number of pages and plates in each.
45C.1.
On separately printed and issued copies
of works published in a periodical,
the name of the periodical,
the number of its volume or parts,
the original pagina-
tion,
and the date (year, month, and day)
should be indicated.
46.1.
In publications, particularly
those dealing with taxonomy
and no-
menclature,
it may be desirable,
even when no bibliographic reference to
the protologue is made, to cite the author(s)
of the name concerned (see Art.
6
Note
2; see also Art.
22.1 and
26.1).
In so doing, the following rules are to
be followed.
Ex. 1.
Rosaceae
Juss.,
Rosa L.,
Rosa gallica L.,
Rosa gallica var.
eriostyla R. Keller,
Rosa
gallica L. var.
gallica.
80 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 80 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Author citations | 46 |
46.2.
A name of a new taxon must be attributed
to the author or authors to
whom both the name and the validating description
or diagnosis were as-
cribed, even when
authorship of the publication is different.
A new com-
bination or a nomen novum
must be attributed to the author or authors to
whom it was ascribed when,
in the publication in which it appears, it is
explicitly stated that they contributed
in some way to that publication. Art.
46.4
notwithstanding, authorship of a new name
or combination must al-
ways be accepted as ascribed, even when
it differs from authorship of the
publication,
when at least one author is common to both.
Ex. 2.
The name
Viburnum ternatum was published in
Sargent (Trees & Shrubs 2: 37.
1907).
It was ascribed to “Rehd.”,
and the whole account of the species was signed
“Alfred
Rehder” at the end of the article.
The name is therefore cited as
V. ternatum Rehder.
Ex. 3.
In a paper by Hilliard & Burtt (1986)
names of new species of
Schoenoxiphium,
including
S. altum, were ascribed to Kukkonen,
preceded by a statement
“The following
diagnostic descriptions
of new species have been supplied
by Dr. I. Kukkonen in order to
make the names available for use”.
The name is therefore cited as
S. altum Kukkonen.
Ex. 4.
In Torrey & Gray (1838) the names
Calyptridium and
C. monandrum were ascribed
to “Nutt. mss.”,
and the descriptions were enclosed in double quotes
indicating that Nuttall
wrote them,
as acknowledged in the preface.
The names are therefore cited as
Calyptridium
Nutt. and
C. monandrum Nutt.
Ex. 5.
The name
Brachystelma was published by Sims (1822)
along with
one new species
listed as
“Brachystelma tuberosa.
Brown Mscr.”;
in addition,
at the end of the generic de-
scription,
Sims
added
“Brown, Mscr.”,
indicating that Brown wrote it.
Because
the generic
and specific names
were validly published
simultaneously
(Art.
42), the direct
association of
Brown’s name
with the specific name
and the generic
description establishes
the correct
citation of
the
generic
name as
Brachystelma R. Br.
Ex. 6.
When publishing
Eucryphiaceae (1848)
the otherwise unnamed author “W.”,
in a
review of Gay’s
Flora chilena (1845-1854),
wrote “wird die Gattung
Eucryphia als Typus
einer neuen Familie, der
Eucryphiaceae”,
thus ascribing both the name
and its validating
description to
Gay (Fl. Chil. 1: 348. 1846),
who used the name “Eucrifiaceas”,
which was
not validly published under Art.
18.4.
The name is therefore cited as
Eucryphiaceae Gay.
Ex.
7.
Green (1985) ascribed the new combination
Neotysonia phyllostegia to Paul G.
Wilson and elsewhere in the same publication
acknowledged his assistance.
The name is
therefore cited as
N. phyllostegia (F. Muell.) Paul G. Wilson.
Ex.
8.
The authorship of
Steyerbromelia discolor
L. B. Sm. & H. Rob. (1984)
is accepted as
originally ascribed,
although the new species was described
in a paper authored by Smith
alone.
The same applies to the new combination
Sophora tomentosa subsp.
occidentalis (L.)
Brummitt
(in Kirkia 5: 265. 1966), thus ascribed,
published in a paper authored jointly by
Brummitt & Gillett.
Ex.
9.
The appropriate author citation for
Baloghia pininsularis (see Art. 37
Ex.
3) is
Guil-
laumin, and not McPherson & Tirel,
because both the name and validating description
were
ascribed to Guillaumin in the protologue.
81 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 81 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
46 | Author citations |
Note 1.
When authorship of a name differs
from authorship of the publication in
which it was validly published,
both are sometimes cited,
connected by the word
“in”.
In such a case, “in” and what follows are
part of a bibliographic citation
and
are better omitted
unless the place of publication is being cited.
Ex.
10.
The original description of the new species
Verrucaria aethiobola Wahlenb.
(in
Acharius, Methodus, Suppl.: 17. 1803)
is ascribed by Acharius to “Wahlenb. Msc.”,
and the
name itself is ascribed to “Wahlenb.”
(not in the text of the Supplement
but in the index to
the Methodus,
p. 392). The name is therefore appropriately cited as
V. aethiobola Wahlenb.,
better not as
V. aethiobola “Wahlenb. in Acharius”
(unless followed by a bibliographic
citation of the place of publication),
and certainly not as
V. aethiobola “Wahlenb. ex Ach.”
Ex. 11.
The name
Drymaria arenarioides was published in
Roemer & Schultes (Syst. Veg.
5: 406. 1819),
with the name ascribed to “Humb. et Bonpl.”
and the description ascribed to
“Reliqu. Willd. MS.”
Because of this ascription,
and because vol. 5 of this work is authored
by Schultes alone,
the name is to be cited as
D. arenarioides Humb. & Bonpl. ex Schult., not
as
D. arenarioides Willd. or
D. arenarioides Willd. ex Roem. & Schult. or
D. arenarioides
Humb. & Bonpl. ex Willd.
Ex. 12.
When publishing
Strasburgeriaceae (1908) Solereder wrote of
Strasburgeria Baill.
“welche neuerdings von Van Tieghem
als Typus einer eigenen Familie
(Strasburgeriaceae)
angesehen wird”
thus ascribing both the family name
and its validating description to
Tieghem (in J. Bot. (Morot) 17: 204. 1903),
who used the name “Strasburgériacées”,
which
was not validly published under Art.
18.4.
The name is therefore cited as
Strasburgeriaceae
Tiegh., or
Strasburgeriaceae Tiegh. in Solereder
when followed by a bibliographic citation,
but not
Strasburgeriaceae Tiegh. ex Soler.
Ex. 13.
When publishing
Elaeocarpaceae (1816) Candolle wrote
“Elaeocarpeae. Juss.,
Ann. Mus. 11, p. 233”
thus ascribing both the name
and its validating diagnosis to
Jussieu
(in Ann. Mus. Natl. Hist. Nat. 11: 233. 1808),
who provided a diagnosis separating
an un-
amed family comprising
Elaeocarpus L. from
Tiliaceae.
The family name is therefore
cited as
Elaeocarpaceae Juss., or
Elaeocarpaceae Juss. in Candolle
when followed by a bib-
liographic citation, but not
Elaeocarpaceae Juss. ex DC.
46.3.
For the purposes of this Article,
ascription is the direct association
of
the name of a person or persons
with a new name or description or diag-
nosis of a taxon. An author citation
appearing in a list of synonyms does not
constitute ascription,
nor does reference to a basionym
or a replaced syno-
nym
(regardless
of bibliographic
accuracy) or
reference to a homonym,
or a
formal error.
Ex. 14.
The name
Asperococcus pusillus was published in
Hooker (Brit. Fl., ed. 4, 2(1):
277. 1833),
with the name and diagnosis ascribed simultaneously
in a paragraph ending with
“Carm. MSS.”
followed by a description ascribed similarly to Carmichael.
Direct associ-
ation of Carmichael
with both the name and the diagnosis is thus inferred
and the name must
be cited as
A. pusillus Carmich.
However, the paragraph containing the name
A. castaneus
and its diagnosis,
published by Hooker on the same page of the same work,
ends with
“Scytosiphon castaneus, Carm. MSS.”
Because Carmichael is directly associated with
“S.
castaneus” and not
A. castaneus,
the name of this species is correctly cited as
A. castaneus
Hook.
even though the following description
is ascribed to Carmichael.
82 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 82 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Author citations | 46 |
Ex.
15.
Lichen debilis Sm. (1812)
was not ascribed to Turner and Borrer by Smith’s citing
“Calicium debile Turn. and Borr. Mss.” as a synonym.
Ex. 16.
Malpighia emarginata DC. (1824)
was not ascribed to Moçino & Sessé by Can-
dolle’s writing
“M. emarginata (fl. mex. ic. ined.)”. However,
Sicyos triqueter Moç. &
Sessé ex Ser. (1830)
was ascribed to these authors by Seringe’s writing
“S. triqueter (Moç.
& Sessé, fl. mex. mss.)”.
Ex.
17.
When Opiz (1852) wrote
“Hemisphace Bentham”
he did not ascribe the generic
name to Bentham
but provided an indirect reference to the basionym,
Salvia sect.
Hemi-
sphace Benth.
(see Art. 32
Ex.
8).
Ex.
18.
When Brotherus (1907) published
“Dichelodontium nitidulum Hooker & Wilson”
he provided an indirect reference to the basionym,
Leucodon nitidulus Hook. f. & Wilson,
and did not ascribe the new combination to Hooker and Wilson.
He did, however, ascribe to
them
the simultaneously published name of his new genus,
Dichelodontium.
Ex. 19.
When She & Watson
(in Wu & al., Fl. China 14: 72. 2005) wrote
“Bupleurum ham-
iltonii var.
paucefulcrans C. Y. Wu ex R. H. Shan & Yin Li,
Acta Phytotax. Sin. 12: 291.
1974”
they did not ascribe the new combination
to any of those authors but provided a full
and direct reference to the basionym,
B. tenue var.
paucefulcrans C. Y. Wu ex R. H. Shan &
Yin Li.
Ex.
20.
When Sirodot (1872) wrote
“Lemanea Bory”
he in fact published a later homonym
(see Art. 48
Ex. 1).
His reference to Bory’s earlier homonym
is not therefore ascription of
the later homonym,
Lemanea Sirodot, to Bory.
Ex. 21.
When Piper
(in Proc. Biol. Soc. Wash. 28: 42. 1915) wrote
“Andropogon sorghum
drummondii (Nees) Hackel”
for one of eleven “wild subspecies” of
A. sorghum (L.) Brot.,
this was not an ascription to Hackel,
but is treated as a formal error,
since Hackel (in Can-
dolle & Candolle, Monogr. Phan. 6: 507. 1889)
had actually published this as
A. sorghum
var.
drummondii (Nees) Hack.
Furthermore, because the basionym
was published by
Steudel (1854) as
“A. drummondii Nees (mpt. sub Sorghum)”
this reference to the unpub-
lished name
“Sorghum drummondii Nees”
is also not ascription (see Note 2), therefore the
correct author citation for Hackel’s taxon is
A. sorghum var.
drummondii (Steud.) Hack. and
for Piper’s taxon
A. sorghum subsp.
drummondii (Steud.) Piper.
Note 2.
When the epithet of a validly published name
is taken up from and attrib-
uted to the author of a different binary designation
that has not been validly pub-
lished,
only the author of the validly published name
is to be cited.
Ex. 22.
“Catha edulis” was published,
but not validly so,
by Forsskal (Fl. Aegypt.-Arab.:
cvii, 63. 1775).
The epithet was taken up by Vahl (Symb. Bot. 1: 21. 1790),
who validly pub-
lished the name
Celastrus edulis citing
“Catha edulis Forssk.” in synonymy. The name
Celastrus edulis must be attributed to Vahl alone,
not to “Forssk. ex Vahl”. The name
Catha
edulis was first validly published by
Endlicher (Enchir. Bot.: 575. 1841),
whose combi-
nation is to be cited as
Catha edulis (Vahl) Endl.
46.4.
A name of a new taxon must be attributed
to the author or authors of
the publication in which it appears
when only the name but not the valid-
ating description or diagnosis
was ascribed to a different author
or to differ-
ent authors.
A new combination or a nomen novum
must be attributed to
83 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 83 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
46 | Author citations |
the author or authors of the publication
in which it appears, although it was
ascribed to a different author or
to different authors, when no separate state-
ment was made that they contributed
in some way to that publication. How-
ever, in both cases authorship as ascribed,
followed by “ex”, may be inser-
ted before the name(s) of the publishing author(s).
Ex.
23.
Seemann (1865) published
Gossypium tomentosum “Nutt. mss.”,
followed by a
validating description
not ascribed to Nuttall;
the name may be cited as
G. tomentosum Nutt.
ex Seem. or
G. tomentosum Seem.
Ex. 24.
Rudolphi published
Pinaceae (1830) as
“Pineae. Spreng.”,
followed by a validating
diagnosis not ascribed to Sprengel;
the name may be cited as
Pinaceae Spreng. ex F. Rud-
olphi or
Pinaceae F. Rudolphi.
Ex.
25.
The name
Lithocarpus polystachyus
published by Rehder (1919) was based on
Quercus polystachya A. DC. (1864),
ascribed by Candolle to “Wall.! list n. 2789”
but
formerly a nomen nudum;
Rehder’s combination may be cited as
L. polystachyus (Wall. ex
A. DC.) Rehder or
L. polystachyus (A. DC.) Rehder.
Ex.
26.
Lilium tianschanicum
was described by Grubov (1977) as a new species
and its
name was ascribed to Ivanova;
since there is no indication that Ivanova provided
the
validating description,
the name may be cited as
L. tianschanicum N. A. Ivanova ex Grubov
or
L. tianschanicum Grubov.
Ex.
27.
In a paper by Boufford, Tsi and Wang (1990) the name
Rubus fanjingshanensis was
ascribed to Lu with no indication
that Lu provided the description;
the name should be
attributed to Boufford & al. or to
L. T. Lu ex Boufford & al.
Ex.
28.
Green (1985) ascribed the new combination
Tersonia cyathiflora to
“(Fenzl) A.
S. George”;
since Green nowhere mentioned
that George had contributed in any way, the
combining author must be cited as
A. S. George ex J. W. Green or just J. W. Green.
Ex.
29.
However, R. Brown is accepted as the author
of the treatments of genera and species
appearing under his name in Aiton’s
Hortus kewensis, ed. 2 (1810-1813),
even when new
names or the descriptions
validating them are not explicitly ascribed to him.
In a postscript
to that work (5: 532. 1813),
Aiton wrote:
“Much new matter has been added by [Robert
Brown] ...
the greater part of his able improvements
are distinguished by the signature
Brown mss.”
The latter phrase is therefore a statement
of authorship not merely an ascrip-
tion. For example, the combination
Oncidium triquetrum,
based by indirect reference on
Epidendrum triquetrum Sw. (1788),
is to be cited as
O. triquetrum (Sw.) R. Br. (1813) and
not attributed to “R. Br. ex Aiton”,
or to Aiton alone,
because in the generic heading Brown
is credited with authorship of the treatment of
Oncidium.
46.5.
For the purposes of this Article,
the authorship of a publication is the
authorship of that part of a publication
in which a name appears regardless
of
the authorship or editorship
of the publication as a whole.
Ex. 30.
Pittosporum buxifolium
was described as a new species,
with its name ascribed to
Feng, in Wu & Li,
Flora yunnanica, vol. 3 (1983).
The account of
Pittosporaceae in that flora
was authored by Yin, while the whole volume
was edited by Wu & Li.
The author of the pub-
lication
(including the validating diagnosis) was Yin.
The name may therefore be cited as
either
P. buxifolium K. M. Feng ex W. Q. Yin or just
P. buxifolium W. Q. Yin, but not
P. buxi-
folium
K. M. Feng ex C. Y. Wu & H. W. Li, nor
P. buxifolium C. Y. Wu & H. W. Li.
84 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 84 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Author citations | 46 |
Ex. 31.
Vicia amurensis f.
sanneensis was described as a new form,
with its name ascribed
to Jiang & Fu in Ma & al.,
Flora intramongolica, ed. 2, vol. 3 (1989).
The account of
Vicia
in that flora was authored by Jiang,
while the whole volume was jointly edited by Ma & al.
The author of the publication is Jiang,
who is common to the authorship ascribed to the
name, which must therefore be cited as
V. amurensis f.
sanneensis Y. C. Jiang & S. M. Fu
and not
V. amurensis f.
sanneensis Y. C. Jiang & S. M. Fu ex Ma & al.
Ex. 32.
Centaurea funkii var.
xeranthemoides “Lge. ined.” was described in
Prodromus
florae hispanicae (2: 154. 1865).
On the title page of each volume Willkomm & Lange
are
given as authors (“auctoribus ...”).
However, the different family treatments
are by one or
the other and Fam. 63
Compositae has a footnote “Auctore Willkomm”.
The full citation is
therefore
C. funkii var.
xeranthemoides Lange ex Willk.
[in Willkomm & Lange, ...].
46.6.
The citation of an author
who published the name before the starting-
point of the group concerned
may be indicated by the use of the word “ex”.
For groups with a starting-point later than 1753,
when a pre-starting-point
name
was changed in rank or taxonomic position
by the first author who
validly published it,
the name of the pre-starting-point author
may be added
in parentheses,
followed by “ex”.
Ex.
33.
Linnaeus (1754) ascribed the name
Lupinus
to the pre-starting-point author Tourne-
fort; the name may be cited as
Lupinus Tourn. ex L. (1753) or
Lupinus L. (see Art.
13.4).
Ex.
34.
Lyngbya glutinosa C. Agardh (Syst. Alg.: 73. 1824)
was taken up by Gomont in the
publication which marks the starting point of the
“Nostocaceae homocysteae”
(in Ann. Sci.
Nat., Bot., ser. 7, 15: 339. 1892) as
Hydrocoleum glutinosum. This may be cited as
H.
glutinosum (C. Agardh) ex Gomont.
46.7.
In determining the correct author citation,
only internal evidence in
the publication
(as defined in Art.
35.5)
where the name was validly pub-
lished is to be accepted,
including ascription of the name, statements in the
introduction, title, or acknowledgements,
and typographical or stylistic dis-
tinctions in the text.
Ex.
35.
Although the descriptions in Aiton’s
Hortus kewensis (1789) are generally con-
sidered to have been written by Solander or Dryander,
the names of new taxa published there
must be attributed to Aiton,
the stated author of the work,
except where a name and de-
scription were both ascribed in that work
to somebody else.
Ex.
36.
The name
Andreaea angustata was published in a work of
Limpricht (1885) with
the ascription
“nov. sp. Lindb. in litt. ad Breidler 1884”,
but there is no internal evidence that
Lindberg had supplied the validating description.
Authorship is therefore to be cited as
“Limpr.” or “Lindb. ex Limpr.”
Note
3.
External evidence may be used
to determine authorship of new names and
combinations included in a publication
or article for which there is no internal ev-
idence of authorship.
Ex.
37.
No authorship appears anywhere in the work
known as “Cat. Pl. Upper Louisiana.
1813”,
a catalogue of plants available
from the Fraser Brothers Nursery.
Based on external
evidence (cf. Stafleu & Cowan
in Regnum Veg. 105: 785. 1981),
authorship of the docu-
85 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 85 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
46-46A | Author citations |
ment, and of new names such as
Oenothera macrocarpa
that are published in it,
are attrib-
uted to Thomas Nuttall.
Ex.
38.
The book that appeared under the title
Vollständiges systematisches Verzeichniß
aller Gewächse Teutschlandes ... (Leipzig 1782)
bears no explicit authorship
but is attrib-
uted to
“einem Mitgliede der Gesellschaft Naturforschender Freunde”.
External evidence
may be used to determine
that G. A. Honckeny is the author of the work
and of new names
that appear in it (e.g.
Poa vallesiana Honck.,
Phleum hirsutum Honck.; but see Art. 23
Ex.
14),
as done by Pritzel (Thes. Lit. Bot.: 123. 1847).
Note
4.
Authors publishing new names and
wishing to establish that other persons’
names
followed by “ex” may precede theirs in authorship citation
may adopt the
“ex” citation in the protologue.
Ex.
39.
In validating the name
Nothotsuga, Page (1989) cited it as
“Nothotsuga H.-H. Hu ex
C. N. Page”,
noting that in 1951 Hu had published it
as a nomen nudum; the name may be
attributed to Hu ex C. N. Page or just C. N. Page.
Ex.
40.
Atwood (1981) ascribed the name of a new species,
Maxillaria mombachoënsis, to
“Heller ex Atwood”, with a note stating
that it was originally named by Heller,
then
deceased; the name may be attributed to
A. H. Heller ex J. T. Atwood or just J. T. Atwood.
46A.1.
For the purpose of author citation,
prefixes indicating ennoblement (see
Rec.
60C.5(d-e))
should be suppressed unless they
are an inseparable part of the
name.
Ex. 1. Lam. for J. B. P. A. Monet Chevalier de Lamarck, but De Wild. for E. De Wildeman.
46A.2.
When a name in an author citation is abbreviated,
the abbreviation should
be long enough
to be distinctive,
and should normally end with a consonant that, in
the full name, precedes a vowel.
The first letters should be given without any omis-
sion, but one of the last characteristic
consonants of the name may be added when
this is customary.
Ex. 2.
L. for Linnaeus;
Fr. for Fries;
Juss. for Jussieu;
Rich. for Richard;
Bertol. for Bert-
oloni,
to distinguish it from Bertero;
Michx. for Michaux, to distinguish it from Micheli.
46A.3.
Given names or accessory designations serving
to distinguish two botanists
of the same name
should be abridged in the same way.
Ex. 3.
R. Br. for Robert Brown;
A. Juss. for Adrien de Jussieu;
Burm. f. for Burman filius;
J.
F. Gmel. for Johann Friedrich Gmelin,
J. G. Gmel. for Johann Georg Gmelin,
C. C. Gmel.
for Carl Christian Gmelin,
S. G. Gmel. for Samuel Gottlieb Gmelin;
Müll. Arg. for Jean
Müller argoviensis (of Aargau).
46A.4.
When it is a well-established custom
to abridge a name in another manner,
it is advisable to conform to custom.
Ex. 4. DC. for Augustin-Pyramus de Candolle; St.-Hil. for Saint-Hilaire.
Note 1.
Brummitt & Powell’s
Authors of plant names (1992)
provides unam-
biguous standard abbreviations,
in conformity with the present Recommendation,
86 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 86 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Author citations | 46A-47 |
for a large number of authors of plant names,
and these abbreviations, updated as
necessary from the
International Plant
Names Index
(www.ipni.org) and
Index
Fungorum
(www.indexfungorum.org),
have been used for author citations through-
out the present
Code.
46B.1.
In citing the author of the scientific name
of a taxon, the romanization of the
author’s name given in the original publication
should normally be accepted. Where
an author failed to give a romanization,
or where an author has at different times
used different romanizations,
then the romanization known
to be preferred by the
author
or that most frequently adopted by the author
should be accepted. In the ab-
sence of such information
the author’s name should be romanized in accordance
with an internationally available standard.
46B.2.
Authors of scientific names whose personal names
are not written in Roman
letters should romanize their names,
preferably (but not necessarily) in accordance
with an internationally available standard and,
as a matter of typographical con-
venience, without diacritical signs.
Once authors have selected the romanization of
their personal names,
they should use it consistently thereafter.
Whenever possible,
authors should not permit editors or publishers
to change the romanization of their
personal names.
46C.1.
After a name published jointly by two authors,
both authors should be cit-
ed,
linked by the word “et” or by an ampersand (&).
Ex. 1. Didymopanax gleasonii Britton et Wilson (or Britton & Wilson).
46C.2.
After a name published jointly
by more than two authors, the citation
should be restricted to the first author
followed by “et al.” or “& al.”,
except in the
original publication.
Ex. 2.
Lapeirousia erythrantha var.
welwitschii (Baker) Geerinck,
Lisowski, Malaisse &
Symoens
(in Bull. Soc. Roy. Bot. Belgique 105: 336. 1972)
should be cited as
L. erythrantha
var.
welwitschii (Baker) Geerinck & al.
46D.1.
Authors should cite themselves by name
after each new name they publish
rather than refer to themselves by expressions
such as “nobis” (nob.) or “mihi”
(m.).
47.1.
An alteration of the diagnostic characters
or of the circumscription of
a taxon without the exclusion of the type
does not warrant a change of the
author citation of the name of the taxon.
87 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 87 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
47-48 | Author citations |
Ex. 1.
When the original material of
Arabis beckwithii S. Watson (1887)
is attributed to two
different species,
as by Munz (1932),
that species not including
the lectotype must bear a
different name
(A. shockleyi Munz)
but the other one is still named
A. beckwithii S. Watson.
Ex. 2.
Myosotis as revised by Brown differs
from the genus as originally circumscribed by
Linnaeus,
but the generic name remains
Myosotis L. since the type of the name
is still
included in the genus (it may be cited as
Myosotis L. emend. R. Br.: see Rec.
47A).
Ex. 3.
The variously defined species
that includes the types of
Centaurea jacea L. (1753),
C. amara L. (1763)
and a variable number of other species names
is still called
C. jacea L.
(or L. emend. Coss. & Germ.,
L. emend. Vis.,
or L. emend. Godr., as the case may be: see
Rec.
47A).
47A.1.
When an alteration as mentioned in Art. 47
has been considerable,
the
nature of the change may be indicated
by adding such words,
abbreviated where
suitable,
as “emendavit” (emend.)
followed by the name of the author responsible
for the change,
“mutatis characteribus” (mut. char.),
“pro parte” (p. p.),
“excluso
genere” or “exclusis generibus” (excl. gen.),
“exclusa specie” or “exclusis speci-
ebus” (excl. sp.),
“exclusa varietate” or “exclusis varietatibus” (excl. var.),
“sensu
amplo” (s. ampl.),
“sensu lato” (s. l.),
“sensu stricto” (s. str.), etc.
Ex. 1. Phyllanthus L. emend. Müll. Arg.; Globularia cordifolia L. excl. var. (emend. Lam.).
48.1.
When an author adopts an existing name
but definitely excludes its
original type,
a later homonym that must be attributed solely
to that author
is considered
to have been published.
Similarly, when an author who adopts
a name refers to an apparent basionym
but explicitly excludes its type, a
new name is considered to have been published
that must be attributed sole-
ly to that author.
Exclusion can be effected by simultaneous
explicit inclu-
sion of the type
in a different taxon by the same author (see also Art.
59.6).
Ex. 1.
Sirodot (1872) placed the type of
Lemanea Bory (1808) in
Sacheria Sirodot (1872);
hence
Lemanea, as treated by Sirodot (1872),
is to be cited as
Lemanea Sirodot non Bory
and not as
Lemanea Bory emend. Sirodot.
Ex. 2.
The name
Amorphophallus campanulatus Decne. (1834)
was apparently based on
the illegitimate
Arum campanulatum Roxb. (1819).
However, the type of the latter was
explicitly excluded by Decaisne,
and his name is therefore a legitimate name
of a new spe-
cies,
to be attributed solely to him.
Note 1.
Misapplication of a new combination
to a different taxon,
but without ex-
plicit exclusion
of the type of the basionym,
is dealt with under Art.
7.4.
Note 2.
Retention of a name in a sense
that excludes its original type,
or its type
designated under Art.
7-10,
can be effected only by conservation (see Art.
14.9).
88 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 88 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Author citations | 49-50 |
49.1.
When a genus or a taxon of lower rank
is altered in rank but retains
its name or the final epithet in its name,
the author of the earlier, name- or
epithet-bringing legitimate name
(the author of the basionym)
must be cited
in parentheses,
followed by the name of the author
who effected the alter-
ation (the author of the new name).
The same
provision
holds when a taxon
of lower rank than genus
is transferred to another genus or species, with or
without alteration of rank.
Ex. 1.
Medicago polymorpha var.
orbicularis L. (1753)
when raised to the rank of species
becomes
M. orbicularis (L.) Bartal. (1776).
Ex. 2.
Anthyllis sect.
Aspalathoides DC. (Prodr. 2: 169. 1825)
raised to generic rank,
retain-
ing the epithet
Aspalathoides as its name, is cited as
Aspalathoides (DC.) K. Koch (1853).
Ex. 3.
Cineraria sect.
Eriopappus Dumort. (Fl. Belg.: 65. 1827)
when transferred to
Teph-
roseris (Rchb.) Rchb. is cited as
T. sect.
Eriopappus (Dumort.) Holub
(in Folia Geobot.
Phytotax. 8: 173. 1973).
Ex. 4.
Cistus aegyptiacus L. (1753) when transferred to
Helianthemum Mill. is cited as
H.
aegyptiacum (L.) Mill. (1768).
Ex. 5.
Fumaria bulbosa var.
solida L. (1753) was elevated to specific rank as
F. solida (L.)
Mill. (1771).
The name of this species when transferred to
Corydalis DC. is to be cited as
C.
solida (L.) Clairv. (1811), not
C. solida (Mill.) Clairv.
Ex. 6.
However,
Pulsatilla montana var.
serbica W. Zimm.
(in Feddes Repert. Spec. Nov.
Regni Veg. 61: 95. 1958),
originally placed under
P. montana subsp.
australis (Heuff.)
Zämelis,
retains the same author citation when placed under
P. montana subsp.
dacica
Rummelsp. (see Art.
24.1)
and is not cited as var.
serbica “(W. Zimm.) Rummelsp.”
(in
Feddes Repert. 71: 29. 1965).
Ex. 7.
Salix subsect.
Myrtilloides C. K. Schneid.
(Ill. Handb. Laubholzk. 1: 63. 1904),
originally placed under
S. sect.
Argenteae W. D. J. Koch,
retains the same author citation
when placed under
S. sect.
Glaucae Pax and is not cited as
S. subsect.
Myrtilloides “(C.
K. Schneid.) Dorn”
(in Canad. J. Bot. 54: 2777. 1976).
49.2. Parenthetical authors are not to be cited for suprageneric names.
Ex. 8.
Even though
Illiciaceae A. C. Sm. (1947)
was validly published by reference to
Illic-
ieae DC. (1824)
it is not to be cited as
Illiciaceae “(DC.) A. C. Sm.”
Note 1.
Art.
46.6
provides for the use of parenthetical author citations
preceding
the word “ex”, after some names
in groups with a starting point later than 1753.
50.1.
When a taxon at the rank of species or below
is transferred from the
non-hybrid category
to the hybrid category of the same rank (Art.
H.10.2),
or vice versa,
the author citation remains unchanged
but may be followed
by an indication in parentheses
of the original category.
89 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 89 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
50-50D4 | Author citations – Citation |
Ex. 1.
Stachys ambigua Sm. (1809)
was published as the name of a species.
If regarded as
applying to a hybrid,
it may be cited as
Stachys
×ambigua Sm. (pro sp.).
Ex. 2.
The binary name
Salix
×glaucops Andersson (1868)
was published as the name of a
hybrid.
Later, Rydberg
(in Bull. New York Bot. Gard. 1: 270. 1899)
considered the taxon to
be a species.
If this view is accepted,
the name may be cited as
Salix glaucops Andersson
(pro hybr.).
SECTION 4. GENERAL RECOMMENDATIONS ON CITATION
50A.1.
In the citation of a name
that is not
validly published
because
it was
merely cited
as a synonym, the words “as synonym”
or “pro syn.” should be
added.
50B.1.
In the citation of a nomen nudum,
its status should be indicated by adding
the words “nomen nudum” or “nom. nud.”
Ex. 1.
“Carex bebbii”
(Olney, Car. Bor.-Am. 2: 12. 1871),
published without a description
or diagnosis,
should be cited as
Carex bebbii Olney, nomen nudum (or nom. nud.).
50C.1.
The citation of a later homonym
should be followed by the name of the
author
of the earlier homonym preceded by the word “non”,
preferably with the
date of publication added.
In some instances it will be advisable
to cite also any
other homonyms,
preceded by the word “nec”.
Ex. 1. Ulmus racemosa Thomas in Amer. J. Sci. Arts 19: 170. 1831, non Borkh. 1800.
Ex. 2. Lindera Thunb., Nov. Gen. Pl.: 64. 1783, non Adans. 1763.
Ex. 3.
Bartlingia
Brongn.
in Ann. Sci. Nat. (Paris) 10: 373. 1827,
non Rchb. 1824 nec F.
Muell. 1882.
50D.1.
Misidentifications should not be included
in synonymies but added after
them.
A misapplied name should be indicated
by the words “auct. non” followed
by the name of the original author and
the bibliographic reference of the misiden-
tification.
Ex. 1.
Ficus stortophylla Warb.
in Ann. Mus. Congo Belge, Bot., ser. 4, 1: 32. 1904.
F.
irumuënsis De Wild., Pl. Bequaert. 1: 341. 1922.
“F. exasperata” auct. non Vahl:
De Wilde-
man & Durand
in Ann. Mus. Congo Belge, Bot., ser. 2, 1: 54. 1899;
De Wildeman, Miss.
Em. Laurent: 26. 1905;
Durand & Durand, Syll. Fl. Congol.: 505. 1909.
90 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 90 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Citation | 50E-50F |
50E.1.
If a name of a family, genus, or species
is accepted as a nomen conserv-
andum (see Art.
14 and
App. II-IV)
the abbreviation “nom. cons.”
or, in the case of
a conserved spelling,
“orth. cons.”
should be added in a
formal citation.
Ex. 1. Protea L., Mant. Pl.: 187. 1771, nom. cons., non L. 1753.
Ex. 2. Combretum Loefl. 1758, nom. cons. [= Grislea L. 1753].
Ex. 3. Glechoma L. 1753, orth. cons., ‘Glecoma’.
50E.2.
If a name has been rejected
and has been placed on the list of nomina utique
rejicienda (see Art.
56 and
App. V)
the abbreviation “nom. rej.”
should be added in
a formal citation.
Ex. 4. Betula alba L. 1753, nom. rej.
Note 1.
Rec. 50E.2 also applies to any combination
based on a nomen utique rejic-
iendum (see Art.
56.1).
Ex. 5. Dryobalanops sumatrensis (J. F. Gmel.) Kosterm. in Blumea 33: 346. 1988, nom. rej.
50E.3.
If a name has been adopted by Fries or Persoon,
and thereby sanctioned
(see Art.
13.1(d) and
7.8),
“: Fr.” or “: Pers.” should be added in a
formal
citation.
The same convention should be used
for the basionym of the sanctioned name,
if it
has one,
and for all combinations based on
either the sanctioned name
or its bas-
ionym.
Ex. 6.
Boletus piperatus Bull.
(Herb. France: t. 451, f. 2. 1790)
was accepted in Fries
(Syst.
Mycol. 1: 388. 1821)
and was thereby sanctioned.
It should thus be cited as
B. piperatus
Bull. : Fr.,
and a subsequent combination based on it, as
Chalciporus piperatus (Bull. : Fr.)
Bataille.
Ex.
7.
Agaricus sarcocephalus Fr. 1815 : Fr.
was sanctioned as
Agaricus compactus [un-
ranked]
sarcocephalus (Fr. : Fr.) Fr. 1821;
Psathyrella sarcocephala (Fr. : Fr.) Singer
is a
subsequent combination based on it.
50F.1.
If a name is cited with alterations
from the form as originally published, it
is desirable that in full citations
the exact original form should be added,
preferably
between single
or double quotation marks.
Ex. 1.
Pyrus calleryana Decne.
(P. mairei H. Lév.
in Repert. Spec. Nov. Regni Veg. 12:
189. 1913,
‘Pirus’).
Ex. 2.
Zanthoxylum cribrosum Spreng.,
Syst. Veg. 1: 946. 1825,
“Xanthoxylon”.
(Z.
cari-
baeum var.
floridanum (Nutt.) A. Gray
in Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts 23: 225. 1888,
“Xantho-
xylum”).
Ex. 3.
Spathiphyllum solomonense Nicolson
in Amer. J. Bot. 54: 496. 1967,
‘solomon-
ensis’.
91 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 91 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
51-52 | Maintenance – Illegitimacy (Superfluity) |
51.1.
A legitimate name must not be rejected
merely because it, or its epi-
thet,
is inappropriate or disagreeable,
or because another is preferable or
better known (but see Art.
56.1),
or because it has lost its original meaning,
or (in pleomorphic fungi with names governed by Art.
59) because
the
morph represented by its type
is
not
in
accordance with that
of the type
of
the generic name.
Ex. 1.
The following changes are contrary to the rule:
Staphylea to
Staphylis, Tamus to
Thamnos, Thamnus, or
Tamnus, Mentha to
Minthe, Tillaea to
Tillia, Vincetoxicum to
Al-
exitoxicum; and
Orobanche rapum to
O. sarothamnophyta, O. columbariae to
O. colum-
barihaerens, O. artemisiae to
O. artemisiepiphyta.
Ex. 2.
Ardisia quinquegona Blume (1825)
is not to be changed to
A. pentagona A. DC.
(1834),
although the specific epithet
quinquegona is a hybrid word (Latin and Greek)
(con-
trary to Rec.
23A.3(c)).
Ex. 3.
The name
Scilla peruviana L. (1753)
is not to be rejected merely
because the species
does not grow in Peru.
Ex. 4.
The name
Petrosimonia oppositifolia (Pall.) Litv. (1911),
based on
Polycnemum
oppositifolium Pall. (1771),
is not to be rejected merely because
the species has leaves only
partly opposite, and partly alternate,
although there is another closely related species,
Pet-
rosimonia brachiata (Pall.) Bunge,
having all its leaves opposite.
Ex. 5.
Richardia L. (1753) is not to be changed to
Richardsonia, as was done by Kunth
(1818),
although the name was originally dedicated
to the British botanist, Richardson.
Ex. 6.
The name
Sphaeria tiliae Pers.
(Syn. Meth. Fung.: 84. 1801)
is not to be rejected
because the holotype represents
an anamorphic fungus,
whereas the type of
Sphaeria Haller
1768, that of
S. fragiformis Pers.,
is a teleomorphic fungus.
The epithet may therefore be
used in the combination
Rabenhorstia tiliae (Pers.) Fr.
(Summ. Veg. Scand.: 410. 1849)
for
the anamorph of
Hercospora tiliae Tul. & C. Tul.
(Sel. Fung. Carp. 2: 154. 1863).
52.1.
A name, unless conserved (Art.
14)
or sanctioned (Art.
15),
is ille-
gitimate and is to be rejected
if it was nomenclaturally superfluous when
published, i.e. if the taxon to which it was applied,
as circumscribed by its
author,
definitely included the type
(as qualified in Art. 52.2) of a name
92 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 92 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Illegitimacy (Superfluity) | 52 |
which ought to have been adopted,
or of which the epithet ought to have
been adopted, under the rules
(but see Art. 52.3).
52.2.
For the purpose of Art. 52.1,
definite inclusion of the type of a name
is effected by citation
(a) of the holotype under Art.
9.1
or the original type
under Art.
10
or all syntypes under Art.
9.4
or all elements eligible as types
under Art.
10.2; or
(b) of the previously designated type under Art.
9.9-11
or
10.2; or
(c) of the previously conserved type under Art.
14.9; or
(d) of the
illustrations of these.
It is also effected
(e) by citation of the name itself
or
any name homotypic
at that time,
unless the type is at the same time ex-
cluded either explicitly or by implication.
Ex. 1.
The generic name
Cainito Adans. (1763) is illegitimate
because it was a superfluous
name for
Chrysophyllum L. (1753),
which Adanson cited as a synonym.
Ex. 2.
Chrysophyllum sericeum Salisb. (1796)
is illegitimate, being a superfluous name for
C. cainito L. (1753),
which Salisbury cited as a synonym.
Ex. 3.
On the other hand,
Salix myrsinifolia Salisb. (1796)
is legitimate,
being explicitly
based upon
S. myrsinites of Hoffmann
(Hist. Salic. Ill.: 71. 1787),
a misapplication of the
name
S. myrsinites L. (1753), which Salisbury
excluded by implication
as he did not cite
Linnaeus as he did
under each of the
other 14 species of
Salix
in his 1796
publication.
Ex. 4.
Picea excelsa Link (1841)
is illegitimate because it is based on
Pinus excelsa Lam.
(1778),
a superfluous name for
Pinus abies L. (1753). Under
Picea the correct name is
Picea
abies (L.) H. Karst. (1881).
Ex. 5.
On the other hand,
Cucubalus latifolius Mill. and
C. angustifolius Mill.
are not
illegitimate names,
although Miller’s species are now united
with the species previously
named
C. behen L. (1753):
C. latifolius and
C. angustifolius
as circumscribed by Miller
(1768)
did not include the type of
C. behen L.,
which name he adopted for another species.
Ex. 6.
Explicit exclusion of type:
When publishing the name
Galium tricornutum, Dandy
(in Watsonia 4: 47. 1957) cited
G. tricorne Stokes (1787) pro parte
as a synonym, but ex-
plicitly excluded the type of the latter name.
Ex. 7.
Exclusion of type by implication:
Tmesipteris elongata P. A. Dang.
(in Botaniste 2:
213. 1891)
was published as a new species but
Psilotum truncatum R. Br.
was cited as a
synonym.
However, on the following page,
T. truncata (R. Br.) Desv.
is recognized as a
different species
and two pages later both are distinguished
in a key, thus showing that the
meaning of the cited synonym was either
“P. truncatum R. Br. pro parte” or
“P. truncatum
auct. non R. Br.”
Ex. 8.
Exclusion of type by implication:
Solanum torvum Sw. (Prodr.: 47. 1788)
was pub-
lished with a new diagnosis but
S. indicum L. (1753)
was cited as a synonym. In accordance
with the practice in his
Prodromus,
Swartz indicated where the species
was to be inserted in
the latest edition
[ed. 14, by Murray] of Linnaeus’s
Systema vegetabilium.
Solanum torvum
was to be inserted between species 26
(S. insanum) and 27
(S. ferox), the number of
S.
indicum being 32.
S. torvum is thus a legitimate name.
Ex. 9.
Under
Persicaria maculosa Gray (1821), the name
Polygonum persicaria L. (1753)
was cited
as the replaced synonym, and hence the type of
Polygonum persicaria was
93 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 93 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
52 | Illegitimacy (Superfluity) |
definitely included. However,
Persicaria mitis Delarbre (1806),
as the earlier legitimate re-
placement name for
Polygonum persicaria,
is necessarily homotypic; hence,
Persicaria
maculosa when published
was an illegitimate superfluous name for
Persicaria mitis
and its
continued use
has been made possible only by conservation.
Ex. 10.
Under
Bauhinia semla Wunderlin (1976),
the name
B. retusa Roxb. (1832), non
Poir. (1811),
was cited as the replaced synonym while
B. emarginata Roxb. ex G. Don
(1832),
non Mill. (1768) nec Jack (1822),
was also cited in synonymy,
and hence the types
of the two synonyms
were definitely included. However,
B. roxburghiana Voigt (1845),
which was published as a replacement name for
B. emarginata, is necessarily homotypic
with it and should have been adopted by Wunderlin.
Therefore,
B. semla is an illegitimate
superfluous name typified by the type
of its replaced synonym,
B. retusa
(see Art. 7
Ex. 4).
Ex. 11.
Erythroxylum suave O. E. Schulz (1907)
is illegitimate because Schulz cited
“Er-
ythroxylum brevipes DC. var.
spinescens (A. Rich.) Griseb.” (1866)
in synonymy. This cita-
tion constitutes inclusion of the type of
E. spinescens A. Rich. (1841).
Note 1.
The inclusion, with an expression of doubt,
of an element in a new taxon,
e.g. the citation of a name with a question mark,
does not make the name of the new
taxon nomenclaturally superfluous.
Ex.
12.
The protologue of
Blandfordia grandiflora R. Br. (1810)
includes, in synonymy,
“
Aletris punicea.
Labill.
nov. holl. 1.
p. 85.
t. 111 ?”,
indicating that the new species might
be the same as
Aletris punicea Labill. (1805).
Blandfordia grandiflora
is nevertheless a
legitimate name.
Note 2.
The inclusion, in a new taxon,
of an element that was subsequently
designated as the type of a name which,
so typified, ought to have been adopted, or
of which the epithet ought to have been adopted,
does not in itself make the name
of the new taxon illegitimate.
Ex.
13.
Leccinum Gray (1821)
does not include all potential types
(in fact, none) of
Boletus
L. (1753)
and thus is not illegitimate,
even though it included, as
L. edule (Bull. : Fr.) Gray,
the subsequently conserved type of
Boletus, B. edulis Bull. : Fr.
52.3.
A name that was nomenclaturally superfluous
when published is not
illegitimate
on account
of its superfluity
if it is based
on a name-bringing
or
epithet-bringing
synonym (basionym),
or if it is based on the stem of a le-
gitimate generic name.
When published it is incorrect,
but it may become
correct later.
Ex.
14.
Chloris radiata (L.) Sw. (1788)
was nomenclaturally superfluous when published,
since Swartz cited
Andropogon fasciculatus L. (1753)
as a synonym.
However,
it is
not il-
legitimate
since it was
based on
the legitimate
Agrostis
radiata
L. (1759).
Chloris
radiata
is
the correct name in the genus
Chloris for
Agrostis radiata when
Andropogon fasciculatus
is
treated as a different species,
as was done by Hackel
(in Candolle & Candolle, Monogr.
Phan. 6: 177. 1889).
Ex.
15.
The generic name
Hordelymus (Jess.)
Harz (1885) was
nomenclaturally
superfluous
when published because its type,
Elymus europaeus L., is also the type of
Cuviera Koeler
(1802).
However,
it is not
illegitimate
since it was
based on the
legitimate
Hordeum
[un-
94 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 94 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Illegitimacy (Superfluity – Homonymy) | 52-53 |
ranked]
Hordelymus
Jess.
(Deutschl. Gräser:
202. 1863).
Cuviera Koeler has since been
rejected in favour of its later homonym
Cuviera DC., and
Hordelymus can now be used as
the correct name for a segregate genus containing
Elymus europaeus L.
Ex. 16.
Carpinaceae Vest
(Anleit. Stud. Bot.: 265, 280. 1818)
was nomenclaturally super-
fluous
when published because of the inclusion of
Salix L., the type of
Salicaceae Mirb.
(1815).
However, it is not illegitimate
because it is based on the stem
of a legitimate generic
name,
Carpinus L.
Note 3.
In no case does a statement of parentage
accompanying the publication of
a name for a hybrid make the name illegitimate
(see Art.
H.5).
Ex.
17.
The name
Polypodium ×shivasiae Rothm. (1962)
was proposed for hybrids between
P. australe Fée and
P. vulgare subsp.
prionodes (Asch.) Rothm.,
while at the same time the
author accepted
P.
×font-queri Rothm. (1936) for hybrids between
P. australe and
P. vul-
gare L. subsp.
vulgare. Under Art.
H.4.1,
P.
×shivasiae is a synonym of
P.
×font-queri;
nevertheless,
it is not an illegitimate name.
53.1.
A name of a family, genus or species,
unless conserved (Art.
14)
or
sanctioned (Art.
15),
is illegitimate if it is a later homonym,
that is, if it is
spelled exactly
like a name based on a different type
that was previously
and validly published
for a taxon of the same rank (see also Art. 6
Note
2,
and Art. 53.2
and 53.4).
Ex. 1.
The name
Tapeinanthus Boiss. ex Benth. (1848),
given to a genus of
Labiatae, is a
later homonym of
Tapeinanthus Herb. (1837),
a name previously
and validly published for a
genus of
Amaryllidaceae.
Tapeinanthus Boiss. ex Benth.
is therefore unavailable for use. It
was renamed
Thuspeinanta T. Durand (1888).
Ex. 2.
The name
Torreya Arn. (1838)
is a nomen conservandum and
is therefore available
for use in spite of
the existence of the earlier homonym
Torreya Raf. (1818).
Ex. 3.
Astragalus rhizanthus Boiss. (1843)
is a later homonym of the validly published
name
A.
rhizanthus Royle (1835)
and is therefore unavailable for use.
Boissier renamed it
A.
cariensis Boiss. (1849).
Note 1.
A later homonym is unavailable for use
even if the earlier homonym is il-
legitimate or is otherwise generally treated
as a synonym.
Ex. 4.
Zingiber truncatum S. Q. Tong (1987)
is illegitimate, being a later homonym of
Z.
truncatum Stokes (1812),
even though the latter name
is itself illegitimate under Art.
52.1
because in its protologue the name
Amomum zedoaria Christm. (1779)
was cited in syno-
nymy.
It was renamed
Z. neotruncatum
T. L. Wu & al.
(2000).
Ex. 5.
The name Amblyanthera Müll. Arg. (1860)
is a later homonym of the validly pub-
lished
Amblyanthera Blume (1849) and is therefore
unavailable for use, although
Ambly-
anthera Blume
is now considered to be a synonym of
Osbeckia L. (1753).
53.2.
A sanctioned name is illegitimate
if it is a later homonym of another
sanctioned name
(see also Art. 15
Note 1).
95 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 95 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
53 | Illegitimacy (Homonymy) |
53.3.
When two or more generic or specific names
based on different types
are so similar
that they are likely to be confused
(because they are applied
to related taxa
or for any other reason)
they are to be treated as homonyms
(see also Art.
61.5).
If established practice
has been to treat
two similar
names as homonyms,
this practice
is to be continued
if it is in
the interests
of nomenclatural
stability.
*Ex. 6.
Names treated as homonyms:
Asterostemma Decne. (1838) and
Astrostemma Benth.
(1880);
Pleuropetalum Hook. f. (1846) and
Pleuripetalum T. Durand (1888);
Eschweilera
DC. (1828) and
Eschweileria Boerl. (1887);
Skytanthus Meyen (1834) and
Scytanthus Hook.
(1844).
*Ex. 7.
The three generic names
Bradlea Adans. (1763),
Bradleja Banks ex Gaertn. (1790),
and
Braddleya Vell. (1827),
all commemorating Richard Bradley,
are treated as homonyms
because only one can be used
without serious risk of confusion.
*Ex. 8.
The names
Acanthoica Lohmann (1902) and
Acanthoeca W. N. Ellis (1930), both
designating flagellates,
are sufficiently alike to be considered homonyms
(Taxon 22: 313.
1973).
*Ex. 9.
Epithets so similar that they are likely
to be confused if combined under the same
generic or specific name:
chinensis and
sinensis;
ceylanica and
zeylanica; napaulensis, ne-
palensis, and
nipalensis; polyanthemos and
polyanthemus; macrostachys and
macrostach-
yus; heteropus and
heteropodus; poikilantha and
poikilanthes; pteroides and
pteroideus;
trinervis and
trinervius; macrocarpon and
macrocarpum; trachycaulum and
trachycaulon.
*Ex. 10.
Names not likely to be confused:
Rubia L. (1753) and
Rubus L. (1753);
Mono-
chaetum (DC.) Naudin (1845) and
Monochaete Döll (1875);
Peponia Grev. (1863) and
Pe-
ponium Engl. (1897);
Iris L. (1753) and
Iria (Pers.) Hedw. (1806);
Desmostachys Miers
(1852) and
Desmostachya (Stapf) Stapf (1898);
Symphyostemon Miers (1841) and
Sym-
phostemon Hiern (1900);
Gerrardina Oliv. (1870) and
Gerardiina Engl. (1897);
Urvillea
Kunth (1821) and
Durvillaea Bory (1826);
Peltophorus Desv. (1810;
Gramineae) and
Peltophorum (Vogel) Benth. (1840;
Leguminosae);
Senecio napaeifolius (DC.) Sch. Bip.
(1845,
“napeaefolius”; see Art. 60
Ex.
18) and
S. napifolius MacOwan (1890;
the epithets
being derived,
respectively, from
Napaea and
Brassica napus);
Lysimachia hemsleyana
Oliv. (1891) and
L. hemsleyi Franch. (1895)
(see, however, Rec.
23A.2);
Euphorbia peplis
L. (1753) and
E. peplus L. (1753).
Ex. 11.
Names conserved against earlier names
treated as homonyms (see
App. III):
Lyng-
bya Gomont (vs.
Lyngbyea Sommerf.);
Columellia Ruiz & Pav. (vs.
Columella Lour.), both
commemorating Columella,
the Roman writer on agriculture;
Cephalotus Labill. (vs.
Cepha-
lotos Adans.);
Simarouba Aubl. (vs.
Simaruba Boehm.).
Ex. 12.
The name
Gilmania Coville (1936)
was published as a substitute name for
Phyl-
logonum Coville (1893)
because the author considered the latter to be a later homonym of
Phyllogonium Bridel (1827).
Treating them as homonyms has become accepted, e.g. in
In-
dex Nominum Genericorum, and the name
Gilmania has been accepted as legitimate ever
since. Therefore the names
Phyllogonum and
Phyllogonium are to continue
to be treated as
homonyms.
53.4.
The names of two subdivisions of the same genus,
or of two infra-
specific taxa
within the same species,
even if they are of different rank,
are
96 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 96 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Illegitimacy (Homonymy) | 53 |
treated as homonyms,
the later of which is illegitimate,
if they have the same
or a confusingly similar
final epithet and are not based on the same type.
Ex.
13.
The names
Andropogon sorghum subsp.
halepensis (L.) Hack. and
A. sorghum var.
halepensis (L.) Hack.
(in Candolle & Candolle, Monogr. Phan.
6: 502. 1889) are legitimate,
since both have the same type; repetition
of the
final epithet
is in accord
with Rec.
26A.1.
Ex.
14.
Anagallis arvensis var.
caerulea (L.) Gouan (Fl. Monsp.: 30. 1765), based on
A.
caerulea L. (1759),
makes illegitimate the name
A. arvensis subsp.
caerulea Hartm. (Sv.
Norsk Exc.-Fl.: 32. 1846),
based on the later homonym
A. caerulea Schreb. (1771).
Ex.
15.
Scenedesmus armatus var.
brevicaudatus (Hortob.) Pankow
(in Arch. Protistenk.
132: 153. 1986), based on
S. carinatus var.
brevicaudatus Hortob.
(in Acta Bot. Acad. Sci.
Hung. 26: 318. 1981),
is a later homonym of
S. armatus f.
brevicaudatus L. S. Péterfi
(in
Stud. Cercet. Biol. (Bucharest),
Ser. Biol. Veg. 15: 25. 1963)
even though the two names
apply to taxa of different infraspecific rank.
Scenedesmus armatus var.
brevicaudatus (L. S.
Péterfi) E. H. Hegew.
(in Arch. Hydrobiol. Suppl. 60: 393. 1982),
however, is not a later
homonym since it is based on the same type as
S. armatus f.
brevicaudatus L. S. Péterfi.
Note 2.
The same final epithet may be used
in the names of subdivisions of dif-
ferent genera, and of infraspecific taxa
within different species.
Ex.
18.
Verbascum sect.
Aulacosperma Murb.
(Monogr. Verbascum: 34, 593. 1933) is per-
missible, although there is an earlier
Celsia sect.
Aulacospermae Murb.
(Monogr. Celsia: 34,
56. 1926).
This, however, is not an example to be followed,
since it is contrary to Rec.
21B.2.
53.5.
When it is doubtful whether names
or their epithets are sufficiently
alike to be confused,
a request for a decision may be submitted
to the
General Committee (see
Div. III),
which will refer it for examination to the
committee(s) for the appropriate taxonomic group(s).
A recommendation,
whether or not
to treat the names
concerned as
homonyms,
may then be put
forward to
an International Botanical Congress,
and, if ratified, will be-
come a binding decision.
Ex.
17.
Names ruled as likely to be confused,
and therefore to be treated as homonyms:
Ficus gomelleira Kunth (1847) and
F. gameleira Standl. (1937)
(Taxon 42: 111. 1993);
Solanum saltiense S. Moore (1895) and
S. saltense (Bitter) C. V. Morton (1944)
(Taxon 42:
434. 1993);
Balardia Cambess. (1829;
Caryophyllaceae) and
Ballardia Montrouz. (1860;
Myrtaceae)
(Taxon 42: 434. 1993).
Ex.
18.
Names ruled as not likely to be confused:
Cathayeia Ohwi (1931; extant
Flacourt-
iaceae) and
Cathaya Chun & Kuang (1962; fossil
Pinaceae) (Taxon 36: 429. 1987);
Cristella Pat. (1887;
Fungi) and
Christella H. Lév. (1915;
Pteridophyta) (Taxon 35: 551.
1986);
Coluria R. Br. (1823;
Rosaceae) and
Colura (Dumort.) Dumort. (1835;
Hepaticae)
(Taxon 42: 433. 1993);
Acanthococcus Hook. f. & Harv. (1845;
Rhodophyta) and
Acan-
thococos Barb. Rodr. (1900;
Palmae) (Taxon 42: 433. 1993);
Rauia Nees & Mart. (1823;
Rutaceae) and
Rauhia Traub (1957;
Amaryllidaceae) (Taxon 42: 433. 1993).
53.6.
When two or more homonyms have equal priority,
the first of them
that is adopted
in an effectively published text (Art.
29-31)
by an author
who simultaneously rejects the other(s)
is treated as having priority. Like-
wise, if an author in an effectively published text
substitutes other names
97 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 97 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
53-55 | Illegitimacy (Homonymy – Limitation) |
for all but one of these homonyms,
the homonym for the taxon that is not
renamed is treated as having priority.
Ex.
19.
Linnaeus simultaneously published “10.”
Mimosa cinerea (Sp. Pl.: 517. 1753) and
“25.”
M. cinerea (Sp. Pl.: 520. 1753).
In 1759, he renamed species 10
M. cineraria L. and
retained the name
M. cinerea for species 25, so that the latter
is treated as having priority
over its homonym.
Ex.
20.
Rouy & Foucaud (Fl. France 2: 30. 1895)
published the name
Erysimum hieracii-
folium var.
longisiliquum, with two different types,
for two different taxa under different
subspecies.
Only one of these names can be maintained.
Note 3.
A homonym renamed or rejected under Art. 53.6
remains legitimate and
takes precedence
over a later synonym of the same rank,
should a transfer to an-
other genus or species be effected.
Ex.
21.
Mimosa cineraria L. (1759), based on
M. cinerea L. (Sp. Pl.: 517 [non 520]. 1753;
see Art. 53 Ex. 19), was transferred to
Prosopis by Druce (1914) as
P. cineraria (L.) Druce.
However, the correct name in
Prosopis
would have
been
a combination based on
M. cinerea
had not that name
been succesfully
proposed for
rejection.
54.1.
Consideration of homonymy does not extend
to the names of taxa not
treated as plants,
except as stated below:
(a)
Later homonyms of the names of taxa
once treated as plants are ille-
gitimate,
even though the taxa have been reassigned
to a different group
of organisms to which this
Code does not apply.
(b)
A name originally published for a taxon
other than a plant, even if val-
idly published under Art.
32-45
of this
Code,
is illegitimate if it be-
comes a homonym of a plant name when the taxon
to which it applies is
first treated as a plant (see also Art.
45.4).
Note 1.
The
International code of nomenclature of bacteria
provides that a bac-
terial name is illegitimate
if it is a later homonym
of a name of a taxon of bacteria,
fungi, algae, protozoa, or viruses.
54A.1.
Authors naming new taxa
under this
Code should,
as far as is practicable,
avoid using such names as already exist
for zoological and bacteriological taxa.
55.1.
A name of a species or subdivision of a genus
may be legitimate even
if its epithet
was originally placed under an illegitimate generic name
(see
also Art.
22.5).
98 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 98 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Illegitimacy (Limitation) – Rejection | 55-57 |
Ex. 1.
Agathophyllum Juss. (1789)
is an illegitimate name,
being a superfluous substitute
for
Ravensara Sonn. (1782).
Nevertheless the name
A. neesianum Blume (1851)
is legiti-
mate.
Because Meisner (1864) cited
A. neesianum as a synonym of his new
Mespilodaphne
mauritiana
but did not adopt the epithet
neesiana, M. mauritiana Meisn.
is a superfluous
name and hence illegitimate.
55.2.
An infraspecific name may be legitimate
even if its final epithet was
originally placed
under an illegitimate specific name (see also Art.
27.2).
Ex. 2.
Agropyron japonicum var.
hackelianum Honda
(in Bot. Mag. (Tokyo) 41: 385. 1927)
is legitimate,
even though it was published under the illegitimate
A. japonicum Honda
(1927),
a later homonym of
A. japonicum (Miq.) P. Candargy (1901)
(see also Art. 27
Ex. 1).
55.3.
The names of species and of subdivisions
of genera assigned to
genera
the names of which are conserved
or sanctioned later homonyms,
and which had earlier been assigned
to the genera under the rejected
homonyms,
are legitimate under the conserved or sanctioned names
without
change of authorship or date
if there is no other obstacle under the rules.
Ex.
3.
Alpinia languas J. F. Gmel. (1791) and
Alpinia galanga (L.) Willd. (1797)
are to be
accepted although
Alpinia L. (1753),
to which they were assigned
by their authors,
is re-
jected and the genus
in which they are now placed is named
Alpinia Roxb. (1810), nom.
cons.
56.1.
Any name that would cause
a disadvantageous nomenclatural change
(Art.
14.1)
may be proposed for rejection.
A name thus rejected,
or its
basionym if it has one,
is placed on a list of nomina utique rejicienda
(App.
V).
Along with the listed names,
all combinations based on them
are simi-
larly rejected,
and none is to be used
(see Rec.
50E.2).
56.2.
The list of rejected names
will remain permanently open for addi-
tions and changes.
Any proposal for rejection
of a name must be accom-
panied by a detailed statement of the cases
both for and against its rejection,
including considerations of typification.
Such proposals must be submitted
to the General Committee (see
Div. III),
which will refer them for examin-
ation to the committees for the various
taxonomic groups (see also Art.
14.14 and Rec.
14A).
57.1.
A name that has been widely
and persistently used for a taxon or taxa
not including its type is not to be used
in a sense that conflicts with current
usage unless and until a proposal
to deal with it under Art.
14.1 or
56.1
has
been submitted and rejected.
99 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 99 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
57-58 | Rejection – Re-use |
Ex. 1.
The name
Strophostyles helvola (L.) Elliott
was widely and persistently used from
the mid-19th century for a taxon
that Verdcourt (in Taxon 46: 357-359. 1997)
reported did
not include its type,
which he found to be referable to
Macroptilium lathyroides (L.) Urb.,
based on
Phaseolus lathyroides L. (1763)
and over which
P. helvolus, the basionym of
S.
helvola, has priority.
Verdcourt did not transfer the epithet
helvolus to
Macroptilium which
would have conflicted with current usage, but proposed
P. helvolus for conservation with a
conserved type that he believed referred
to the species to which the name
S. helvola had been
applied; the proposal was accepted.
When Delgado-Salinas & Lavin
(in Taxon 53: 839-841.
2004)
later discovered that this first-conserved type
applies to another species,
Strophostyles
umbellata (Muhl. ex Willd.) Britton,
they also preserved current usage and proposed a new
conserved type.
58.1.
The epithet in an illegitimate name
if available may be used in a dif-
ferent combination, at the same or a different rank,
if no other epithet is
available from a name
that has priority at that rank.
The resulting name is
then treated as new,
either as a nomen novum with the same type as the
illegitimate name (see also Art.
7.5
and Art. 33
Note 2),
or as the name of a
new taxon
with a different type.
Its priority does not date back to the pub-
lication of the illegitimate name.
Ex. 1.
The name
Talinum polyandrum Hook. (1855)
is illegitimate, being a later homonym
of
T. polyandrum Ruiz & Pav. (1798).
When Bentham, in 1863, transferred
T. polyandrum
Hook. to
Calandrinia, he called it
C. polyandra.
This name has priority from 1863,
and is
cited as
C. polyandra Benth., not
C. polyandra (Hook.) Benth.
Ex. 2.
Hibiscus ricinifolius E. Mey. ex Harv. (1860)
is illegitimate because
H. ricinoides
Garcke (1849)
was cited in synonymy.
When the epithet
ricinifolius was combined at var-
ietal rank under
H. vitifolius by Hochreutiner
(in Annuaire Conserv. Jard. Bot. Genève 4:
170. 1900) his name was legitimate
and is treated as a nomen novum,
typified by the type of
H. ricinoides, that is to be cited as
H. vitifolius var.
ricinifolius Hochr., not “(E. Mey. ex
Harv.) Hochr.”
Ex.
3.
When publishing
Collema tremelloides var.
cyanescens, Acharius
(Syn. Meth. Lich.:
326. 1814) cited
in synonymy
C. tremelloides var.
caesium Ach. (Lichenogr. Universalis:
656. 1810),
a legitimate name
at the same
rank,
thus rendering his new name
superfluous
and illegitimate.
However, the epithet
cyanescens was available for use
in
Collema
at the
rank of
species,
and the name
C. cyanescens Rabenh. (1845),
based on the same type,
is
legitimate.
The correct author citation for
Leptogium cyanescens,
published by Körber
(1855) by reference to
C. cyanescens “Schaer.”,
is therefore (Rabenh.) Körb.,
not (Ach.)
Körb. or (Schaer.) Körb.
Körber ascribed
the epithet
cyanescens
to Schaerer
because this
author was the first
to use the epithet
at specific rank
in the name
Parmelia cyanescens
Schaerer (1842),
which is however
illegitimate
being
a later homonym of
P. cyanescens
(Pers.) Ach. (1803).
Note 1.
In the case of re-use at the same rank
of epithets of illegitimate superfluous
names,
the type of the name causing the original superfluity
must be explicitly
excluded.
100 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 100 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Re-use | 58 |
Ex. 4.
Menispermum villosum Lam. (1797)
is an illegitimate superfluous name because
M.
hirsutum L. (1753)
was cited in synonymy.
The name
Cocculus villosus DC. (1817),
based
on
M. villosum, is also illegitimate
since the type of
M. hirsutum was not excluded and there
was no obstacle to the use of the epithet
hirsutus in
Cocculus.
Ex. 5.
Cenomyce
ecmocyna
Ach. (1810) is an
illegitimate
superfluous name for
Lichen
gracilis L. (1753),
as is
Scyphophora ecmocyna Gray (1821),
based on
C. ecmocyna,
since
the type of
L. gracilis
was not excluded
and there was
no obstacle to the use
of the epithet
gracilis in
Scyphophora.
However, when proposing the combination
Cladonia ecmocyna,
Leighton (1866)
explicitly excluded that type
and thereby published a new, legitimate name,
Cladonia ecmocyna Leight.
Ex. 6.
Diospyros discolor Willd. (1806)
was illegitimate when published, because
Cavan-
illea philippensis Desr. (1792)
was cited as a synonym.
Embryopteris discolor, based on
D.
discolor Willd., was published in 1837 by G. Don
(Gen. Syst. 4: 41.), who clearly excluded
C. philippensis.
The name would, therefore,
have been attributable to “G. Don” with priority
from 1837. However,
D. discolor is now a conserved name
and no longer illegitimate, hence
this provision no longer applies
and the correct author citation is
Embryopteris discolor
(Willd.) G. Don,
with priority from 1806.
101 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 101 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
59 | Pleomorphic fungi |
CHAPTER VI. NAMES OF FUNGI WITH A PLEOMORPHIC LIFE
CYCLE
59.1.
In non lichen-forming ascomycetous
and basidiomycetous fungi (in-
cluding
Ustilaginales)
with mitotic asexual morphs (anamorphs)
as well as
a meiotic sexual morph (teleomorph),
the correct name covering the holo-
morph
(i.e., the species in all its morphs)
is the earliest legitimate name typ-
ified, or epitypified under Art. 59.7,
by an element representing the teleo-
morph,
i.e. the morph characterized by the production of
asci/ascospores,
basidia/basidiospores,
teliospores, or other basidium-bearing organs.
Ex. 1.
The name
Crocicreomyces guttiferae Bat. & Peres (1964)
was published for a lichen-
forming fungus producing only an asexual morph.
When it was recognized that
C. guttiferae
is conspecific with
Byssoloma aeruginescens Vězda (1974),
based on an ascospore-pro-
ducing type, and that
Crocicreomyces Bat. & Peres (1964)
is synonymous with
Byssoloma
Trevis. (1853),
Batista & Peres’s epithet
was correctly recombined as
B. guttiferae (Bat. &
Peres) Lücking & Sérus. (1998).
As Art. 59 does not apply to lichen-forming fungi, no
separate generic or specific names
are available for use for the
asexual morph.
59.2.
For a binary name to qualify
as a name of a holomorph,
not only must
its type specimen, or its epitype specimen
under Art. 59.7,
be teleomorphic,
but also the protologue
must include a description or diagnosis of this
morph (or be so phrased that the possibility of
reference to the teleomorph
cannot be excluded)
(see also Art. 59.7).
59.3.
If these requirements are not fulfilled,
the name is that of a form-
taxon and
is applicable only to the anamorph
represented by its type, as
described or referred to in the protologue.
The accepted taxonomic dispos-
ition of the type of the name
determines the application of the name,
no
matter whether the genus
to which a subordinate taxon is assigned by the
author(s) is holomorphic or anamorphic.
Ex. 2.
The name
Ravenelia
cubensis Arthur & J. R. Johnst. (1918),
based on a specimen
bearing only uredinia (an anamorph),
is a validly published
and legitimate name of an ana-
morph, in spite of the attribution of the species
to a holomorphic genus.
It is legitimately
combined
with a generic name
typified by an
anamorph as
Uredo cubensis (Arthur & J. R.
102 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 102 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Pleomorphic fungi | 59 |
Johnst.) Cummins (1956).
Ravenelia
cubensis
is not available for use inclusive of the tel-
eomorph.
59.4.
Irrespective of priority,
names with a teleomorphic type, or epitype
(Art. 59.7)
take precedence over names with
only
an anamorphic type when
the types
are judged to belong to the same holomorphic taxon.
Priority of
competing teleomorphic
typified
or epitypified names
follows
Principle III
except that teleomorphic
typified names
published before
1 January 2007
take precedence
over anamorphic
typified names
subsequently
epitypified
after 1 January 2007
by teleomorphs.
59.5.
The provisions of this article
shall not be construed as preventing the
publication and use of binary names
for form-taxa when it is thought neces-
sary or desirable to refer to anamorphs alone.
Ex.
3.
Because the teleomorph of
Gibberella stilboides W. L. Gordon & C. Booth (1971)
is
only known from strains of the anamorph
Fusarium stilboides Wollenw. (1924) mating in
culture, and has not been found in nature,
it may be thought desirable to use the name of the
anamorph for the pathogen of
Coffea.
Ex.
4.
Cummins (1971), in
The rust fungi of cereals, grasses and bamboos,
found it to be
neither necessary nor desirable
to introduce new names of anamorphs under
Aecidium Pers.
: Pers. and
Uredo Pers. : Pers.,
for the aecial and uredinial stages of species of
Puccinia Pers.
: Pers.
of which the telial stage (teleomorph) was known.
Note 1.
In the absence
of existing
legitimate names,
specific or infraspecific names
for anamorphs
may be proposed at the time of publication
of the name for the ho-
lomorphic fungus or later. The
final epithets may,
if desired, be identical, as long as
they are not in homonymous combinations.
Ex. 5.
The name
Penicillium
brefeldianum B. O. Dodge (1933),
based on teleomorphic and
anamorphic material,
is a validly published and
legitimate name of a holomorph,
in spite of
the attribution of the species to a
generic name
typified by an
anamorph.
It is legitimately
combined with a holomorphic generic name as
Eupenicillium brefeldianum
(B. O. Dodge)
Stolk & D. B. Scott (1967).
Penicillium
brefeldianum
is not available for use in a restricted
sense for the anamorph alone.
59.6.
As long as there is direct
and unambiguous evidence for the delib-
erate introduction of a new morph
judged by the author(s) to be correlated
with the morph typifying a purported basionym,
and this evidence is
strengthened
by fulfilment of all requirements in Art.
32-45
for valid
publication of a name of a new taxon,
any indication such as “comb. nov.”
or “nom. nov.” is regarded as a formal error,
and the name introduced is
treated as that of a new taxon,
and attributed solely to the author(s) thereof.
When only the requirements for valid publication
of a new combination
(Art.
33 and
34)
have been fulfilled,
the name is accepted as such and
based, in accordance with Art.
7.4,
on the type of the declared or implicit
basionym.
103 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 103 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
59-59A | Pleomorphic fungi |
Ex. 6.
Mycosphaerella aleuritidis
was published as “(Miyake) Ou comb. nov., syn.
Cerco-
spora aleuritidis Miyake”
but with a Latin diagnosis of the teleomorph.
The indication
“comb. nov.”
is taken as a formal error, and
M. aleuritidis S. H. Ou (1940) is accepted as a
validly published new specific name for the holomorph,
typified by the teleomorphic ma-
terial described by Ou.
Ex. 7.
Corticium microsclerotium
was originally published as
“(Matz) Weber, comb. nov.,
syn.
Rhizoctonia microsclerotia Matz”
with a description, only in English,
of the teleo-
morph.
Because of Art.
36,
this may not be considered
as the valid publication of the name
of a new species, and so
C. microsclerotium (Matz) G. F. Weber (1939)
must be considered
a validly published
and legitimate new combination
based on the specimen of the anamorph
that typifies its basionym.
Corticium
microsclerotium G. F. Weber (1951),
published with a
Latin description
and a teleomorphic type,
is an illegitimate later homonym.
Ex. 8.
Hypomyces chrysospermus Tul. (1860),
presented as the name of a holomorph
without the indication
“comb. nov.” but with explicit reference to
Mucor chrysospermus
(Bull.) Bull. and
Sepedonium chrysospermum (Bull.) Fr.,
which are names of its anamorph,
is not to be considered as a new combination
but as the name of a newly described species,
with a teleomorphic type.
59.7.
Where a teleomorph has been discovered
for a fungus previously
known only as an anamorph and for which
there is no existing legitimate
name for the holomorph, an epitype
exhibiting the teleomorph stage may be
designated for the hitherto anamorphic name
even when there is no hint of
the teleomorph in the protologue of that name.
59A.1.
When a new morph of a fungus is described,
it should be published either
as a new taxon
(e.g., gen. nov., sp. nov., var. nov.)
the name of which has a teleo-
morphic type, or as a new anamorph (anam. nov.)
the name of which has an ana-
morphic type.
59A.2.
When in naming a new morph of a fungus
the epithet of the name of a
different, earlier described morph
of the same fungus is used,
the new name should
be designated
as the name of a new taxon or anamorph,
as the case may be, but not
as a new combination based on the earlier name.
59A.3.
Authors should avoid the publication
and use of binary names for ana-
morphs when the teleomorphic connection
is firmly established and there is no
practical need for separate names
(as e.g. in rust fungi and members of the
Tri-
chocomaceae).
104 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 104 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Orthography | 60 |
CHAPTER VII. ORTHOGRAPHY AND GENDER OF NAMES
60.1.
The original spelling of a name or epithet
is to be retained, except for
the correction of typographical or orthographical
errors and the standard-
izations imposed by Art.
60.5
(u/v or
i/j used interchangeably),
60.6
(dia-
critical signs and ligatures),
60.8
(compounding forms),
60.9
(hyphens),
60.10
(apostrophes),
60.11
(terminations; see also Art.
32.7), and
60.12
(fungal epithets).
Ex. 1.
Retention of original spelling:
The generic names
Mesembryanthemum L. (1753) and
Amaranthus L. (1753)
were deliberately so spelled by Linnaeus
and the spelling is not to be
altered to
“Mesembrianthemum” and
“Amarantus”, respectively, although these latter
forms are philologically preferable
(see Bull. Misc. Inform. Kew 1928: 113, 287. 1928).
–
Phoradendron Nutt. (1848) is not to be altered to
“Phoradendrum”.
–
Triaspis mozambica
A. Juss. (1843)
is not to be altered to
“T. mossambica”,
as in Engler (Pflanzenw. Ost-Afri-
kas C: 232. 1895).
–
Alyxia ceylanica Wight (1848)
is not to be altered to
“A. zeylanica”, as
in Trimen (Handb. Fl. Ceylon 3: 127. 1895).
–
Fagus sylvatica L. (1753)
is not to be altered
to
“F. silvatica”.
The classical spelling
silvatica is recommended for adoption
in the case of
a new name (Rec.
60E),
but the mediaeval spelling
sylvatica is not an orthographical error.
–
Scirpus cespitosus L. (1753) is not to be altered to
“S. caespitosus”.
*Ex. 2.
Typographical errors:
Globba “brachycarpa” Baker (1890) and
Hetaeria “alba”
Ridl. (1896)
are typographical errors for
Globba trachycarpa Baker and
Hetaeria alta Ridl.,
respectively (see J. Bot. 59: 349. 1921).
Ex. 3.
“Torilis” taihasenzanensis Masam.
(in J. Soc. Trop. Agric. 6: 570. 1934) was a typo-
graphical error for
Trollius taihasenzanensis, as noted on the errata slip
inserted between
pages 4 and 5 of the same volume.
Ex.
4.
The misspelled
Indigofera “longipednnculata”
Y. Y. Fang & C. Z. Zheng (1983) is
presumably a typographical error
and is to be corrected to
I. longipedunculata.
*Ex.
5.
Orthographical error:
Gluta “benghas” L. (1771),
being an orthographical error for
G. renghas, is cited as
G. renghas L.
(see Engler in Candolle & Candolle,
Monogr. Phan. 4:
225. 1883);
the vernacular name used as a specific epithet
by Linnaeus is “renghas”, not
“benghas”.
105 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 105 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
60 | Orthography |
Note 1.
Art.
14.11
provides for the conservation
of an altered spelling of a name of
a family, genus, or species.
Ex. 6. Bougainvillea (see App. IIIA, Spermatophyta, Dicotyledones).
60.2.
The words “original spelling”
mean the spelling
employed when
name was validly published.
They do not refer to the use
of an initial capital
or lower-case letter,
this being a matter of typography (see Art.
20.1 and
21.2, Rec.
60F).
60.3.
The liberty of correcting a name
is to be used with reserve, especially
if the change affects the first syllable and,
above all, the first letter of the
name.
*Ex.
7.
The spelling of the generic name
Lespedeza Michx. (1803)
is not to be altered, al-
though it commemorates Vicente Manuel de Céspedes
(see Rhodora 36: 130-132, 390-392.
1934).
–
Cereus jamacaru DC. (1828)
may not be altered to
C. “mandacaru”, even if
jama-
caru
is believed to be a corruption
of the vernacular name “mandacaru”.
60.4.
The letters
w and
y, foreign to classical Latin, and
k, rare in that lan-
guage,
are permissible in Latin plant names.
Other letters and ligatures
foreign
to classical Latin that may appear
in Latin plant names, such as the
German
ß (double
s), are to be transcribed.
60.5.
When a name has been published in a work
where the letters
u, v or
i,
j are used interchangeably
or in any other way incompatible with modern
practices (e.g., one letter
of a pair not being used in capitals,
or not at all),
those letters are to be transcribed
in conformity with modern botanical
usage.
Ex.
8.
Uffenbachia Fabr. (1763), not
“Vffenbachia”; Taraxacum Zinn (1757), not
“Tarax-
acvm”; Curculigo Gaertn. (1788), not
“Cvrcvligo”.
Ex.
9.
“Geastrvm hygrometricvm” and
“Vredo pvstvlata” of Persoon (1801)
are written,
respectively,
Geastrum hygrometricum Pers. and
Uredo pustulata Pers.
Ex. 10.
Brachypodium “iaponicum” of Miquel (1866)
is written
Brachypodium japonicum
Miq.
60.6.
Diacritical signs are not used
in Latin plant names. In names (either
new or old) drawn from words
in which such signs appear,
the signs are to
be suppressed
with the necessary transcription of the letters
so modified;
for example
ä, ö, ü become, respectively,
ae, oe, ue; é, è, ê become
e, or
sometimes
ae; ñ becomes
n;
ø becomes
oe;
å becomes
ao.
The diaeresis,
indicating that a vowel is to be pronounced
separately from the preceding
vowel (as in
Cephaëlis, Isoëtes), is permissible;
the ligatures
-æ- and
-œ-,
indicating that the letters
are pronounced together,
are to be replaced by the
separate letters
-ae- and
-oe-.
106 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 106 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Orthography | 60 |
60.7.
When changes in spelling by authors
who adopt personal, geograph-
ic, or vernacular names in nomenclature
are intentional latinizations, they
are to be preserved,
except when they concern
(a)
only the termination of
epithets to which Art.
60.11
applies, or
(b)
changes to
personal names
in-
volving
(1)
omission of
a final vowel
or final consonant
or
(2)
conversion
of a final vowel
to a different vowel,
for which
the final letter
of the name is
to be restored.
Ex.
11.
Clutia L. (1753),
Gleditsia L. (1753), and
Valantia L. (1753), commemorating
Cluyt, Gleditsch, and Vaillant,
respectively, are not to be altered to
“Cluytia”, “Gledit-
schia”, and
“Vaillantia”;
Linnaeus latinized the names
of these botanists deliberately as
Clutius, Gleditsius, and Valantius.
Ex.
12.
Abies alcoquiana Veitch ex Lindl. (1861),
commemorating “Rutherford Alcock
Esq.”,
implies an intentional latinization of that name
to Alcoquius.
In transferring the
epithet to
Picea,
Carrière (1867) deliberately changed the spelling to
“alcockiana”.
The
resulting combination
is nevertheless correctly cited as
P. alcoquiana (Veitch ex Lindl.)
Carrière (see Art.
61.4).
Ex.
13.
Abutilon glaziovii K. Schum. (1891),
Desmodium bigelovii A. Gray (1843), and
Rhododendron bureavii Franch. (1887),
commemorating A. F. M. Glaziou, J. Bigelow, and
L. E. Bureau, respectively,
are not to be changed to
A. “glazioui”, D. “bigelowii”, or
R.
“bureaui”.
In these three cases,
the implicit latinizations
Glaziovius, Bigelovius, and Bu-
reavius
result from
conversion of a
final consonant
and
do not affect merely the termination
of the names.
Ex. 14.
Arnica chamissonis Less. (1831) and
Tragus berteronianus Schult. (1824),
com-
memorating L. K. A. von Chamisso
and C. L. G. Bertero,
are not to be changed to
A.
“chamissoi” or
T. “berteroanus”.
The derivation of these epithets
from the third declension
genitive,
a practice not now recommended in most cases
(see Rec.
60C.2),
involves the
addition of letters
to the personal name and
does not affect merely the termination.
Ex. 15.
Acacia “brandegeana”,
Blandfordia “backhousii”,
Cephalotaxus “fortuni”,
Che-
nopodium “loureirei”,
Convolvulus “loureiri”,
Glochidion “melvilliorum”,
Hypericum
“buckleii”,
Solanum “rantonnei”, and
Zygophyllum “billardierii”
were published to com-
memorate
T. S. Brandegee,
J. Backhouse, R. Fortune, J. de Loureiro,
R. Melville and E.
F. Melville,
S. B. Buckley,
V. Rantonnet, and
J. J. H. de Labillardière (de la Billardière).
The implicit latinizations are
Brandegeus,
Backhousius, Fortunus, Loureireus or Loureirus,
Melvillius,
Buckleius,
Rantonneus,
and Billardierius, but
these
are not acceptable under Art.
60.7.
The names are correctly cited as
A. brandegeeana
I. M. Johnst. (1925),
B. backhousei
Gunn & Lindl. (1845),
Cephalotaxus fortunei Hook. (1850),
Chenopodium loureiroi Steud.
(1840),
Convolvulus loureiroi G. Don (1836),
G. melvilleorum Airy Shaw (1971),
H. buck-
leyi M. A. Curtis (1843),
S. rantonnetii
Carrière (1859), and
Z. billardierei DC. (1824).
Note 2.
The provisions of Art.
60.7,
60.11, Rec.
60C
deal with the latinization
of names through their modification.
This latinization is different from translation
of names (e.g. Tabernaemontanus from Bergzabern)
and from the use of an ad-
jective indirectly derived from a personal name,
which are thus not subject to
modification under Art. 60.7 or 60.11.
107 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 107 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
60 | Orthography |
Ex. 16.
In
Wollemia nobilis W. G. Jones & al. (1995),
the use of the adjective
nobilis is
indirectly derived from the name of
the discoverer David Noble.
Cladonia abbatiana S.
Steenroose (1991) honours the French lichenologist H. des Abbayes.
In both cases the
adjective is indirectly derived
from a personal name.
Since no typographical or ortho-
graphical error is present,
the original spelling of those names
may not be altered.
60.8.
The use of a compounding form contrary to Rec.
60G
in an adjectival
epithet is treated as an error to be corrected.
Ex.
17.
Candolle’s
Pereskia “opuntiaeflora” is to be cited as
P. opuntiiflora DC. (1828),
and
Myrosma “cannaefolia” of the younger Linnaeus, as
M. cannifolia L. f. (1782).
Ex.
18.
Cacalia “napeaefolia” and
Senecio “napeaefolius” are to be cited as
Cacalia na-
paeifolia DC. (1838) and
Senecio napaeifolius (DC.) Sch. Bip. (1845),
respectively; the
specific epithet refers to the resemblance
of the leaves to those of the genus
Napaea L. (not
“Napea”),
and the substitute (connecting) vowel
-i should have been used instead of
the
genitive singular inflection
-ae.
Ex.
19.
However, in
Andromeda polifolia L. (1753),
the epithet is a pre-Linnaean plant
name
(“Polifolia” of Buxbaum)
used in apposition and not an adjective;
it is not to be
altered to
“poliifolia”
(Polium-leaved).
60.9.
The use of a hyphen in a compound epithet
is treated as an error to be
corrected by deletion of the hyphen,
unless the epithet is formed of words
that usually stand independently
or the letters before and after the hyphen
are the same, when a hyphen is permitted (see Art.
23.1 and
23.3).
Ex.
20.
Hyphen to be omitted:
Acer pseudoplatanus L. (1753), not
A. “pseudo-platanus”;
Eugenia costaricensis O. Berg
(1856), not
E. “costa-ricensis”;
Ficus neoëbudarum Sum-
merh. (1932), not
F. “neo-ebudarum”;
Lycoperdon atropurpureum Vittad. (1842), not
L.
“atro-purpureum”;
Croton ciliatoglandulifer Ortega (1797), not
C. “ciliato-glandulifer”;
Scirpus sect.
Pseudoëriophorum Jurtzev
(in Byull. Moskovsk. Obshch. Isp. Prir., Otd. Biol.
70(1): 132. 1965), not
S. sect.
“Pseudo-eriophorum”.
Ex.
21.
Hyphen to be maintained:
Aster novae-angliae L. (1753),
Coix lacryma-jobi L.
(1753),
Arctostaphylos uva-ursi (L.) Spreng. (1825),
Veronica anagallis-aquatica L. (1753;
Art.
23.3),
Athyrium austro-occidentale Ching (1986).
Note
3.
Art. 60.9 refers only to epithets (in combinations),
not to names of genera
or taxa in higher ranks;
a generic name published with a hyphen
can be changed
only by conservation (Art.
14.11).
Ex.
22.
Pseudo-salvinia Piton (1940)
may not be changed to
“Pseudosalvinia”;
whereas
by
conservation
“Pseudo-elephantopus” was changed to
Pseudelephantopus Rohr (1792).
60.10.
The use of an apostrophe in an epithet
is treated as an error to be
corrected by deletion of the apostrophe.
Ex.
23.
Lycium “o’donellii”,
Cymbidium “i’ansoni” and
Solanum tuberosum var.
“mu-
ru’kewillu” are to be corrected to
L. odonellii F. A. Barkley (1953),
C. iansonii Rolfe
(1900) and
S. tuberosum var.
murukewillu Ochoa (in Phytologia 65: 112. 1988),
respec-
tively.
108 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 108 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Orthography | 60 |
60.11.
The use of a termination (for example
-i, -ii, -ae, -iae, -anus, or
-ianus) contrary to Rec.
60C.1
is
treated as an error to be corrected (see also
Art.
32.7).
However,
terminations
of epithets formed in
accordance with
Rec.
60C.2
are
not to be
corrected.
Ex. 24.
Rhododendron “potanini” Batalin (1892)
must be corrected to
R. potaninii since it
commemorates G. N. Potanin,
to whose name Rec. 60C.1 applies.
However,
Phoenix theo-
phrasti Greuter (1967)
must not be changed to
P. “theophrastii” since it commemorates
Theophrastus, to whose name Rec.
60C.2 applies.
Ex.
25.
Rosa “pissarti”
(Carrière in Rev. Hort. 1880: 314. 1880)
is a typographical error for
R. “pissardi”
(see Rev. Hort. 1881: 190. 1881),
which in its turn is treated as an error for
R.
pissardii Carrière (see Rec.
60C.1(b)).
Ex.
26.
However,
Uladendron codesuri Marc.-Berti (1971)
is not to be changed to
U.
“codesurii”
(as by Brenan in Index Kew., Suppl. 16. 1981),
since the epithet does not
commemorate a person
but derives from an acronym (CODESUR,
Comisión para el
Desarrollo del Sur de Venezuela).
Ex. 27.
Nigella degenii subsp.
barbro Strid and
N. degenii subsp.
jenny Strid (in Opera Bot.
28: 58, 60. 1970)
commemorate the wife and daughter of the author.
These spellings are not
to be changed since the personal names
were not given Latin terminations to form the
subspecific epithets.
Ex.
28.
Asparagus tamaboki Yatabe (1893)
and
Agropyron kamoji
Ohwi (1942) bear the
Japanese vernacular names “tamaboki”
and (in part)
“kamojigusa” as
their epithets and
are
therefore not correctable to
A. “tamabokii”
and
A. “kamojii”.
Note
4.
If the gender and/or number
of a substantival epithet derived from a per-
sonal name is inappropriate for the sex
and/or number of the person(s) whom the
name commemorates, the termination
is to be corrected in conformity with Rec.
60C.1.
Ex.
29.
Rosa
דtoddii” was named by Wolley-Dod
(in J. Bot. 69, Suppl.: 106. 1931)
for
“Miss E. S. Todd”;
the name is to be corrected to
R.
×toddiae Wolley-Dod.
Ex.
30.
Astragalus “matthewsii”,
published by Podlech & Kirchhoff
(in Mitt. Bot. Staats-
samml. München 11: 432. 1974)
to commemorate Victoria A. Matthews,
is to be corrected
to
A. matthewsiae Podlech & Kirchhoff;
it is not therefore a later homonym of
A. matthewsii
S. Watson (1883)
(see Agerer-Kirchhoff & Podlech in
Mitt. Bot. Staatssamml. München 12:
375. 1976).
Ex.
31.
Codium “geppii”
(Schmidt in Biblioth. Bot. 91: 50. 1923),
which commemorates
“A. & E. S. Gepp”,
is to be corrected to
C. geppiorum O. C. Schmidt.
60.12.
Epithets of fungus names derived
from the generic name of an as-
sociated organism are to be spelled in accordance
with the accepted spel-
ling of that organism’s name;
other spellings are regarded as orthographical
variants to be corrected (see Art.
61).
Ex.
32.
Phyllachora “anonicola” (Chardón
in Mycologia 32: 190. 1940) is to be altered to
P.
annonicola Chardón,
since the spelling
Annona is now accepted in preference to
“Anona”. –
109 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 109 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
60-60C | Orthography |
Meliola “albizziae”
(Hansford & Deighton in Mycol. Pap. 23: 26. 1948)
is to be altered to
M.
albiziae Hansf. & Deighton,
since the spelling
Albizia is now accepted in preference to
“Al-
bizzia”.
60A.1.
When a new name or its epithet
is to be derived from Greek, the translit-
eration to Latin should conform to classical usage.
60A.2.
The
Greek spiritus asper
(‘rough breathing’)
should be transcribed in Latin
as the letter
h.
Ex. 1. Hyacinthus from ὑάκινθος.
60B.1.
When a new generic name, or
epithet
of a subdivision
of a genus,
is taken
from the name of a person,
it should be formed as follows:
(a)
When the name of the person ends with a vowel,
the letter
-a is added (thus
Ottoa after Otto;
Sloanea after Sloane),
except when the name ends with
-a,
when
-ea is added (e.g.
Collaea after Colla), or with
-ea (as Correa), when no
letter is added.
(b)
When the name of the person ends with a consonant,
the letters
-ia are added,
but when the name ends with
-er, either of the terminations
-ia and
-a is appro-
priate (e.g.
Sesleria after Sesler and
Kernera after Kerner).
(c)
In latinized personal names ending with
-us this termination is dropped (e.g.
Dillenia after Dillenius)
before applying the procedure
described under (a) and
(b).
Note 1.
The syllables not modified by these endings
are unaffected unless they
contain letters foreign to Latin plant names
or diacritical signs (see Art.
60.6).
Note 2.
More
than one generic
name, or
epithet of
a subdivision
of a genus,
may be
based on
the same personal name,
e.g. by adding
a prefix or
suffix to that personal
name or by using an
anagram or
abbreviation of it.
Ex. 1.
Durvillaea Bory (1826) and
Urvillea Kunth (1821);
Lapeirousia Pourr. (1788) and
Peyrousea DC. (1838);
Engleria O. Hoffm. (1888),
Englerastrum Briq. (1894), and
Eng-
lerella Pierre (1891);
Bouchea Cham. (1832) and
Ubochea Baill. (1891);
Gerardia L.
(1753) and
Graderia Benth. (1846);
Martia Spreng. (1818) and
Martiusia Schult. & Schult.
f. (1822).
60C.1.
When
personal names
are given Latin terminations
in order to form
spe-
cific and infraspecific epithets
formation of
those epithets
is as follows
(but see
Rec.
60C.2):
110 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 110 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Orthography | 60C |
(a)
If the personal name ends with a vowel or
-er, substantival epithets are formed
by adding the genitive inflection
appropriate to the sex and number of the
person(s) honoured (e.g.,
scopoli-i for Scopoli (m),
fedtschenko-i for Fed-
tschenko (m),
fedtschenko-ae for Fedtschenko (f),
glaziou-i for Glaziou (m),
lace-ae for Lace (f),
gray-i for Gray (m),
hooker-orum for the Hookers (m)),
except when the name ends with
-a, in which case adding
-e (singular) or
-rum
(plural) is appropriate (e.g.
triana-e for Triana (m),
pojarkova-e for Pojarkova
(f),
orlovskaja-e for Orlovskaja (f)).
(b)
If the personal name ends with a consonant (except
-er), substantival epithets
are formed by adding
-i- (stem augmentation)
plus the genitive inflection ap-
propriate to the sex
and number of the person(s) honoured (e.g.
lecard-ii for
Lecard (m),
wilson-iae for Wilson (f),
verlot-iorum for the Verlot brothers,
braun-iarum for the Braun sisters,
mason-iorum for Mason, father and daugh-
ter).
(c)
If the personal name ends with a vowel,
adjectival epithets are formed by
adding
-an- plus the nominative singular
inflection appropriate to the gender of
the generic name (e.g.
Cyperus heyne-anus for Heyne,
Vanda lindley-ana for
Lindley,
Aspidium bertero-anum for Bertero),
except when the personal name
ends with
-a in which case
-n-
plus the appropriate inflection is added (e.g.
balansa-nus (m),
balansa-na (f), and
balansa-num (n) for Balansa).
(d)
If the personal name ends with a consonant,
adjectival epithets are formed by
adding
-i- (stem augmentation) plus
-an- (stem of adjectival suffix) plus the
nominative singular inflection appropriate to the gender
of the generic name
(e.g.
Rosa webb-iana for Webb,
Desmodium griffith-ianum for Griffith,
Ver-
bena hassler-iana for Hassler).
Note 1.
The hyphens in the above examples
are used only to set off the total ap-
propriate termination.
60C.2.
Personal names already in Greek or Latin,
or possessing a well-established
latinized form,
should be given their appropriate Latin genitive to form
new sub-
stantival epithets (e.g.
alexandri from Alexander or Alexandre,
augusti from Au-
gustus or August or Auguste,
martini from Martinus or Martin,
linnaei from Lin-
naeus,
martii from Martius,
wislizeni from Wislizenus,
edithae from Editha or
Edith,
elisabethae from Elisabetha or Elisabeth,
murielae from Muriela or Muriel,
conceptionis from Conceptio or Concepción,
beatricis from Beatrix or Béatrice,
hectoris from Hector; but not
“cami” from Edmond Camus or Aimée Camus).
Treating modern family names, i.e. ones
that do not have
a well-established
latin-
ized form,
as if they were in third declension
should be avoided (e.g.
munronis
from Munro,
richardsonis from Richardson).
60C.3.
New epithets based on personal names
that have a well-established latin-
ized form should maintain the traditional use
of that latinized form.
111 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 111 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
60C-60D | Orthography |
Ex. 1.
In addition to the epithets in Rec. 60C.2,
the following epithets commemorate per-
sonal names already in Latin or possessing
a well-established latinized form:
(a) second
declension:
afzelii based on Afzelius;
allemanii based on Allemanius (Freire Allemão);
bauhini based on Bauhinus (Bauhin);
clusii based on Clusius;
rumphii based on Rumphius
(Rumpf);
solandri based on Solandrus (Solander);
(b) third declension:
bellonis based on
Bello;
brunonis based on Bruno (Robert Brown);
chamissonis based on Chamisso;
(c) ad-
jectives
(see Art. 23.5):
afzelianus, clusianus, linnaeanus,
martianus, rumphianus and
bru-
nonianus, chamissonianus.
60C.4.
In forming new epithets based on personal names
the customary spelling of
the personal name
should not be modified unless it contains letters
foreign to Latin
plant names or diacritical signs
(see Art. 60.4 and 60.6).
60C.5.
In forming
new epithets
based on personal
names
prefixes and particles
should
be treated as follows:
(a)
The Scottish patronymic prefix
“Mac”, “Mc”, or “M’”, meaning “son of”,
should be spelled “mac” and
united with the rest of the name (e.g.
macfadyenii
after Macfadyen,
macgillivrayi after MacGillivray,
macnabii after McNab,
mackenii after M’Ken).
(b)
The Irish patronymic prefix “O”
should be united with the rest of the name or
omitted (e.g.
obrienii, brienianus after O’Brien,
okellyi after O’Kelly).
(c)
A prefix consisting of an article
(e.g. le, la, l’, les, el, il, lo),
or containing an
article (e.g. du, de la, des, del, della),
should be united to the name (e.g.
leclercii
after Le Clerc,
dubuyssonii after DuBuysson,
lafarinae after La Farina,
logatoi
after Lo Gato).
(d)
A prefix to a family name indicating
ennoblement or canonization should be
omitted (e.g.
candollei after de Candolle,
jussieui after de Jussieu,
hilairei after
Saint-Hilaire,
remyi after St. Rémy);
in geographical epithets, however, “St.” is
rendered as
sanctus (m) or
sancta (f) (e.g.
sancti-johannis, of St. John,
sanc-
tae-helenae, of St. Helena).
(e)
A German or Dutch prefix should be omitted (e.g.
iheringii after von Ihering,
martii after von Martius,
steenisii after van Steenis,
strassenii after zu Stras-
sen,
vechtii after van der Vecht),
but when it is normally treated as part of the
family name
it should be included in the epithet (e.g.
vonhausenii after Von-
hausen,
vanderhoekii after Vanderhoek,
vanbruntiae after Van Brunt).
60D.1.
An epithet derived from a geographical name
is preferably an adjective and
usually takes the termination
-ensis, -(a)nus, -inus, or
-icus.
Ex. 1.
Rubus quebecensis L. H. Bailey (from Quebec),
Ostrya virginiana (Mill.) K. Koch
(from Virginia),
Eryngium amorginum Rech. f. (from Amorgos),
Fraxinus pennsylvanica
Marshall (from Pennsylvania).
112 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 112 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Orthography | 60E-60G |
60E.1.
The epithet in a new name should be written
in conformity with the cus-
tomary spelling of the word or words
from which it is derived and in accordance
with the accepted usage of Latin and latinization
(see also Art.
23.5).
Ex. 1. sinensis (not chinensis).
60F.1.
All specific and infraspecific epithets
should be written with an initial low-
er-case
letter.
60G.1.
A compound name or an epithet
which combines elements derived from
two or more Greek or Latin words
should be formed, as far as practicable, in ac-
cordance with classical usage.
This may be stated as follows (see also Note 1):
(a)
In a regular compound, a noun or adjective
in non-final position appears as a
compounding form generally obtained by
(1)
removing the case ending of the genitive singular (Latin
-ae, -i, -us, -is;
transliterated Greek
-ou, -os, -es, -as, -ous and
its equivalent
-eos) and
(2)
before a consonant, adding a connecting vowel
(-i- for Latin elements,
-o-
for Greek elements).
(3)
Exceptions are common,
and one should review earlier usages
of a par-
ticular compounding form.
Ex. 1.
The following are examples
of the formation of a compound epithet derived from a
generic name and another Greek or Latin word.
The epithet meaning “having leaves like
those of
Myrica” is
myricifolia
(Myric-, connecting vowel
-i- and ending
-folia).
The epi-
thets
aquilegifolia and
aquilegiaefolia
derived from the name
Aquilegia must be changed to
aquilegiifolia
(Aquilegi-, connecting vowel
-i- and ending
-folia).
(b)
In a pseudocompound,
a noun or adjective in a non-final position
appears as a
word with a case ending, not as a modified stem.
Examples are:
nidus-avis
(nest of bird),
Myos-otis (ear of mouse),
albo-marginatus (margined with
white), etc. In epithets where tingeing is expressed,
the modifying initial col-
our often is in the ablative
because the preposition
e, ex, is implicit, e.g.,
atropurpureus (blackish purple) from
ex atro purpureus
(purple tinged with
black).
Others have been deliberately introduced
to reveal etymological dif-
ferences when different word elements have
the same compounding forms,
such as
tubi- from tube
(tubus, tubi) or from trumpet
(tuba, tubae) where
tubaeflorus can only mean trumpet-flowered;
also
carici- is the compounding
form from both papaya
(carica, caricae) and sedge
(carex, caricis) where
caricaefolius can only mean papaya-leaved.
The latter use of the genitive sin-
gular of the first declension for pseudocompounding
is treated as an error to be
corrected unless it makes an etymological distinction
(see Art. 60.8).
113 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 113 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
60G-61 | Orthography – Gender |
Note 1.
In forming some other apparently irregular compounds,
classical usage is
commonly followed.
Ex.
2.
The compounding forms
hydro‐ and
hydr- (Hydro-phyllum) stem from water
(hydor,
hydatos);
calli-(Calli-stemon)
derive from the adjective beautiful
(kalos); and
meli- (Meli-
osma, Meli-lotus)
stem from honey
(mel, melitos).
Note 2.
The hyphens in the above examples
are given solely for explanatory rea-
sons. For the use of hyphens in generic names
and in epithets see Art.
20.3,
23.1,
and
60.9.
60H.1.
The etymology of new names or of epithets
in new names should be given,
especially when their meaning is not obvious.
61.1.
Only one orthographical variant
of any one name is treated as validly
published: the form that appears
in the original publication, except as
provided in Art.
60
(typographical or orthographical errors
and standard-
izations), Art.
14.11
(conserved spellings), and Art.
32.5
(improper Latin
terminations).
61.2.
For the purpose of this
Code, orthographical variants
are the various
spelling, compounding,
and inflectional forms of a name or its
final epithet
(including typographical errors),
only one nomenclatural type being in-
volved.
61.3.
If orthographical variants
of a name appear in the original publica-
tion, the one that conforms to the rules
and best suits the recommendations
of Art.
60
is to be retained; otherwise the first author who,
in an effectively
published text (Art.
29-31),
explicitly adopts one of the variants
and rejects
the other(s) must be followed.
61.4.
The orthographical variants of a name
are to be corrected to the val-
idly published form of that name.
Whenever such a variant appears in print,
it is to be treated as if it were printed
in its corrected form.
Note 1.
In full citations it is desirable
that the original form of a corrected
ortho-
graphical variant of a name be added (Rec.
50F).
61.5.
Confusingly similar names
based on the same type are treated as
orthographical variants.
(For confusingly similar names based on different
types, see Art.
53.3-5.)
Ex. 1.
“Geaster” (Fries, 1829) and
Geastrum Pers. (1794) : Pers. (1801)
are similar names
with the same type
(see Taxon 33: 498. 1984);
they are treated as orthographical variants
despite the fact that they are derived
from two different nouns,
aster (asteris) and
astrum
(astri).
114 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 114 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Gender | 62 |
62.1.
A generic name retains the gender
assigned by botanical tradition,
irrespective of classical usage
or the author’s original usage.
A generic
name without a botanical tradition
retains the gender assigned by its author
(but see Art.
62.4).
Note 1.
Botanical tradition usually maintains
the classical gender of a Greek or
Latin word, when this was well established.
*Ex. 1.
In accordance with botanical tradition,
Adonis L.,
Atriplex L.,
Diospyros L.,
He-
merocallis L.,
Orchis L.,
Stachys L., and
Strychnos L.
must be treated as feminine while
Lotus L. and
Melilotus Mill. must be treated as masculine.
Eucalyptus L’Hér.,
which lacks a
botanical tradition,
retains the feminine gender assigned by its author.
Although their ending
suggests masculine gender,
Cedrus Trew and
Fagus L.,
like most other classical tree names,
were traditionally treated as feminine and
thus retain that gender; similarly,
Rhamnus L.
is feminine,
despite the fact that Linnaeus
assigned it masculine gender.
Phyteuma L. (n),
Sicyos L. (m), and
Erigeron L. (m) are other names
for which botanical tradition has re-
established the classical gender
despite another choice by Linnaeus.
62.2.
Compound generic names take the gender
of the last word in the
nominative case
in the compound. If the termination is altered, however,
the gender is altered accordingly.
Ex. 2.
Irrespective of the fact that
Parasitaxus de Laub. (1972)
was treated as masculine
when published,
its gender is feminine:
it is a compound of which the last part coincides
with the generic name
Taxus L., which is feminine by botanical tradition
(Art. 62.1).
Ex. 3.
Compound generic names in which
the termination of the last word is altered:
Stenocarpus R. Br.,
Dipterocarpus C. F. Gaertn.,
and all other compounds ending in the
Greek masculine
-carpos (or
-carpus), e.g.
Hymenocarpos Savi, are masculine;
those
in
-carpa or
-carpaea, however, are feminine, e.g.
Callicarpa L. and
Polycarpaea Lam.; and
those in
-carpon,
-carpum, or
-carpium are neuter, e.g.
Polycarpon L.,
Ormocarpum P.
Beauv., and
Pisocarpium Link.
(a)
Compounds ending in
-botrys,
-codon, -myces, -odon, -panax, -pogon,
-stemon,
and other masculine words, are masculine.
Ex. 4.
Irrespective of the fact that the generic names
Andropogon L. and
Oplopanax (Torr.
& A. Gray) Miq.
were originally treated as neuter by their authors,
they are masculine.
(b)
Compounds ending in
-achne, -chlamys, -daphne,
-glochin, -mecon,
-osma
(the modern transcription of the feminine Greek word
οσμή,
osmē),
and other feminine words, are feminine.
An exception is made in
the case of names ending in
-gaster,
which strictly speaking ought to be
feminine, but which are treated as
masculine in accordance with bo-
tanical tradition.
115 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 115 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
62-62A | Gender |
Ex. 5.
Irrespective of the fact that
Tetraglochin Poepp.,
Triglochin L.,
Dendromecon
Benth., and
Hesperomecon Greene
were originally treated as neuter,
they are feminine.
(c)
Compounds ending in
-ceras, -dendron, -nema,
-stigma, -stoma, and
other neuter words, are neuter.
An exception is made for names ending
in
-anthos (or
anthus),
-chilos
(-chilus or
-cheilos), and
-phykos (-phy-
cos or
-phycus), which ought to be neuter,
since that is the gender of the
Greek words
άνθος,
anthos,
χείλος,
cheilos, and
φύκος,
phykos, but
are treated as masculine in accordance
with botanical tradition.
Ex. 6.
Irrespective of the fact that
Aceras R. Br. and
Xanthoceras Bunge
were treated as
feminine when first published,
they are neuter.
62.3.
Arbitrarily formed generic names
or vernacular names or adjectives
used as generic names, of which the gender
is not apparent, take the gender
assigned to them by their authors.
If the original author failed to indicate the
gender, the next subsequent author may choose a gender,
and that choice, if
effectively published (Art.
29-31),
is to be accepted.
Ex. 7.
Taonabo Aubl. (1775) is feminine
because Aublet’s two species were
T. dentata and
T. punctata.
Ex. 8.
Agati Adans. (1763)
was published without indication of gender;
feminine gender
was assigned to it by Desvaux
(in J. Bot. Agric. 1: 120. 1813),
who was the first subsequent
author
to adopt the name in an effectively published text,
and his choice is to be accepted.
Ex. 9.
The original gender of
Manihot Mill. (1754),
as apparent from some of the species
polynomials, was feminine, and
Manihot
is therefore to be treated as feminine.
62.4.
Generic names ending in
-anthes, -oides or
-odes are treated as fem-
inine and those ending in
-ites as masculine,
irrespective of the gender as-
signed to them by the original author.
62A.1.
When a genus is divided into two or more genera,
the gender of the new
generic name or names
should be that of the generic name that is retained.
Ex. 1.
When
Boletus L. : Fr. is divided,
the gender of the new generic names should be
masculine:
Xerocomus Quél. (1887),
Boletellus Murrill (1909), etc.
116 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 116 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Governance of the Code | Div.III.1-Div.III.2 |
DIVISION III. PROVISIONS FOR THE GOVERNANCE OF
THE CODE
Div.III.1.
The
Code may be modified only by action
of a plenary session of
an International Botanical Congress
on a resolution moved by the Nomen-
clature Section of that Congress¹.
Div.III.2.
Permanent Nomenclature Committees
are established under the
auspices of the International Association
for Plant Taxonomy.
Members of
these Committees are elected by
an International Botanical Congress.
The
Committees have power to co-opt
and to establish subcommittees; such
officers as may be desired are elected.
(1) General Committee,
composed of the secretaries of the other Com-
mittees,
the rapporteur-général,
the president and the secretary of the
International Association for Plant Taxonomy,
and at least 5 members
to be appointed by the Nomenclature Section.
The rapporteur-général is
charged with the presentation of nomenclature proposals to
the Inter-
national Botanical Congress.
(2) Committee for Vascular Plants.
(4) Committee for Fungi.
(5) Committee for Algae.
(6) Committee for Fossil Plants.
(7)
Editorial Committee,
charged with the preparation and publication of
the
Code in conformity with the decisions
adopted by the International
Botanical Congress.
Chairman: the rapporteur-général of the previous
Congress, who is charged with the general duties
in connection with the
editing of the
Code.
———————————————————————
¹
In the event that there should not be another
International Botanical Congress, authority
for the
International code of botanical nomenclature
shall be transferred to the Inter-
national Union of Biological Sciences or
to an organization at that time corresponding to
it. The General Committee is empowered to
define the machinery to achieve this.
117 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 117 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Div.III.3-Div.III.4 | Governance of the Code |
Div.III.3.
The Bureau of Nomenclature of the
International Botanical Con-
gress.
Its officers are:
(1) the president of the Nomenclature Section,
elected
by the organizing committee of
the International Botanical Congress in
question;
(2) the recorder,
appointed by the same organizing committee;
(3)
the rapporteur-général, elected by the previous Congress;
(4) the vice-rap-
porteur,
elected by the organizing committee
on the proposal of the rappor-
teur-général.
Div.III.4.
The voting on nomenclature proposals is of two kinds:
(a) a pre-
liminary guiding mail vote and
(b) a final and binding vote at the Nomen-
clature Section of
the International Botanical Congress.
Qualifications for voting:
(1) The members of the International Association for Plant Taxonomy.
(2) The authors of proposals.
(3) The members of the Permanent Nomenclature Committees.
Note 1. No accumulation or transfer of personal votes is permissible.
(b) Final vote at the sessions of the Nomenclature Section:
(1)
All officially enrolled members of the Section.
No accumulation or
transfer of personal votes is permissible.
(2)
Official delegates or vice-delegates
of the institutes appearing on a
list drawn up by the Bureau of Nomenclature of
the International
Botanical Congress
and submitted to the General Committee for
final approval;
such institutes are entitled to 1-7 votes,
as specified
on the list. No single institution,
even in the wide sense of the term,
is entitled to more than 7 votes.
Transfer of institutional votes to
specified vice-delegates is permissible,
but no single person will be
allowed more than 15 votes,
personal vote included.
Institutional
votes may be deposited
at the Bureau of Nomenclature to be
counted in a specified way
for specified proposals.¹
———————————————————————
¹
Prior to each
International Botanical Congress
any institution desiring to vote in the com-
ing Nomenclature Section
(and not listed as having been allocated
a vote in the previous
Nomenclature Section) should notify
the Bureau of Nomenclature of the IBC of their wish
to be allocated one or more votes
and provide relevant information regarding the level of
taxonomic activity in their institution.
118 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 118 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Hybrids | H.1-H.3 |
NAMES OF HYBRIDS
H.1.1.
Hybridity is indicated by the use of the multiplication sign ×
or by
the addition of the prefix “notho-”¹
to the term denoting the rank of the
taxon.
H.2.1.
A hybrid between named taxa may be indicated
by placing the
multiplication sign
between the names of the taxa;
the whole expression is
then called a hybrid formula.
Ex. 1.
Agrostis L. ×
Polypogon Desf.;
Agrostis stolonifera L. ×
Polypogon monspeliensis
(L.) Desf.;
Salix aurita L. ×
S. caprea L.;
Mentha aquatica L. ×
M. arvensis L. ×
M. spicata
L.;
Polypodium vulgare subsp.
prionodes (Asch.) Rothm. × subsp.
vulgare; Tilletia caries
(Bjerk.) Tul. ×
T. foetida (Wallr.) Liro.
H.2A.1.
It is usually preferable to place the names or epithets
in a formula in al-
phabetical order. The direction
of a cross may be indicated by including the sexual
symbols
(♀ : female; ♂ : male) in the formula,
or by placing the female parent first.
If a non-alphabetical
sequence is used, its basis should be clearly indicated.
H.3.1.
Hybrids between representatives of two or more taxa
may receive a
name. For nomenclatural purposes,
the hybrid nature of a taxon is indicated
by placing
the multiplication sign × before the name of
an intergeneric hy-
brid or before the epithet
in the name of an interspecific hybrid,
or by
prefixing the term “notho-”
(optionally abbreviated “n-”) to the term de-
———————————————————————
¹ From the Greek νόθος, nothos, meaning hybrid.
119 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 119 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
H.3-H.4 | Hybrids |
noting the rank of the taxon (see Art.
3.2 and
4.4).
All such taxa are desig-
nated nothotaxa.
Ex. 1.
(The putative or known parentage is found in Art. H.2
Ex. 1.)
×Agropogon P. Fourn.
(1934);
×Agropogon littoralis (Sm.) C. E. Hubb. (1946);
Salix
×capreola Andersson (1867);
Mentha
×smithiana R. A. Graham (1949);
Polypodium vulgare nothosubsp.
mantoniae
(Rothm.) Schidlay
(in Futák, Fl. Slov. 2: 225. 1966).
H.3.2.
A nothotaxon cannot be designated unless at least one
parental tax-
on is known or can be postulated.
H.3.3.
For purposes of homonymy and synonymy the multiplication
sign
and the prefix “notho-” are disregarded.
Ex. 2.
×Hordelymus Bachteev & Darevsk. (1950)
(= Elymus L. ×
Hordeum L.) is a later
homonym of
Hordelymus
(Jess.)
Harz (1885).
Note 1.
Taxa which are believed to be of hybrid origin
need not be designated as
nothotaxa.
Ex. 3.
The true-breeding tetraploid raised
from the artificial cross
Digitalis grandiflora L. ×
D. purpurea L.
may, if desired, be referred to as
D. mertonensis B. H. Buxton & C. D. Darl.
(1931);
Triticum aestivum L. (1753)
is treated as a species
although it is not found in nature
and its genome has been shown
to be composed of those of
T. dicoccoides (Körn.) Körn.,
T.
speltoides (Tausch) Gren. ex K. Richt., and
T. tauschii (Coss.) Schmalh.;
the taxon known as
Phlox divaricata subsp.
laphamii (A. W. Wood) Wherry
(in Morris Arbor. Monogr. 3: 41.
1955)
is believed by Levin (in Evolution 21: 92-108. 1967)
to be a stabilized product of
hybridization between
P. divaricata L. subsp.
divaricata and
P. pilosa subsp.
ozarkana
Wherry;
Rosa canina L. (1753),
a polyploid believed
to be of ancient hybrid origin, is
treated as a species.
H.3A.1.
The multiplication sign
×,
indicating
the hybrid nature
of a taxon,
should
be placed
so as to express
that it belongs with
the name or epithet
but is not actually
part of it.
The exact amount of space,
if any, between the
multiplication sign
and
the initial letter of the name or epithet
should depend on
what best serves
read-
ability.
Note 1.
The multiplication sign ×
in a hybrid formula is always placed between,
and separate from, the names of the parents.
H.3A.2.
If the multiplication sign
is not
available it
should be approximated by a
lower case
letter “x” (not italicized).
H.4.1.
When all the parent taxa can be postulated
or are known, a notho-
taxon is circumscribed so as to include
all individuals (as far as they can be
120 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 120 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Hybrids | H.4-H.5A |
recognized) derived from the crossing
of representatives of the stated par-
ent taxa (i.e. not only the
Fı
but subsequent filial generations
and also back-
crosses
and combinations of these).
There can thus be only one correct
name corresponding to a particular hybrid formula;
this is the earliest le-
gitimate name (see Art.
6.3)
in the appropriate rank (Art.
H.5),
and other
names to which the same hybrid formula
applies are synonyms of it.
Ex. 1.
The names
Oenothera
×wienii Renner ex Rostański (1977) and
O.
×drawertii Renner
ex Rostański (1966)
are both considered to apply to the hybrid
O. biennis L. ×
O. villosa
Thunb.;
the types of the two nothospecific names
are known to differ by a whole gene
complex; nevertheless, the later name
is treated as a synonym of the earlier.
Note 1.
Variation within nothospecies
and nothotaxa of lower rank
may be treated
according to Art.
H.12
or, if appropriate, according to the
International code of no-
menclature for cultivated plants.
H.5.1.
The appropriate rank of a nothotaxon is
that of the postulated or
known parent taxa.
H.5.2.
If the postulated or known parent taxa
are of unequal rank the ap-
propriate rank
of the nothotaxon is the lowest of these ranks.
Note 1.
When a taxon is designated by a name in a rank
inappropriate to its hybrid
formula, the name is incorrect in relation
to that hybrid formula but may never-
theless be correct,
or may become correct later (see also Art. 52
Note 3).
Ex. 1.
The combination
Elymus
×laxus (Fr.) Melderis & D. C. McClint. (1983),
based on
Triticum laxum Fr. (1842),
was published for hybrids with the formula
E. farctus subsp.
boreoatlanticus (Simonet & Guin.) Melderis ×
E. repens (L.) Gould,
so that the combination
is in a rank inappropriate to the hybrid formula.
It is, however, the correct name applicable to
all hybrids between
E. farctus (Viv.) Melderis and
E. repens.
Ex. 2.
Radcliffe-Smith
incorrectly published the nothospecific name
Euphorbia
×cornu-
biensis Radcl.-Sm. (1985) for
E. amygdaloides L. ×
E. characias subsp.
wulfenii (W. D.
J. Koch) Radcl.-Sm.,
although the correct designation
for hybrids between
E. amygdaloides
and
E. characias L. is
E.
×martini Rouy (1900); later,
he remedied his mistake by publishing
the combination
E.
×martini nothosubsp.
cornubiensis (Radcl.-Sm.) Radcl.-Sm.
(in Taxon
35: 349. 1986).
However, the name
E.
×cornubiensis
is potentially correct for hybrids with
the formula
E. amygdaloides ×
E. wulfenii W. D. J. Koch.
H.5A.1.
When publishing a name of a new nothotaxon
at the rank of species or
below, authors should provide
any available information on the taxonomic identity,
at lower ranks, of the known or postulated parent plants
of the type of the name.
121 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 121 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
H.6 | Hybrids |
H.6.1.
A nothogeneric name
(i.e. the name at generic rank for a hybrid be-
tween representatives of two or more genera)
is a condensed formula or is
equivalent to a condensed formula
(but see Art.
11.9).
H.6.2.
The nothogeneric name of a bigeneric hybrid
is a condensed for-
mula in which the names adopted
for the parental genera are combined into
a single word,
using the first part or the whole of one,
the last part or the
whole of the other
(but not the whole of both) and,
optionally, a connecting
vowel.
Ex. 1.
×Agropogon P. Fourn. (1934) (=
Agrostis L. ×
Polypogon Desf.);
×Gymnanacamptis
Asch. & Graebn. (1907) (=
Anacamptis Rich. ×
Gymnadenia R. Br.);
×Cupressocyparis
Dallim. (1938) (=
Chamaecyparis Spach ×
Cupressus L.);
×Seleniphyllum G. D. Rowley
(1962) (=
Epiphyllum Haw. ×
Selenicereus (A. Berger) Britton & Rose).
Ex. 2.
×Amarcrinum Coutts (1925)
is correct for
Amaryllis L. ×
Crinum L., not
“×Crin-
donna”.
The latter formula was proposed
by Ragionieri (1921) for the same nothogenus, but
was formed from
the generic name
adopted for one parent
(Crinum) and a synonym
(Belladonna Sweet)
of the generic name adopted for the other
(Amaryllis).
Being contrary to
Art. H.6,
it is not validly published under Art.
32.1(c).
Ex. 3.
The name
×Leucadenia Schltr. (1919) is correct for
Leucorchis E. Mey. ×
Gymn-
adenia R. Br.,
but if the generic name
Pseudorchis Ség. is adopted instead of
Leucorchis,
×Pseudadenia P. F. Hunt (1971) is correct.
Ex. 4.
Boivin (1967) published
×Maltea for what he considered
to be the intergeneric hy-
brid
Phippsia (Trin.) R. Br. ×
Puccinellia Parl.
As this is not a condensed formula,
the name
cannot be used for that
intergeneric hybrid, for which the correct name is
×Pucciphippsia
Tzvelev (1971).
Boivin did, however, provide a
Latin description and designate a type;
consequently,
Maltea B. Boivin
is a validly published generic name
and is correct if its type
is treated as belonging to a separate genus,
not to a nothogenus.
H.6.3.
The nothogeneric name of an intergeneric hybrid
derived from four
or more genera
is formed from the name of a person
to which is added the
termination
-ara; no such name may exceed eight syllables.
Such a name is
regarded as a condensed formula.
Ex. 5.
×Beallara Moir (1970) (=
Brassia R. Br. ×
Cochlioda Lindl. ×
Miltonia Lindl.
×
Odontoglossum Kunth).
H.6.4.
The nothogeneric name of a trigeneric hybrid
is either
(a) a con-
densed formula in which
the three names adopted for the parental genera
are combined into a single word
not exceeding eight syllables,
using the
whole or first part of one,
followed by the whole or any part of another,
fol-
lowed by the whole or
last part of the third
(but not the whole of all three)
and, optionally,
one or two connecting vowels, or
(b) a name formed like
that of a nothogenus derived
from four or more genera, i.e., from a personal
name to which is added the termination
-ara.
122 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 122 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Hybrids | H.6-H.8 |
Ex. 6.
×Sophrolaeliocattleya Hurst (1898) (=
Cattleya Lindl. ×
Laelia Lindl. ×
Sophronitis
Lindl.);
×Vascostylis Takakura (1964) (=
Ascocentrum Schltr. ex J. J. Sm. ×
Rhynchostylis
Blume ×
Vanda W. Jones ex R. Br.);
×Rodrettiopsis Moir (1976) (=
Comparettia Poepp. &
Endl. ×
Ionopsis Kunth ×
Rodriguezia Ruiz & Pav.);
×Devereuxara Kirsch (1970) (=
As-
cocentrum Schltr. ex J. J. Sm. ×
Phalaenopsis Blume ×
Vanda W. Jones ex R. Br.).
H.6A.1.
When a nothogeneric name is formed
from the name of a person by add-
ing the termination
-ara,
that person should preferably be a collector,
grower, or
student of the group.
H.7.1.
The name of a nothotaxon which is a hybrid
between subdivisions
of a genus
is a combination of an epithet,
which is a condensed formula
formed in the same way as a nothogeneric name (Art.
H.6.2),
with the name
of the genus.
Ex. 1.
Ptilostemon nothosect.
Platon Greuter (in Boissiera 22: 159. 1973),
comprising hy-
brids between
P. sect.
Platyrhaphium Greuter and
P. sect.
Ptilostemon;
P. nothosect.
Plinia
Greuter (in Boissiera 22: 158. 1973),
comprising hybrids between
P. sect.
Platyrhaphium
and
P. sect.
Cassinia Greuter.
H.8.1.
When the name or the epithet in the name
of a nothotaxon is a con-
densed formula (Art.
H.6 and
H.7),
the parental names used in its formation
must be those which are correct
for the particular circumscription, position,
and rank accepted for the parental taxa.
Ex. 1.
If the genus
Triticum L.
is interpreted on taxonomic grounds as including
Triticum (s.
str.) and
Agropyron Gaertn., and the genus
Hordeum L. as including
Hordeum (s. str.) and
Elymus L., then hybrids between
Agropyron and
Elymus as well as between
Triticum (s. str.)
and
Hordeum (s. str.)
are placed in the same nothogenus,
×Tritordeum Asch. & Graebn.
(1902).
If, however,
Agropyron is separated generically from
Triticum, hybrids between
Agropyron and
Hordeum (s. str. or s. lat.)
are placed in the nothogenus
×Agrohordeum A.
Camus (1927).
Similarly, if
Elymus is separated generically from
Hordeum, hybrids be-
tween
Elymus and
Triticum (s. str. or s. lat.) are placed in the nothogenus
×Elymotriticum P.
Fourn. (1935).
If both
Agropyron and
Elymus are given generic rank,
hybrids between them
are placed in the nothogenus
×Agroelymus A. Camus (1927);
×Tritordeum is then restricted
to hybrids between
Hordeum (s. str.) and
Triticum (s. str.), and hybrids between
Elymus and
Hordeum are placed in
×Elyhordeum Mansf. ex Tsitsin & Petrova (1955),
a substitute name
for
×Hordelymus Bachteev & Darevsk. (1950) non
Hordelymus
(Jess.)
Harz (1885).
H.8.2.
Names ending in
-ara for nothogenera, which are equivalent
to con-
densed formulae (Art.
H.6.3-4),
are applicable only to plants which are ac-
cepted taxonomically as derived from the parents named.
123 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 123 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
H.8-H.10 | Hybrids |
Ex. 2.
If
Euanthe Schltr.
is recognized as a distinct genus,
hybrids simultaneously involving
its only species,
E. sanderiana (Rchb.) Schltr.,
and the three genera
Arachnis Blume,
Ren-
anthera Lour., and
Vanda W. Jones ex R. Br. must be placed in
×Cogniauxara Garay & H.
R. Sweet (1966);
if, on the other hand,
E. sanderiana is included in
Vanda, the same hybrids
are placed in
×Holttumara Holttum (1958)
(Arachnis ×
Renanthera ×
Vanda).
H.9.1.
In order to be validly published,
the name of a nothogenus
or of a
nothotaxon with the rank
of subdivision of a genus (Art.
H.6 and
H.7)
must
be effectively published (see Art.
29-31)
with a statement of the names of
the parent genera or subdivisions of genera,
but no description or diagnosis
is necessary,
whether in Latin or in any other language.
Ex. 1.
Validly published names:
×Philageria Mast. (1872),
published with a statement of
parentage,
Lapageria Ruiz & Pav. ×
Philesia Comm. ex Juss.;
Eryngium nothosect.
Alpes-
tria Burdet & Miège, pro sect.
(in Candollea 23: 116. 1968),
published with a statement of
its parentage,
E. sect.
Alpina H. Wolff ×
E. sect.
Campestria H. Wolff;
×Agrohordeum A.
Camus (1927) (=
Agropyron Gaertn. ×
Hordeum L.), of which
×Hordeopyron Simonet
(1935,
“Hordeopyrum”) is a later synonym.
Note 1.
Since the names
of nothogenera
and nothotaxa
with the rank
of a
subdivision of a genus are condensed formulae
or treated as such,
they do not have
types.
Ex. 2.
The name
×Ericalluna Krüssm. (1960)
was published for plants
which were thought
to be the product of the cross
Calluna vulgaris (L.) Hull ×
Erica cinerea L.
If it is considered
that these are not hybrids,
but are variants of
E. cinerea, the name
×Ericalluna Krüssm.
remains available for use
if and when known or postulated plants of
Calluna Salisb. ×
Erica
L. should appear.
Ex. 3.
×Arabidobrassica
Gleba & Fr. Hoffm.
(in Naturwissenschaften 66: 548. 1979), a
nothogeneric name which was validly published
with a statement of parentage for the result
of somatic hybridization by protoplast fusion of
Arabidopsis thaliana (L.) Heynh. with
Brassica campestris L.,
is also available for intergeneric hybrids
resulting from normal
crosses between
Arabidopsis Heynh. and
Brassica L., should any be produced.
Note 2.
However,
names published merely in anticipation
of the existence of a
hybrid are not validly published under Art.
34.1(b).
H.10.1.
Names of nothotaxa at the rank of species
or below must conform
with the provisions
(a) in the body of the
Code applicable to the same ranks
(see Art.
40.1) and
(b) in Art.
H.3.
Infringements of Art.
H.3.1.
are treated as
errors to be corrected
(see also Art.
11.9).
Ex. 1.
The nothospecies name
Melampsora
×columbiana G. Newc.
(in Mycol. Res. 104:
271. 2000)
was validly published, with a Latin description
and designation of a holotype,
for
the hybrid between
M. medusae Thüm. and
M. occidentalis H. S. Jacks.
124 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 124 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Hybrids | H.10-H.10B |
H.10.2.
Taxa previously published as species
or infraspecific taxa which
are later considered to be nothotaxa
may be indicated as such, without
change of rank, in conformity with Art.
3 and
4
and by the application of
Art.
50
(which also operates in the reverse direction).
H.10.3.
The following are considered to be formulae
and not true epithets:
designations consisting
of the epithets of the names of the parents com-
bined in unaltered form by a hyphen,
or with only the termination of one
epithet changed, or consisting of the specific epithet
of the name of one
parent combined with the generic name of the other
(with or without
change of termination).
Ex. 2.
The designation
Potentilla “atrosanguinea-pedata”
published by Maund
(in Bot.
Gard. 5: No. 385, t. 97. 1833)
is considered to be a formula meaning
P.
atrosanguinea Lodd.
ex D. Don ×
P. pedata Nestl.
Ex. 3.
Verbascum “nigro-lychnitis”
(Schiede, Pl. Hybr.: 40. 1825)
is considered to be a
formula,
Verbascum lychnitis L. ×
V. nigrum L.;
the correct binary name for this hybrid is
V.
×schiedeanum W. D. J. Koch (1844).
Ex. 4.
The following names
include true epithets
(but see
Rec. H.10A):
Acaena
×anserovina Orchard (1969) (from
A. anserinifolia
(J. R. Forst. & G. Forst.) J. Armstr.
and
A. ovina A. Cunn.);
Micromeria
×benthamineolens Svent. (1969) (from
M. benthamii
Webb & Berthel. and
M. pineolens Svent.).
Note 1.
Since the name of a nothotaxon
at the rank of species or below has a type,
statements of parentage play a secondary part
in determining the application of the
name.
Ex. 5.
Quercus
×deamii Trel. (in Mem. Natl. Acad. Sci. 20: 14. 1924)
when described was
considered as the cross
Q. alba L. ×
Q. muehlenbergii Engelm.
However, progeny grown
from acorns from the tree
from which the type originated led Bartlett to conclude
that the
parents were in fact
Q. macrocarpa Michx. and
Q. muehlenbergii.
If this conclusion is
accepted, the name
Q.
×deamii applies to
Q. macrocarpa ×
Q. muehlenbergii, and not to
Q. alba ×
Q. muehlenbergii.
H.10A.1.
In forming epithets for names of nothotaxa
at the rank of species and
below,
authors should avoid combining parts of the epithets
of the names of the
parents.
H.10B.1.
When contemplating the publication of new names
for hybrids between
named infraspecific taxa,
authors should carefully consider
whether they are really
needed,
bearing in mind that formulae, though more cumbersome,
are more infor-
mative.
125 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 125 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
H.11-H.12 | Hybrids |
H.11.1.
The name of a nothospecies
of which the postulated or known par-
ent species belong to different genera
is a combination of a nothospecific
epithet with a nothogeneric name.
Ex. 1.
×Heucherella tiarelloides (Lemoine &
É. Lemoine) H. R. Wehrh.
is considered to
have originated
from the cross between a garden hybrid of
Heuchera L. and
Tiarella cordi-
folia L.
(see Stearn in Bot. Mag. 165: ad t. 31. 1948).
Its original name,
Heuchera
×tiarel-
loides Lemoine &
É. Lemoine (1912),
is therefore incorrect.
Ex. 2.
When
Orchis fuchsii Druce was renamed
Dactylorhiza fuchsii (Druce) Soó
the name
for its hybrid with
Coeloglossum viride (L.) Hartm.,
×Orchicoeloglossum mixtum Asch. &
Graebn. (1907),
became the basis of the necessary new combination
×Dactyloglossum mix-
tum (Asch. & Graebn.) Rauschert (1969).
H.11.2.
The final epithet in the name
of an infraspecific nothotaxon of
which the postulated or known parental taxa
are assigned to different spe-
cies, may be placed subordinate
to the name of a nothospecies (but see Rec.
H.10B).
Ex. 3.
Mentha
×piperita L. nothosubsp.
piperita (=
M. aquatica L. ×
M. spicata L. subsp.
spicata);
Mentha
×piperita nothosubsp.
pyramidalis (Ten.) Harley
(in Kew Bull. 37: 604.
1983) (=
M. aquatica L. ×
M. spicata subsp.
tomentosa (Briq.) Harley).
H.12.1.
Subordinate taxa within nothospecies
may be recognized without
an obligation
to specify parent taxa at the subordinate rank.
In this case
non-hybrid infraspecific categories
of the appropriate rank are used.
Ex. 1.
Mentha
×piperita f.
hirsuta Sole;
Populus
×canadensis var.
serotina (R. Hartig)
Rehder and
P.
×canadensis var.
marilandica (Poir.) Rehder
(see also Art. H.4
Note 1).
Note 1.
As there is no statement of parentage
at the rank concerned there is no
control of circumscription at this rank
by parentage (compare Art.
H.4).
Note 2 .
It is not feasible to treat subdivisions
of nothospecies by the methods of
both Art.
H.10 and
H.12.1
at the same rank.
H.12.2.
Names published at the rank of nothomorph¹
are treated as having
been published as names of varieties (see Art.
50).
———————————————————————
¹
Pre-Sydney editions of the
Code permitted only one rank
under provisions equivalent to
H.12. That rank was equivalent to variety and
the category was termed “nothomorph”.
126 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 126 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
[ Appendix II,
listing conserved names of families,
is not included here ]
[ Appendix IIA,
Nomina familiarum algarum, fungorum,
pteridophytorum et fossilium conservanda et rejicienda is not
included here ]
[ Appendix IIB,
Nomina familiarum bryophytorum et
spermatophytorum conservanda, is not included here ]
[ Appendix III,
Nomina generica conservanda et rejicienda,
is not included here ]
[ Appendix IV,
Nomina specifica conservanda et rejicienda,
is not included here ]
[ Appendix V,
Nomina utique rejicienda, is not included here ]
[ Appendix VI,
Opera utique oppressa, is not included here ]
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 127 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Glossary | App. VII |
GLOSSARY OF TERMS USED AND DEFINED IN THIS CODE
The particular usage of a few other words,
not defined in the
Code,
is also
indicated;
these are italicized in the list below
and are accompanied by
editorial explanation of their use.
admixture.
[Not defined] –
something mixed in,
especially a minor ingredient,
used of components of a gathering
that represent a taxon or taxa other than
that intended by the collector,
and which do not preclude the gathering, or
part thereof, being a type specimen,
the admixture being disregarded
(Art.
18.2).
alternative family names.
The eight family names, regularly formed in accord-
ance with Art.
18.1,
allowed as alternatives (Art.
18.6)
to the family names of
long usage treated as validly published under Art.
18.5.
alternative names.
Two or more different names proposed simultaneously for
the same taxon by the same author (Art.
34.2).
analysis. See illustration with analysis.
anamorph. A mitotic asexual morph in pleomorphic fungi (Art. 59.1).
ascription.
The direct association of the name of a person
or persons with a new
name or description or diagnosis of a taxon (Art.
46.3).
automatic typification.
(1) Typification of a nomenclaturally superfluous and il-
legitimate name by the type of the name
which ought to have been adopted
under the rules (Art.
7.5).
(2) Typification of the name of a taxon above the
rank of genus by the type of the generic name
on which it is based (Art.
10.6
and
10.7).
autonym.
A generic name or specific epithet repeated
without an author citation
as the final epithet in the name
of a subdivision of a genus or
of an infra-
specific taxon that includes the type of the adopted,
legitimate name of the
genus or species, respectively (Art.
22.1 and
26.1).
available. [Not defined] –
applied to an epithet in a legitimate (Art.
11.5 and
15.5)
or illegitimate (Art.
58.1)
name, the type of which falls within the cir-
484 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 128 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
App. VII | Glossary |
cumscription of the taxon under consideration
and where the use of the epi-
thet would not be contrary to the rules (see also
available name)].
available name.
A name published under the
International Code of Zoological
Nomenclature with a status equivalent to that of
a validly published name
under the
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature
(Art. 45.4
footnote).
avowed substitute
(replacement name, nomen novum).
A name proposed as a
substitute for a previously published name (Art.
7.3 and
33.4).
basionym.
A previously published legitimate name-bringing
or epithet-bringing
synonym from which a new name
is formed for a taxon of different rank or
position (Art.
33.4,
49.1 and
52.3).
binary combination.
A generic name combined with a specific epithet to form a
specific name (Art.
23.1).
binary designation. [Not defined] –
an apparent binary combination that has not
been validly published (Art. 46
Note 2;
see also Art.
6.3).
combinatio nova (comb. nov.). See new combination.
combination.
A name of a taxon below the rank of genus,
consisting of the name
of a genus combined with one or two epithets (Art.
6.7).
compound.
A name or epithet which combines elements
derived from two or
more Greek or Latin words,
a regular compound being one in which a noun
or adjective in a non-final position
appears as a modified stem (Rec.
60G.1)
(see also
pseudocompound).
confusingly similar names.
Orthographically similar names
of genera or epithets
of names of subdivisions of genera,
of species, or of infraspecific taxa likely
to be confused (Art.
53.3 and
53.4).
conserved name (nomen conservandum).
(1) A name of a family, genus, or
species ruled as legitimate and with precedence
over other specified names
even though it may have been illegitimate
when published or lack priority
(Art.
14.1–14.7).
(2) A name for which its type, orthography,
or gender has
been fixed by the conservation process (Art.
14.1,
14.9–14.11).
correct name.
The name of a taxon with a particular circumscription,
position,
and rank that must be adopted
in accordance with the rules (Art.
6.6,
11.1,
11.3, and
11.4).
cultivar.
A special category of plants used in agriculture,
forestry, and horti-
culture defined and regulated in the
International Code of Nomenclature for
Cultivated Plants (Art. 28
Notes 2,
4, and
5).
date of name. The date of valid publication of a name (Art. 45.1).
descriptio generico-specifica.
A single description
simultaneously validating the
names of a genus and its single species (Art.
42.1).
485 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 129 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Glossary | App. VII |
description. [Not defined] –
a written statement
of a feature or features of a taxon
required for valid publication of its name
(cf. Art.
32.1(d) and
32.3).
descriptive name.
A name of a taxon above the rank of family
not based on a
generic name (Art.
16.1).
designation. [Not defined] –
the term used for what appears
to be a name but that
has not been validly published (Art.
23.6, 46
Note 2;
see also Art.
6.3).
diagnosis.
A statement of that
which in the opinion of its author
distinguishes the
taxon from other taxa (Art.
32.2).
duplicate.
Part of a single gathering of a single species
or infraspecific taxon
made by the same collector(s) at one time (Art. 8.3
footnote).
effective publication. Publication in accordance with Art. 29-31 (Art. 6.1).
epithet.
The final word in a binary combination
and the word following the con-
necting term denoting rank in other combinations (Art.
6.7,
11.4,
21.1,
23.1,
and
24.1).
epitype.
A specimen or illustration selected
to serve as an interpretative type
when the holotype, lectotype,
or previously designated neotype,
or all orig-
inal material associated
with a validly published name
cannot be identified
for the purpose of precise application
of the name of a taxon (Art.
9.7).
exsiccata. [Not defined] –
Latin adjective used as noun,
nominative plural “exsic-
catae”, refers to a set of dried specimens,
usually numbered and with printed
labels, distributed by sale, gift, or exchange
(cf. Art.
30.4 and 30
Note 1)].
ex-type (ex typo) [also ex-holotype (ex holotypo),
ex-isotype (ex isotypo)].
A
living isolate obtained from the type of a name
when this is a culture per-
manently preserved
in a metabolically inactive state (Rec.
8B.2).
final epithet.
The last epithet in sequence
in any particular combination, whether
in the rank of a subdivision of a genus,
or of a species, or of an infraspecific
taxon (Art. 11.4
footnote).
forma specialis. See special form.
form-taxon. In pleomorphic fungi, a taxon typified by an anamorph (Art. 59.3).
fossil taxon.
A taxon the name of which
is based on a fossil type (Pre. 7
footnote
and Art.
13.3).
gathering. [Not defined] –
something brought together,
used for a collection of
one or more specimens
made at the same place and time (Art.
8.2).
heterotypic synonym (taxonomic synonym).
A synonym based on a type dif-
ferent from that of the accepted name (Art.
14.4);
termed a “subjective syno-
nym” in the
International Code of
Zoological Nomenclature and the
Bacteri-
ological Code (Art. 14.4
footnote).
486 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 130 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
App. VII | Glossary |
holomorph. A pleomorphic fungal species in all its morphs (Art. 59.1).
holotype.
The one specimen or illustration used
by the author or designated by
the author as the nomenclatural type (Art.
9.1).
homonym.
A name spelled exactly like another name
published for a taxon of the
same rank based on a different type (Art.
53.1).
Note. Names of subdivisions
of genera or infraspecific taxa
with the same epithet
even if of different rank
are treated as homonyms
disregarding the connecting term (Art.
53.4).
homotypic synonym (nomenclatural synonym).
A synonym based on the same
type as that of another name in the same rank (Art.
14.4);
termed an “objec-
tive synonym” in the
International Code of Zoological Nomenclature and the
Bacteriological Code (Art. 14.4
footnote).
hybrid formula.
An expression consisting of the names
of the parent taxa of a
hybrid with a multiplication sign
placed between them (Art.
H.2.1).
illegitimate name.
A validly published name
that is not in accordance with one
or more rules (Art.
6.4),
principally those on superfluity (Art.
52)
and homo-
nymy (Art.
53 and
54).
illustration with analysis.
An illustration with a figure
or group of figures, in
vascular plants commonly separate
from the main illustration, showing de-
tails aiding identification (Art.
42.4).
improper Latin termination.
A termination of a name or epithet not agreeing
with the termination mandated by the Code (Art.
16.3,
18.4,
19.6, and
32.7).
indelible autograph.
Handwritten material reproduced by some mechanical or
graphic process (such as lithography,
offset, or metallic etching) (Art.
30.2).
indirect reference.
A clear (if cryptic) indication,
by an author citation or in
some other way,
that a previously and effectively published description or
diagnosis applies (Art.
32.6).
informal usage.
Usage of rank-denoting terms
at more than one non-successive
position in the taxonomic sequence.
Note: names involved in such usage are
validly published but unranked (Art.
33.11).
isonym.
The same name based on the same type,
published independently at dif-
ferent times by different authors.
Note: only the earliest isonym has nomen-
clatural status (Art. 6
Note
2).
isosyntype. A duplicate of a syntype (Art. 9.10).
isotype. A duplicate specimen of the holotype (Art. 9.3).
later homonym. A homonym published later than another (Art. 53.1).
lectotype.
A specimen or illustration
designated from the original material as the
nomenclatural type
if no holotype was indicated
at the time of publication, or
if it is missing,
or if it is found to belong
to more than one taxon (Art.
9.2).
487 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 131 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Glossary | App. VII |
legitimate name.
A validly published name
that is in accordance with all rules
(Art.
6.5).
misplaced term.
A rank-denoting term used
contrary to the relative order speci-
fied in the Code (Art.
18.2,
19.2,
33.9, and 33
Note 3).
monotypic genus.
A genus for which a single binomial
is validly published (Art.
42.2).
morphotaxon.
A fossil taxon which,
for nomenclatural purposes,
comprises only
one part, life-history stage,
or preservational state
represented by the corres-
ponding nomenclatural type (Art.
1.2).
name.
A name that has been validly published,
whether it is legitimate or illegit-
imate (Art.
6.3).
neotype.
A specimen or illustration selected
to serve as nomenclatural type if no
original material is extant
or as long as it is missing (Art.
9.6).
new combination.
A combination formed
from a previously published legitimate
name and employing the same final epithet
(or employing the name itself if
formed from a generic name) (Art.
7.4).
new name.
A newly published name. Note:
this name may be the name of a new
taxon,
a new combination,
a name at a new rank (status novus),
or an avowed
substitute (nomen novum) for an existing name (Art.
7.3,
7.4, 9
Note 1, Rec.
45A.1).
nomen conservandum (nom. cons.). See conserved name.
nomen novum (nom. nov.). See avowed substitute.
nomen nudum (nom. nud.).
A name of a new taxon published
without a descrip-
tion or diagnosis or reference
to a description or diagnosis (Rec.
50B.1).
nomen rejiciendum (nom. rej.).
A name rejected in favour of a name conserved
under Art.
14
or a name ruled as rejected under Art.
56
(see also
“
rejected
name”)
(App. II,
III,
IV, and
V).
nomen utique rejiciendum.
A name ruled as rejected under Art.
56.
Note: it and
all combinations based on it
are not to be used (see
App. V).
nomenclatural novelties.
New names and descriptions
or diagnoses of new taxa
(Rec.
30A).
nomenclatural synonym. See homotypic synonym.
nomenclatural type.
The element to which the name of a taxon
is permanently
attached (Art.
7.2).
non-fossil taxon.
A taxon the name of which
is based on a non-fossil type (Pre. 7
footnote
and Art.
13.3).
nothogenus. A hybrid genus (Art. 3.2).
488 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 132 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
App. VII | Glossary |
nothomorph.
A rank-denoting term formerly used
for a subordinate taxon within
a nothospecies.
Names published as nothomorphs are now treated as names
of varieties (Art.
H.12.2 and
footnote).
nothospecies. A hybrid species (Art. 3.2).
nothotaxon. A hybrid taxon (Art. 3.2 and H.3.1).
objective synonym. See homotypic synonym.
opera utique oppressa.
Works, ruled as suppressed,
in which names in specified
ranks are not validly published (Art.
32.9 and
App. VI).
original material.
Specimens and illustrations
indicated in the protologue of a
name (see Art. 9
Note 2
for details).
original spelling.
The spelling employed
when a name was validly published
(Art.
60.2).
orthographic variants.
Various spelling, compounding,
and inflectional forms of
a name or its epithet,
only one nomenclatural type being involved (Art.
61.2).
page reference.
Citation of the page or pages
on which the basionym or replaced
synonym was validly published (Art. 33
Note 1).
paratype.
A specimen cited in the protologue
that is neither the holotype nor an
isotype,
nor one of the syntypes
if two or more specimens were simulta-
neously designated as types (Art.
9.5).
plant. Any organism traditionally studied by botanists (Pre. 1 footnote and Pre.7).
position. [Not defined] –
used to denote the placement of a taxon
relative to other
taxa in a classification,
regardless of rank
(Prin. IV, Art.
6.6 and
11.1).
priority.
A right to precedence established
by the date of valid publication of a
legitimate name (Art.
11)
or of an illegitimate earlier homonym (Art.
45.3),
or by the date of designation of a type (Art.
7.10,
7.11).
protologue.
Everything associated with a name
at its valid publication,
i.e. de-
scription or diagnosis, illustrations, references,
synonymy, geographical data,
citation of specimens, discussion, and comments
(Rec. 8A
footnote).
provisional name.
A name proposed in anticipation of the future acceptance of
the taxon concerned, or of a particular circumscription,
position, or rank of
the taxon (Art.
34.1).
pseudocompound.
A name or epithet
which combines elements derived from
two or more Greek or Latin words
and in which a noun or adjective in a non-
final position appears
as a word with a case ending,
not as a modified stem
(Rec.
60G.1(b)) (see also
compound).
rank. [Not defined] –
used for the relative position of a taxon
in the taxonomic
hierarchy (Art.
2.1).
489 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 133 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
Glossary | App. VII |
rejected name.
A name the use of which is prohibited,
either by formal action
under Art.
14 or
56
overriding other provisions of the Code (see
nomen
rejiciendum and
nomen utique rejiciendum)
or because it was nomenclatur-
ally superfluous when published (Art.
52)
or a later homonym (Art.
53 and
54).
replaced synonym.
The name replaced
by an avowed substitute (nomen novum,
replacement name) (Art.
33.4).
replacement name. See avowed substitute.
sanctioned name.
The name of a fungus treated
as if conserved against earlier
homonyms and competing synonyms,
through acceptance in one of two sanc-
tioning works (Art.
15).
special form (forma specialis).
A taxon of parasites, especially fungi,
character-
ized from a physiological standpoint
but scarcely or not at all from a morpho-
logical standpoint,
the nomenclature of which is not governed by this Code
(Art. 4
Note 4).
specimen.
A gathering, or part of a gathering,
of a single species or infraspecific
taxon made at one time,
disregarding admixtures (Art.
8.2).
status.
(1) Nomenclatural standing
with regard to effective publication,
valid pub-
lication, legitimacy, and correctness (Art.
6 and
12.1).
(2) Rank of a taxon
within the taxonomic hierarchy (see
status novus) (Art.
7.4).
status novus (stat. nov.).
Assignment of a taxon
to a different rank within the
taxonomic hierarchy, e.g. when an infraspecific taxon
is raised to the rank of
species or the inverse change occurs (Art.
7.4, Rec.
21B.4 and
24B.2).
subdivision of a family.
Any taxon of a rank between family and genus (Art. 4
Note
2).
subdivision of a genus.
Any taxon of a rank between genus and species
(Art. 4
Note
2).
subjective synonym. See heterotypic synonym.
superfluous name.
A name applied to a taxon
circumscribed by the author to de-
finitely include the type of a name
which ought to have been adopted, or of
which the epithet ought to have been adopted
under the rules (Art.
52.1).
synonym.
A name considered to apply
to the same taxon as the accepted name
(Art.
7.2).
syntype.
Any specimen cited in the protologue when
there
is no holotype,
or any of two or more specimens
simultaneously designated as types (Art.
9.4).
tautonym.
A binary combination
in which the specific epithet exactly repeats the
generic name (Art.
23.4).
490 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 134 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
App. VII | Glossary |
taxon (taxa). A taxonomic group at any rank (Art. 1.1).
teleomorph. See heterotypic synonym.
teleomorph. Meiotic sexual morph in pleomorphic fungi (Art. 59.1).
type. See nomenclatural type.
validate. [Not defined] –
to make valid,
used in the context of valid publication of
a name,
either with reference to an existing designation
(e.g. Art. 42
Ex. 1),
or in describing the method
by which this is effected (e.g. Rec.
32A.1).
validly published name.
A name effectively published
and in accordance with
Art.
32-45 or
H.9 (Art.
6.2).
voted example.
An Example mandated by a Congress
to be inserted in the Code
in order to legislate nomenclatural practice
when the corresponding Article is
open to divergent interpretation
or does not adequately cover the matter (as
contrasted with other Examples
provided by the Editorial Committee)
(Art. 7
Ex. 10
footnote).
491 |
_______________________________________________________________
International Code of Botanical Nomenclature, 2006 — Vienna Code
– 135 –
text: © 2006, IAPT — web-edition: © 2014, Paul van Rijckevorsel (all rights reserved)
_______________________________________________________________
[ Not present in this edition ]
[ see “Corrections to the Vienna Code”,
Taxon 56: 585-586. 2007 ]